Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
understand
the
importance
of
organizing
ideas
before
writing.To
know
the
main
parts
of
an
article.To
organize
ideas
in
different
ways
according
to
the
type
of
writing.To
grasp
some
common
methods
of
writing.过程与方法：To
discuss
how
many
ways
they
organize
ideas
when
writing
artices.to
show
their
organization
methods
of
paragraph.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
tell
English
article
using
the
layout
of
the
method
教学重点难点
1.How
to
organize
ideas
in
different
ways
according
to
the
type
of
writing.2.How
to
grasp
some
common
methods
of
writing.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Revision翻译下列短语。1.
在周末
at
the
weekend2.
超过，多于
more
than3.
改善他们的生活
improve
their
lives4.
在我们的日常生活中
in
our
daily
life5.
节约你的零花钱
save
your
pocket
money6.
把某物捐献给某人
donate
sth.
to
sb.Step
2
Free
talkGet
the
students
to
talk
about
the
topics:Can
you
tell
a
moving
story How
can
we
tell
the
story
very
well Step
3
Presentation1.
Tell
the
students:An
article
is
often
made
up
of
three
parts:
Introduction,
main
body
and
conclusion.However,
we
can
organize
our
ideas
in
different
ways
according
to
the
type
of
writing.
Introduce
four
different
methods
of
writing.Present
“Time
order”.
Explain:
We
use
this
method
when
we
write
about
an
experience
or
an
event.
Present
the
topic
in
the
book.
Get
the
students
to
think
about
more
topics.Present
“Space
order”.
Explain
this
method
in
the
same
way
as
“Time
order”.Introduce
the
rest
two
methods
in
the
same
way.
Get
the
students
to
talk
with
their
partners
about
more
topics.Do
the
exercise
on
Page
89.
Mr
Wu
gives
the
students
some
topics
and
asks
them
to
choose
a
suitable
way
to
organize
their
ideas.
Help
them
choose
the
best
way
for
each
topic.
Write
A,
B,
C
or
D
in
the
box.1
A
day
at
Hong
Kong
Disneyland2
Good
reading
habits
are
important3
Teenagers'
after-school
activities4
My
dream
home5
Changes
in
my
hometown6
It
is
fantastic
to
be
a
volunteerKeys:
A
C
D
B
B
CStep
4
WritingWrite
a
short
passage
about
your
trip.
Using
one
of
the
type
of
writing
we
have
learnt.Sample
writing:A
trip
to
Beijing
This
summer
vacation,
I
went
to
Beijing.
It
was
a
very
great
city! First,
we
went
to
the
Great
Wall.
Like
its
name,
it
was
very
great.
We
can
see
many
mountains
around.
Next,
we
ate
the
Beijing
roast
duck,
it’s
so
delicious.
Then
we
went
to
visit
Tian'an
Men
Square.
It
was
also
fantastic. Finally,
we
lived
in
a
small
house
in
a
Beijing
hutong,
it
was
a
traditional
Beijing
building
called
'four-section
compound'. I
enjoyed
myself
a
lot.
I
love
Beijing!Step
5
HomeworkLearn
how
to
organize
ideas
according
to
the
type
of
writing.Preview
the
next
lesson.
To
translate
the
following
expressions.talk
about
the
topics:Listen
to
the
teacher
carefully.use
this
method
when
we
write
about
an
experience
or
an
event.Do
the
exercise
on
Page
89.Write
a
short
passage
about
your
trip.
Using
one
of
the
type
of
writing
we
have
learnt.To
read
the
sample
writing.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Have
a
free
talk
about
how
to
help
people
in
need.To
learn
the
writing
methods.
课堂达标
一．词汇运用。
1.
Listen！Everyone_________
(be)
reading.
Don’t
be
late
next
time.2.
While
I______________
(clean)
the
room,
the
telephone
rang.3.
It’s
very
useful
____________
(collect)
the
old
paper
and
old
books.4.
When
I
got
home
last
night,
I
heard
Lucy
__________
(sing)
in
the
next
room.5.
It
__________
(say)
that
his
father
has
gone
back
to
the
USA.6.
The
children
__________
(tell)
not
to
play
with
fire
any
more.7.---__________
the
Greens
__________
(return)
from
the
USA？
---Yes,
they
did
it
only
yesterday.8.
I
think
South
Hill
is
the
perfect
place
for
us
___________
(live)
in.9.
We
enjoyed
___________
(watch)
the
beautiful
view
of
the
country.10.
We
found
it
very
easy
_________
(learn)
to
drive
a
car.二、单项选择。(
)
1.
They
often
greet
each
other
_____
sending
emails.
A.
by
B.
to
C.
of
D.
with(
)
2.
_____
is
necessary
for
us
_____
our
own
dreams.
A.
That;
have
B.
It;
have
C.
That;
having
D.
It;
to
have(
)
3.
Don’t
_____
the
disabled
people!
It’s
not
polite.
A.
look
up
B.
look
for
C.
look
after
D.
look
down
on(
)
4.
It
is
bad
for
your
eyes
_____
computer
games
too
much.
A.
plays
B.
to
play
C.
play
D.
to
playing(
)
5.
Although
he
was
a
child,
he
tried
to
find
ways
_____
people
_____
a
better
life.
A.
to
help;
enjoy
B.
help;
enjoy
C.
to
help;
enjoying
D.
help;
enjoying
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Study
skillsA
trip
to
Beijing
This
summer
vacation,
I
went
to
Beijing.
It
was
a
very
great
city! First,
we
went
to
the
Great
Wall.
Like
its
name,
it
was
very
great.
We
can
see
many
mountains
around.
Next,
we
ate
the
Beijing
roast
duck,
it’s
so
delicious.
Then
we
went
to
visit
Tian'an
Men
Square.
It
was
also
fantastic. Finally,
we
lived
in
a
small
house
in
a
Beijing
hutong,
it
was
a
traditional
Beijing
building
called
'four-section
compound'. I
enjoyed
myself
a
lot.
I
love
Beijing!
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
tell
the
Ss
to
organize
ideas
before
writing
an
article
,
but
how
to
organize
ideas
when
writing
an
article.
By
learning,
the
Ss
are
able
to
master
four
writing
methods
such
as
“Time
order
,Space
order,
General
to
specific
,
Specific
to
general.”.
and
after
that
the
Ss
can
write
an
article
like
“A
trip
to
…”.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
understand
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.2.
To
grasp
the
expressions
with
the
present
perfect
tense.3.
To
grasp
the
expressions
with
the
simple
past
tense.4.
To
understand
different
uses
of
the
present
perfect
tense.过程与方法：to
discuss
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense
in
groups.to
show
their
results
to
the
class.情感态度与价值观：To
arouse
the
Ss’
encourage
through
discussing
in
groups.
教学重点难点
1.To
understand
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.2.
To
understand
different
uses
of
the
present
perfect
tense.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Revision完成句子。1.
北京因万里长城而著名。Beijing
_____________
the
Great
Wall.2.
这条河是个钓鱼的好地方。This
river
is
a
__________________
fishing.3.我三天前听说过这件事。I
_____________
this
_______________.自从2000年起，他就在上海工作了。
He
__________
in
Shanghai
______
2000.Step
2
PresatationTeach
the
new
words.dream
vi.&
vt.
做梦，梦想dream
about/of
想象；梦想e.g.
Do
you
often
dream
at
night
你在夜里经常做梦吗？
I
sometimes
dream
about
my
parents.
我有时梦见我的父母。I
dream
of
becoming
a
teacher.我一心想当个教师。Step
3
Grammar
explanationTranslate
some
sentences.Daniel
两年前去了北京。(Daniel
went
to
Beijing
two
years
ago.)Daniel
已经在北京居住两年了。(Daniel
has
lived
in
Beijing
for
two
years.)Tell
the
students
the
difference
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.Difference:
We
use
simple
past
tense
to
tell
what
happened
in
the
past.We
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
talk
about
an
action
that
started
in
the
past
and
continues
to
the
present.Exercises:1.
三年前他养了只猫做宠物。He
______
a
cat
as
pet
three
years
ago.2.这只宠物猫他养了三年了。He
_________
the
pet
cat
for
three
years.Daniel
上个月买了台新电脑。Daniel
bought
a
new
computer
last
month.Daniel已经买了台新电脑。Daniel
has
bought
a
new
computer.(Daniel
has
a
new
computer
now.)Differences:We
use
the
simple
past
tense
to
tell
what
happened
in
the
past.We
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
talk
about
the
result
of
an
action.When
the
action
happened
is
not
very
important.
It
may
have
just
happened
or
happened
some
time
ago.Exercises:1.
我上个星期去参观了那个新动物园。I
_______
that
new
zoo
last
week.2.
我已经参观过那个新动物园了。I
______________
that
new
zoo.吴老师2010年和2011年访问过加拿大。Mr
Wu
visited
Canada
in
2010
and
2011.吴老师已经去过加拿大两次。Mr
Wu
has
been
to
Canada
twice.Differences:We
use
the
simple
past
tense
to
tell
what
happened
in
the
past.We
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
tell
how
many
times
an
action
has
happened
till
now.Exercises:1.
我上周看过这部电影。I
_____
this
movie
last
week.2.
我已经看过这部电影很多次。I
__________
this
movie
many
times.Step
4
ExercisesA.
Amy
is
showing
Millie
some
pictures.
Complete
her
sentences
with
the
correct
forms
of
the
words
in
brackets.I_______(visit)
the
Palace
Museum
with
my
grandparents
the
other
day.I
_________(climb)
Mount
Huang
last
Summer.______
you______(try)
the
famous
Tianjin
Baozi I
am
happy
that
I
___________
(learn)
to
swim.B.
Mr
Wu
is
asking
the
students
to
make
sentences
with
the
correct
tenses.
Help
them
complete
the
sentences
with
the
correct
forms
of
the
words
in
brackets.1.
I
__________________(finish/
just)
my
homework.
Millie
_________(finish)
her
homework
20
minutes
ago.2.
I
______(write)
an
email
to
my
friend
yesterday.
Daniel
_________________
(write/
already)
two
emails.3.
I
______(be)
in
Hainan
last
week.
Some
of
our
classmates
_____________
(not
be)
to
Hainan
yet.4.
I
___________(live)
in
Sunshine
Town
since
I
was
born.
Daniel
______(live)
in
Nanjing
in
2007.C.
Millie
has
never
been
to
Nanjing.
She
is
asking
Simon
about
the
city.
Complete
their
conversation
with
the
correct
forms
of
the
words
in
brackets.Millie:
___________________
(you/be/ever)
to
Nanjing Simon:
Yes.
I(2)____________(be)
there
three
times.Millie:
When
(3)____________
(you/go)
there
last Simon:
Last
summer.
I
(4)______(spend)
a
week
there.Millie:
(5)____________
(you/like)
it Simon:
Oh
yes.
I
(6)_____(have)
a
great
time
there.
I
(7)______(visit)
many
places
of
interest
and
(8)_____(eat)
lots
of
local
food.Millie:
Lucky
you!
I
(9)_______________
(be/never)
there.D.
Millie
is
writing
about
the
USA
in
her
diary.
Help
her
complete
her
diary
entry
with
the
correct
forms
of
the
verbs
in
the
box.Saturday,
15
MarchHave
you
ever
dreamt
of
travelling
around
the
world
without
a
passport
Yes,
you
can
realize
your
dream
by
taking
an
online
tour.
Yesterday
Danniel
(1)_________
me
an
online
tour
of
the
USA.
I
(2)_____
never
_____
so
many
wonderful
pictrues
before.Last
week,
I
(3)_____
a
book
about
the
places
of
interest
in
the
USA.
I
(4)_________
20
pages
already.
It's
really
interesting.
My
dad
(5)_____
just
_________
from
the
USA,
but
I
(6)
______
never_______
there.
I
hope
I
can
visit
the
USA
some
day.Step
5
Notice1.We
often
use
these
time
expressions
with
the
present
perfect
tense:already
up
to
now
ever
until/till
now
just
so
far
recently
(not)
yetsome
day
和
the
other
day
的区别：the
other
day
相当于a
few
days
ago,意为“几天前、某天、那天、不久前”，句中用一般过去时。如：
I
met
her
in
the
street
the
other
day.几天前我在街上碰见过她。
I
bought
the
watch
the
other
day.这手表我是几天前买的。some
day指将来“总有一天、有朝一日、终将、(日后)某一天”，谓语动词用一般将来时.如:
Your
wishes
will
come
true
some
day.总有一天你的愿望会实现的。
Some
day
you’ll
have
to
pay
for
what
you
have
done.
总有一天你要为你的行为而付出代价的。Step
6
Summary
1)
一般过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响。2)
一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用，而现在完成时通常与模糊的时间状语连用，或无时间状语。一般过去时的时间状语：yesterday,
last
week，…ago,
in1980,
in
October,
just,
now等，皆为具体的时间状语。现在完成时的时间状语：for,
since,
so
far,
ever,
never,
just,
yet,
till/until,
up
to
now,
in
past
years,
always等，皆不确定的时间状语。共同的时间状语：this
morning,
tonight,
this
April,
now,
already,
recently,
lately
等。3)
现在完成时可表示持续到现在的动作或状态，动词一般是延续性的，如live,
teach,
learn,
work,
study,
know。一般过去时常用的非持续性动词有come,
go,
leave,
start,
die,
finish,
become,
get
married等。句子中如有过去时的时间副词（如yesterday,
last,
week,
in
1960）时，不能使用现在完成时，要用过去时。（错）Tom
has
written
a
letter
to
his
parents
last
night.（对）Tom
wrote
a
letter
to
his
parents
last
night. Step
7
Exercises1.
Mother
____me
a
new
coat
yesterday.
I
_______
it
on.
It
fits
me
well.
A.
had
made…have
tried
B.
made…have
tried
C.
has
made…tried
D.
made…tried
2.
We
__________
trees
last
Sunday.
So
far
we
_______
over
3,000
trees
there.
A.
planted；
planted
B.
planted；
have
planted
C.
have
planted；
planted
D.
have
planted；
have
planted
3.
I
_______
the
way.
I
________
here
for
quite
many
years.
A.
knew…have
lived
B.
knew…live
C.
know…have
lived
D.
know…live
Step
8
HomeworkFinish
off
the
exercises
in
workbook.
to
go
over
the
present
perfect
tense
and
translate
some
sentences.To
learn
the
new
words
and
some
expressions.To
discuss
the
difference
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense
in
pare
these
sentences.To
know
more
about
the
differences
between
the
two
plete
these
Exx.to
discuss
what
tense
to
use
different
time
expressions.Consolidate
the
differences
between
the
two
tenses.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Do
some
exercises
,including
the
two
tenses(the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.).Discuss
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.To
get
the
Ss
to
say
the
differences
between
the
two
tense.To
get
the
Ss
to
learn
how
to
use
time
expressions.
课堂达标
一、选择题。（
）1.
—I’m
sorry,
Cathy,
I
______
your
radio
for
such
a
long
time.
—Never
mind.
A.
have
borrowed
B.
have
lent
C.
have
kept
D.
have
returned（
）2.
—Where
have
you
______
these
days
—I
have
______
to
Yangzhou
with
my
friends.
A.
been,
gone
B.
been,
been
C.
gone,
been
D.
gone,
gone（
）3.
—Where
is
your
father
We
haven’t
seen
each
other
for
weeks.—______.
A.
He
has
been
to
America
B.
He
has
gone
to
England
C.
He
is
going
to
Australia
D.
He
would
visit
my
grandparents（
）4.
They
have
______
since
the
factory
opened.
A.
left
the
school
B.
joined
the
team
C.
become
workers
D.
worked
here（
）5.
Jim
______
the
Great
Wall
many
times.
A.
went
to
B.
goes
to
C.
has
gone
to
D.
has
been
to
板书设计
8下Unit
3
Online
tours
GrammarDifference:
use
simple
past
tense
to
tell
what
happened
in
the
past.use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
tell
how
many
times
an
action
has
happened
till
now.2.
We
often
use
these
time
expressions
with
the
present
perfect
tense:already
up
to
now
ever
until/till
now
just
so
far
recently
(not)
yet3.
一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用yesterday,
last
week，…ago,
in1980,
in
October,
just
now
ect.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
about
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.
How
to
use
these
two
tenses
is
difficult
for
the
Ss
.First
the
teacher
should
get
the
Ss
to
know
about
some
time
expressions
like
“yesterday,
last
…,
two
days
ago”,
then
get
the
Ss
to
discuss
the
usages
and
forms
of
these
two
tenses
.last
I
think
it
is
important
for
the
Ss
to
practice
more
exercises.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：To
find
five
key
points
from
an
article
.To
learn
how
to
use
five
main
points
to
write
about
an
experience
or
event
.3.
To
learn
to
organize
details
to
enrich
articles
.过程与方法：1.
To
find
five
key
points
from
an
article
.情感态度与价值观：To
learn
English
happily.
教学重点难点
Words
&
phrases:
point
/
main
points
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Free
talk
Travelling
is
very
interesting.
May
Day
is
coming
and
it’s
a
good
season
for
travelling.
Amy
will
go
traveling.
Where
will
she
go Step
2
Listen
and
answer
some
questions.
1.
Where
will
Amy
go
2.
How
will
they
get
there 3.
How
long
are
they
staying
there 4.
How
long
dose
it
take
to
fly
to
Chengdu
Step
3
Activity
Students
act
the
dialogue
out.Step
4
Useful
phrases.
1.
My
Dad
has
been
to
Chengdu
on
business
twice.on
business
意思是“出差”business
n.
的意思是
“公事，生意”，该词还有“职业，企业”的意思。business
is
business
公事公办to
run
a
business
经营一家企业
none
of
your
business
不关你的事
2.
We’re
going
to
take
a
direct
flight
to
Chengdu.
我们将乘直飞航班到成都。direct
adj.
径直的e.g.
There
is
a
direct
high-speed
train
to
Hangzhou.有一班直达杭州的高速列车。
Step
5
Useful
expressions
How
much
is
the
cheapest… Do
you
have
any
brochures
on… How
long
does
it
take
to
fly
to… What
is
the
weather
like
in…
this
time
of
year Can
you
recommend
any
good
hotels
in… Should
I
bring
a
credit
card I
recommend
a
sightseeing
tour
of…What
is
the
exchange
rate
for… Step
6
PresentationWhen
we
write
about
an
experience
or
event,
we
can
organize
our
ideasusing
the
following
five
main
points.When
did
it
happen Where
did
it
happen Who
was
there What
happened How
did
you
feel
Then
we
should
give
details
to
support
the
main
points.
Take
Kitty’s
day
at
Hong
Kong
Disneyland
as
an
example:When:
during
the
winter
holidayWhere:
Hong
Kong
Main
points
Who:
Kitty
and
her
parents
What:
visited
Hong
Kong
Disneyland
enjoyed
the
Space
Mountain
ride
watched
a
parade
Details
aw
a
4-D
film
did
some
shopping
watched
the
fireworks
How:
had
a
fantastic
timeStep
7
PracticeMr
wu
is
asking
the
Class1,
Grade
8
students
to
organize
the
following
information
into
main
points
and
details.
First,
help
them
write
the
correct
letters
in
the
blanks.
Then
work
pairs
and
talk
about
their
trip.a
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
b
Enjoyed
the
natural
beautyc
Everybody
felt
excited
d
Flew
kitese
Went
fishing
by
the
lake
f
5
Marchg
South
Hill
h
A
visit
to
South
HillWhen:
____________
Where:
____________Who:
___________
____________What:
___________
___________how:
____________
____________Step
8
WritingHomework
Recite
the
words
.2.
Finish
the
exercises
in
Period
6
in
workbook
.
Have
a
free
talk
about
travelling.Listen
and
answer
some
questions.Master
the
useful
expressions
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.Learn
to
use
the
useful
expressions
correctly.Learn
to
write
an
article
,using
the
five
main
pointsw.Before
writing
,first
organize
some
ideas
,then
give
some
details
to
support
the
main
points.work
pairs
and
talk
about
their
trip.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
get
some
pairs
to
talk
about
their
travelling
in
front.To
learn
Study
skills
and
learn
how
to
write
an
article,
using
the
five
main
points
and
give
some
details
to
support
the
main
points.Before
writing
,first
organize
some
ideas
,then
give
some
details
to
support
the
main
points.To
learn
to
write
an
article.
课堂达标
根据旬意、首字母或中文提示写出单词。1.
I
like________
(帆船航行
)on
the
sea
in
summer2.
My
aunt
has
gone__________
(到国外)
for
further
study3.
Look!
He__________
(拴)
his
horse
to
the
tree4.
Those__________
(官员)
are
discussing
what
to
do
next
now5.
George
always
___________
(检查)
the
answers
carefully
before
handing
in
his
paper.用所给单词的适当形式填空。
1.
The
best
time
_________
(visit)
Chinese
gardens
is
in
spring.2.
I
think
helping
others
is
quite
__________
(meaning).3.
She
spent
the
whole
morning___________
(buy)
souvenirs
during
the
trip.4.
Their
___________
(married)
is
a
happy
one.5.
I
think
his
mother
__________
(be)
to
America
only
once.
板书设计
8下Unit
2
Travelling
Speak
up
and
Study
skills
Who:
Kitty
and
her
parents
What:
visited
Hong
Kong
Disneyland
enjoyed
the
Space
Mountain
ride
watched
a
parade
Details
aw
a
4-D
film
did
some
shopping
watched
the
fireworks
How:
had
a
fantastic
time
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
important
for
the
Ss
.It
taught
the
Ss
how
to
write
an
article
,using
the
five
main
points
and
we
can
organize
our
ideas
using
the
five
main
points.
we
should
give
details
to
support
the
main
points.through
studying
,the
Ss
can
write
an
article
with
it
.the
Ss
need
to
practice
more.Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
understand
the
meanings
of
special
groups
of
people.To
cultivate
students’
sympathy
and
the
ability
of
taking
care
of
others.过程与方法：1.Look
at
some
pictures
then
learn
some
new
words.2.to
get
the
Ss
to
know
how
to
help
disabilities.情感态度与价值观：Establish
the
sympathy
for
the
weak,
ready
to
help
others.
教学重点难点
1.How
to
talk
about
helping
people
who
need
help2.How
to
cultivate
students’
sympathy
and
the
ability
of
taking
care
of
others.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
New
wordsPresent
some
pictures
and
teach
the
new
words.Step
2
Free
talkAsk
the
students
to
talk
about
the
questions
below:
Have
you
ever
been
a
volunteer
Have
you
ever
helped
people
who
need
help Step
3
Welcome
to
the
unit
The
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
have
found
some
pictures
of
people
who
need
help.
Write
the
correct
words
under
them.
Then
put
a
tick
in
the
boxes
if
you
have
ever
helped
these
people.blind,
deaf,
disabled,
elderly,
homeless,
poor
Keys:
1.
disabled
2.
poor
3.
blind
4.
elderly
5.
homeless
6.
deaf
Amy
and
Daniel
are
talking
about
people
who
need
help.
Listen
to
the
recording
and
answer
the
following
questions：
How
can
we
help
homeless
people
Keys:
Give
them
food
and
clothes.
Write
to
the
local
government.
Work
in
pairs
and
discuss
the
people
in
Part
A.
Use
the
conversation
in
below
as
a
model.Amy:
What
are
homeless
people,
Daniel Daniel:
Homeless
people
don’t
have
their
own
places
to
live.Amy:
How
can
we
help
homeless
people Daniel:
We
can
give
them
food
and
clothes.Amy:
Are
there
any
other
ways
to
help
them Daniel:
Yes.
We
can
write
to
the
local
government.
They
can
provide
special
places
for
homeless
people
to
stay.Step
4
Free
talkAsk
the
students
to
talk
about
the
question:
Would
Eddie
and
Hobo
like
to
help
people
in
need Step
5
Comic
strip
Listen
and
answer
the
questions.
What
is
Hobo
doing
Will
Eddie
support
him
How
does
Hobo
want
Eddie
to
help
Keys:
1.
He
is
training
to
be
a
volunteer
for
the
Olympic
Games.
2.
Yes,
he
will.
3.
He
needs
some
more
food
to
eat
at
work.
Act
the
dialogue
out.Step
5
Homework:1.Recite
the
dialogue
between
Eddie
and
Hobo.2.
Learn
some
new
words
with
some
pictures.talk
about
the
questions
below:Write
the
correct
words
under
themListen
to
the
recording
and
answer
the
following
questions
Work
in
pairs
and
discuss
the
people
in
Part
A.
Use
the
conversation
Listen
and
answer
the
questions.Act
the
dialogue
out.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
learn
some
new
words
about
the
disabled
and
know
about
the
life
of
the
disabled.To
get
the
Ss
to
know
how
to
help
the
disabled.To
master
the
use
of
some
words.
课堂达标
一、短语翻译。1.
训练成为一个志愿者
2.
为了奥运会
3.
做某事是有意义的
4.
其他的方法去帮助某人
5.
需要一些更多的食物
6.
一个年老的人
7.
有自己的地方去住
8.
支持某人
9.
写信给当地政府
10.
为无家可归的人提供特别的地方居住
二
词汇运用。1.
We
can
provide
places
for
poor
people
.
(stay)2.
They
want
a
chance
to
do
some
work.
(mean)3.
We
many
nurses
for
the
hospital
these
years.
(train)4.
David
goes
to
a
special
school
for
the
children.
(able)5.
The
terrible
earthquake
left
thousands
of
people
.
(home)6.
No
one
receives
treatment
in
this
company.
(specially)7.
It’s
important
each
other
when
we
study
English.
(support)8.
All
of
us
should
respect
the
e
because
that
is
polite.
9.
He
can’t
see
anything
with
his
eyes.
He
is
a
b
person.10.
---What’s
wrong
with
the
old
man
He
can’t
hear
us.
---Maybe
he
is
d
.三、选择填空。(
)
1.
His
words
seemed
to
be
.
I
hope
you
can
think
them
over.
A.
thankful
B.
meaningless
C.
meaningful
D.
difficult(
)
2.
It’s
important
to
the
animals,
because
they
are
our
friends.
A.
to
kind
B.
be
kind
C.
to
be
kind
D.
kind(
)
3.
---Would
you
like
to
have
beef
---No,
thanks.
I’m
full.
A.
a
few
more
B.
some
more
C.
more
a
few
D.
more
some(
)
4.
---What
are
the
students
doing
---They’re
training
their
future
jobs.
A.
as
B.
to
C.
for
D.
in
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Comic
strip﹠Welcome
to
the
unit1.
disabled
2.
poor
3.
blind
4.
elderly
5.
homeless
6.
deaf2.
Amy:
What
are
homeless
people,
Daniel Daniel:
Homeless
people
don’t
have
their
own
places
to
live.Amy:
How
can
we
help
homeless
people Daniel:
We
can
give
them
food
and
clothes.Amy:
Are
there
any
other
ways
to
help
them Daniel:
Yes.
We
can
write
to
the
local
government.
They
can
provide
special
places
for
homeless
people
to
stay.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Collect
more
information
about
people
who
need
help
and
think
about
how
to
help
them.
The
new
words
and
phrases
are
very
useful
and
important,
so
get
the
Ss
to
remember
them
fluently.Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
have
a
deeper
understanding
of
the
interview;
2.
know
how
to
use
the
new
language
points
correctly;3.realize
the
beauty
of
our
hometown
and
encourage
students
to
protect
it.
教学重点
To
use
new
language
points
correctly.
教学难点
Rewrite
the
interview
into
a
report;
教学方法
Read
the
information
and
get
ready
to
retell.
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
RevisionStep2
PresentationStep3
PracticeStep4
Production
Free
talk
in
class.After
listening
to
the
teacher’s
explanation,
try
to
retell
these
key
sentences.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.After
answering
the
questions,
the
students
discuss
in
groups
and
show
their
thoughts.Learn
more
about
English
expressions.Discuss
and
guess
the
meanings
of
these
sentences.Help
the
students
to
learn
1.Help
the
students
to
review
the
changes
in
Sunshine
Town.
2.Work
in
groups
and
discuss
the
changes
Mr
Chen
has
experienced.
Present
some
sentences
about
the
changes,
and
ask
the
students
to
work
out
the
rules
of
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense.(3)
Learn
the
language
point—marry.
Then
do
some
exercises.Have
a
group
discussion:
4.
Mr
Chen’s
life
(1)
Talk
about
what
Mr
Chen
thinks
of
the
present
life.
(2)
Learn
the
language
poin.1.
Rewrite
the
interview
into
a
report2.
Retell
the
changes3.
Complete
the
passage4.
Translate
the
sentences1.
Enjoy
a
video
about
the
changes
in
Yangzhou.
2.
Design
a
poster
about
the
changes
in
Yang
Zhou’s
transport,
environment
and
people’s
life.
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
Complete
the
poster.
教学反思Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Learn
the
language
points
in
this
article.2.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
live
a
green
life.过程与方法：1.To
read
the
text
quickly
then
try
to
retell
it
in
class.2.to
get
the
Ss
to
do
more
exercises
about
the
text情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
love
the
earth
and
protect
the
environment.
教学重点难点
1.
Learn
the
language
points
in
this
article.2.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
live
a
green
life.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionFill
in
the
blanks
according
to
the
text.My
online
friend
Martina
wrote
last
week
about
how
they
protect
the
(1)
e_____________
in
Switzerland.
In
Switzerland,
glass,
plastic
and
paper
are
(2)
s_____________
into
different
groups
and
then
(3)
r__________.
An
organization
(4)
c________
old
clothes
from
around
the
country.
Then
some
are
sold
in
charity
show,
some
are
given
to
the
poor
and
others
are
sent
to
(5)
f__________
for
recycling.
Their
government
have
many
(6)
l______
to
protect
the
environment
too.
For
example,
people
will
be
(7)
p_________
if
they
cut
down
trees
because
it’s
not
(8)
a________.
And
they
don’t
drop
(9)
l_____
in
a
public
place.
Otherwise,
they’ll
be
(10)
f______
by
the
police.
They
think
that
our
human
beings
(11)
d______
on
the
nature,
so
it
is
important
for
us
to
protect
it
(12)
w____.
We
can
use
energy
from
the
sun,
wind
and
water
because
these
new
types
of
energy
will
never
run
out
and
even
they
(13)
p______
little
pollution.
Step
2
Language
points1.
It‘s
beautiful,
and
we
should
try
to
keep
it
that
way.
句中的way可以和this、that等连用。
e.g.
Why
does
he
act
this
way
2.
In
Switzerland,
things
like
glass,
plastic
and
paper
are
separated
into
differentgroups
and
then
recycled.separate…into…
把…分开，隔开
be
separated
into…
被…
分开，3.
Some
of
the
clothes
are
sold
in
charity
shops,
some
are
given
to
the
poor,
and
others
are
sent
to
factories
for
recycling.
句型Some…,
some…,
and
others….
表示“一些…,
一些…,
还有一些”。4.
We
are
not
allowed
to
cut
down
trees.
我们是不允许砍伐树木的。allow
sb.
to
do
sth.允许某人做某事sb.
be
allowed
to
do
sth.
某人不被允许做某事5.
Nature
is
our
greatest
treasure.
We
depend
on
its
rich
resources
to
live,
so
it
is
important
for
us
to
protect
it
wisely.
句中depend
on
的意思是“依靠，依赖，取决于”
。6.
These
new
types
of
energy
cost
very
little
and
will
never
run
out.
句中run
out
的意思是“用完，耗尽”
。7.
Remember
that
everyone
can
do
something
to
make
a
difference！
短语make
a
/
no/
some/
much
difference
to
…意思是“对…有/没有/有些/有很大作用、关系、影响”。e.g.
The
rain
did
not
make
much
difference
to
the
game.
Step
3
Exercises
do
some
exercises,Step
4
Homework1.
Recite
this
article.2.
Remember
the
language
points
in
this
lesson.
3.
Preview
Grammar.
Fill
in
the
blanks
according
to
the
text.To
learn
these
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
get
some
able
Ss
to
retell
the
text
in
class.To
discuss
how
to
protect
the
environment
and
save
engery,
try
to
live
green
life.
课堂达标
一、根据汉语提示完成句子。1.
We
shouldn’t
use
________
(塑料)
bags
when
we
go
shopping
.2.
Boys
and
girls
will
be
__________
(分开)
into
two
groups
.3.
He
will
be
__________
(惩罚)
by
the
police
because
of
stealing.4.
You
should
spend
your
money
_______
(明智地).
5.
There
are
many
rich
_________
(资源)
in
our
country.二、用所给词的适当形式填空。1.
There
are
many
__________
(different)
between
American
English
and
British
English.
2.
We
are
not
allowed
______
(cut)
down
trees.3.
I
learned
about
an
organization
for
_________
(recycle)
clothes.
4.
He
is
much
_________
(rich)
than
me.5.
If
we
drop
litter
in
a
public
place,
we
_____________
(fine)
by
the
police.三、完成句子：1.瑞士是一个有高山、干净蓝湖的国家。2.
它很漂亮，而且我们应该一直让它保持那样。3.
一些旧的衣服和鞋子可以被循环利用。4.
我和我的家人经常把我们的旧衣服送给这个组织。5.
我们的政府已经有了许多法律来保护环境。
6.如果我们在公众场所扔垃圾，我们将会被警方罚款。
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Reading
21.
It‘s
beautiful,
and
we
should
try
to
keep
it
that
way.
句中的way可以和this、that等连用。
e.g.
Why
does
he
act
this
way
他为什么这样做？2.
In
Switzerland,
things
like
glass,
plastic
and
paper
are
separated
into
differentgroups
and
then
recycled.separate…into…
把…分开，隔开
be
separated
into…
被…
分开，3.
Some
of
the
clothes
are
sold
in
charity
shops,
some
are
given
to
the
poor,
and
others
are
sent
to
factories
for
recycling.
句型Some…,
some…,
and
others….
表示“一些…,
一些…,
还有一些”。4.
We
are
not
allowed
to
cut
down
trees.
我们是不允许砍伐树木的。
allow
sb.
to
do
sth.
允许某人做某事
sb.
be
allowed
to
do
sth.
某人不被允许做某事5.
Nature
is
our
greatest
treasure.
We
depend
on
its
rich
resources
to
live,
so
it
is
important
for
us
to
protect
it
wisely.
句中depend
on
的意思是“依靠，依赖，取决于”
。6.
These
new
types
of
energy
cost
very
little
and
will
never
run
out.
句中run
out
的意思是“用完，耗尽”
。e.g.
Our
food
soon
ran
out.
我们的食物不久就吃光了。
7.
Remember
that
everyone
can
do
something
to
make
a
difference！短语make
a
/
no/
some/
much
difference
to
…意思是“对…有/没有/有些/有很大作用、关系、影响”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
something
about
Switzerland.
By
learning,
the
Ss
can
know
more
about
Switzerland’s
beautiful
nature
view.
And
they
know
about
when
World
Environment
Day
is.After
learning
“Green
Switzerland
”,
develop
the
students
to
love
and
protect
the
environment
and
save
engery,try
to
keep
our
country
beautiful
and
clearn.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
learn
how
to
borrow
book
from
the
library.2.
To
understand
how
to
use
transitions
between
ideas过程与方法：情感态度与价值观：
教学重点难点
1.
To
learn
how
to
borrow
book
from
the
library.2.
To
understand
how
to
use
transitions
between
ideas
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
some
sentences.1.她拒绝和我一起去看电影。2.一家小的出版社上个星期开业了。3.到目前为止，哈利波特已经被翻译成许多种语言。4.
J.K.
Rowling
是一个英国著名作家。5.
第七部《哈利波特》是这个系列的最后一本。Step
2
PresentationPresent
some
new
words
with
pictures
and
then
read
them
aloudHow
many
books
can
he
borrow
at
a
time？
每次，依次online
adv.
在线的，联网的
sail
vt.
&
vi.
航行Step
3
New
words
1.
Learn
some
new
words.
2.
Read
after
the
teacher.3.
Read
together.Step
4
Speak
up1.
I
want
some
history
books.
Daniel
is
talking
to
Mrs
Li,
the
school
librarian.
Work
in
pairs
and
take
turns
to
borrow
books
from
a
library.
Listen
and
answer.1)
How
many
books
can
Daniel
borrow
at
a
time 2)
How
long
can
he
keep
the
books 3)
How
does
he
renew
the
books 2.
Read
aloud
the
conversation
then
work
in
pairs
to
ask
and
answer.
Use
the
conversation
as
a
model3.
Make
their
own
conversation.
Step
5
Study
skillsTransitions
between
ideasWhen
we
write
an
article,
we
have
different
ways
to
connect
the
ideas
in
it.
Here
are
some
common
transitions.
UsageTransitional
words
and
phrasesExampleTo
show
timebefore,
after,
while,
at
first,
soon,
later,
when,…After
our
ship
crashed
against
the
rocks,
I
saw
as
far
as
I
could.To
show
sequencefirst,
second,
next,
then,
finally,
…
First,
we
had
fun
on
Space
Mountain.
Next,
we
hurried
to
a
restaurant.
To
add
more
information
and,
also,
too,
again,
and
then,
either,
moreover,…I
could
not
understand
him.
I
did
not
know
what
to
say
either.To
give
examplefor
example,
…They
are
now
in
danger.
For
example,
it
is
difficult
for
pandas
to
have
babies.To
show
cause
and
effect
because,
since,
as,
so,
as
a
result,…I
can
tell
her
anything
because
she
can
keep
a
secret.To
emphasizenever,
in
fact,
…He
says
he
knows
everything
about
DIY.
In
fact,
I
know
much
more
than
he
does.To
compare
or
contrastbut,
however,
on
the
one
hand…
on
the
other
(hand),
while,
otherwise,…Many
birds
live
in
Zhalong
all
year
round,
while
some
go
there
only
for
a
short
stay.Step
6
Exercises1.
Complete
the
exercises
on
page
59.I
like
novels.
I
enjoy
reading
the
books
of
Robot
Louis
Stevenson
because
I
find
them
really
exciting.
For
example,
Treasure
Island
tells
the
story
of
a
young
boy
who
sailed
the
sea
to
look
for
hidden
treasure.
Jim,
the
main
character
in
the
book,
is
very
brave.
His
story
gave
me
a
lot
of
confidence.
After
reading
the
book,
I
am
not
as
shy
as
I
used
to
be
and
I
am
willing
to
try
new
things.
I
also
want
to
travel
and
have
exciting
experience
in
the
future.
Moreover,
I
have
decided
to
write
my
own
stories.
Maybe
I
can
become
a
writer
when
I
am
older!2.
Check
the
answers.3.
Then
read
them
aloud.
Step
7
Language
points1.
How
many
books
can
I
borrow
at
a
time
我每次可以借多少本书？
句中at
a
time
意思是“每次，依次”。
e.g.
The
giant
panda
has
one
or
two
babies
at
a
time
.
大熊猫每次生一到两个宝宝。2.
You
don’t
have
to
come
to
our
desk
every
time.
Just
renew
them
online.
你不必每次都来我们服务台办理。在线续借即可。句中的online
用作副词，该词也可以用作形容词。
e.g.
online
travel
在线旅游3.
Treasure
Island
tells
the
story
of
a
young
boy
who
sailed
the
sea
to
look
for
hidden
treasure.
《宝岛》讲述的是一个航海去寻找宝藏的小男孩的故事。句中who
sailed
the
sea
to
look
for
hidden
treasure
是定语从句，用来修饰a
young
boy
的。e.g.
Jacky
Chan
is
a
actor
who
is
famous
all
over
the
world.
成龙是一个闻名全世界的演员。4.
His
story
gave
me
a
lot
of
confidence.他的故事给了我自信。give
sb.
a
lot
of
confidence
给某人许多自信5.
I
also
want
to
travel
and
have
exciting
experience
in
the
future.
have
exciting
experiences
有令人兴奋的经历句中的experience
意思是“经历”
用作可数名词，该词也可以用作不可数名词，意思是“经验”。e.g.
Travelling
to
Beijing
was
an
interesting
experience
for
me.
到北京旅行对我来说是一次有趣的经历。
He
has
much
experience
in
teaching.
他在教学方面很有经验。Step
8
ExercisesDo
some
exercises.Check
the
answers.Step
9
Homework
1.
Remember
the
new
words
and
phrases
in
this
lesson.
2.
Recite
the
conversation
in
Speak-up.
Translate
some
sentences.Learn
some
new
words.Read
after
the
teacher.Listen
and
answer.Learn
to
connect
the
ideas
in
the
articles.Master
the
key
words
and
master
the
plete
the
exercises
on
page
59.Learn
and
master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them
.Do
some
exercises.Check
the
answers.
Check
out
the
home
work
and
preview.Go
over
the
names
of
books
and
talk
about
them.
According
to
the
model
to
make
their
own
dialogues.In
order
to
make
the
Ss
write
the
better
articles
,so
we
have
different
ways
to
connect
the
ideas
in
the
article.
课堂达标
一、根据句意及中文提示填写单词。1.
It
is
a
good
（习惯）
to
exercise
every
day.2.
I
usually
get
some
（建议）
from
my
close
friend
Jane.3.There
is
a
tall
tree
（在······的对面）the
small
house.4.Simon
want
to
be
a
（图书管理员)
when
he
grows
up.5.
She
will
(继续)her
study
for
another
year.二、用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。1.Learing
English
has
a
lot
of
(read)in
China.2.Tom
is
interested
in
(watch)
films
about
history.3.Nancy
wants
to
become
a
(tour)
in
the
future.4.We
are
talking
about
where
(spend)our
coming
summer
holiday.5.Students
do
not
have
to
(go)to
school
at
weekends.
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Speak
up
and
Study
skills1.
Listen
and
answer.1)
How
many
books
can
Daniel
borrow
at
a
time 2)
How
long
can
he
keep
the
books 3)
How
does
he
renew
the
books 2.Language
points1.
at
a
time
意思是“每次，依次”。
2.
online
用作副词，该词也可以用作形容词。
e.g.
online
travel
在线旅游3.
Treasure
Island
tells
the
story
of
a
young
boy
who
sailed
the
sea
to
look
for
hidden
treasure.
《宝岛》讲述的是一个航海去寻找宝藏的小男孩的故事。句中who
sailed
the
sea
to
look
for
hidden
treasure
是定语从句，用来修饰a
young
boy
的。4.
give
sb.
a
lot
of
confidence
给某人许多自信5.
have
exciting
experiences
有令人兴奋的经历句中的experience
意思是“经历”
用作可数名词，该词也可以用作不可数名词，意思是“经验”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
has
two
parts
to
learn
.first
the
Ss
can
make
their
dialogues
by
talking
about
their
favourite
books
,and
explain
their
reasons.
then
they
can
master
how
to
write
better
articles
by
studying
study
skills.they
are
interested
in
studying
skills
as
usual.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
help
the
students
understand
the
article
about
travelling
in
China
by
listening
.2.
To
get
proper
information
from
the
article
,
and
record
some
related
information
to
finish
advice
about
travelling
.3.
To
learn
how
to
talk
about
the
students’
own
travelling
plan
and
to
develop
the
students’
love
of
travelling
.过程与方法：1.
To
understand
specific
information
by
reading
and
listening2.
To
complete
information
tables
by
listening
for
key
information 情感态度与价值观：To
complete
written
statements
by
identifying
information
from
reading
and
listening
教学重点难点
1.
To
understand
specific
information
by
reading
and
listening.2.To
complete
information
tables
by
listening
for
key
information.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Review
Translate
some
sentences.
1.
小名参军半年了。Xiao
Ming
has
been
a
soldier
for
half
a
year.2.
我们上了8年学了。We
have
been
students
for
eight
years.
3.
下课10分钟了。The
class
has
been
over
for
ten
minutes.4.
电影开始了一小时了。The
film
has
been
on
for
an
hour.5.
门打开半小时了。The
door
has
been
open
for
half
an
hour.Step
2
New
wordsbeauty
seaside
theme
park
sailing
exceptview
mountain
business
direct
flight
on
business
Step
3
Free
talk
Have
you
ever
travelled
to
any
places
in
China
What
did
you
do
there Step
4
Let
students
see
some
pictures
and
talk
about
them.Step
5
Listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
A1.The
Class
1,
Great
8
students
are
talking
about
the
kinds
of
places
they
like
best.
Listen
to
their
conversation
and
match
the
students
with
the
places.
Write
the
correct
letter
in
each
box.Places
for
travelling
Chinese
gardens
1.
Kitty
Museums
2.
Simon
Places
of
natural
beauty
3.
Sandy
Seaside
cities
4.
Daniel
Theme
parks
5.
MillieStep
6
Make
sentences
use
the
information
in
A1.如：
“Kitty
likes
to
go….
Millie
wants
to
go…Step7
Ask
students
talk
with
classmates
What
is
important
when
you
plan
your
holiday Step
8
Listen
to
the
tape
finish
A2.The
students
are
listening
to
a
radio
programme
about
the
best
time
to
visit
some
places
in
China.
Put
a
tick
(√)
in
the
correct
boxes. Places
to
go
Spring
Summer
Autumn
Winter
ChinesegardensSuzhou,Yangzhou MuseumsBeijing,
Xi’an Places
of
natural
beautyMount
Huang,Jiuzhaigou Seaside
citiesDalian,Qingdao Theme
parksShenzhen,Hong
Kong Step
9
Finish
part
A3
together.Amy
wants
to
give
her
classmates
some
advice
on
travelling
in
China.
Help
her
complete
her
notes.
Use
the
information
in
Parts
A1
and
A2
to
help
you.Places
to
go
in
ChinaKitty
likes
______,
such
as
the
Window
of
the
world
in
Shenzhen
or_____
Disneyland.
She
can
go
there
all
year
round.Simon
loves
water
sports,
such
as
sailing.
He
thinks
it
is
great
fun.
He
can
visit
a
seaside
city
like
______
or
Qingdao
this
________.Sandy
likes
places
of
______,
like
Mount
Huang
or
Jiuzhaigou.
She
can
go
there
in
any
season
except
_______.
The
views
there
in
winter
may
be
wonderful,
but
it
is
dangerous
to
climb
the
mountains
or
hills
on
cold
and
snowy
days.Daniel
likes
_____.
He
can
visit
Suzhou
or
Yangzhou.
The
best
time
to
go
there
is
in
spring
or______.
There
may
be
some
rain,
but
the
weather
is
usually
nice
at
that
time
of
year.Millie
likes
______.
She
can
go
to
Beijing
or
Xi’an.
She
can
visit
museums
in
any
season.Step
10
ExercisesTranslate
some
useful
phrases.1.
水上运动
water
sports
2.
参观主题公园
visit
a
theme
park3.
炎热的天气
hot
weather
4.
全年
all
year
round5.
到…旅行
travel
to
….用所给词的适当形式填空1. Millie ________ (like) walking when the weather is nice. 2. She __________ (go) to Qingdao if she ________ (have) enough money. 3. He ______ (go) to Shenzhen last summer. He ______ (get) lost in the park. 4. When I visited Suzhou, I _________ (take) lots of photos. 5. We were clapping our hands while the
performers _______ (march) across the park.Step
11
HomeworkRead
aloud
the
paragraph
three
times.
Review
the
present
perfect
tense.then
translate
the
sentences.Learn
the
new
words
and
expressions.Answer
the
questions.Listen
to
the
conversation
and
match
the
Ss
with
the
places.Make
sentences
use
the
information
in
A1.Listen
to
the
tape
finish
A2.Check
out
the
answers
together.Help
Amy
complete
her
notes
,using
the
information
in
Part
A1
and
A2.Do
some
exercises.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Have
a
free
talk
about
travelling.Listen
to
the
listening
then
finish
some
proper
exercises.
课堂达标
一、用所给词的适当形式填空1.
Millie
________
(like)
walking
when
the
weather
is
nice.2.
She
__________
(go)
to
Qingdao
if
she
________
(have)
enough
money.
3.
He
_______
(go)
to
Shenzhen
last
summer.
He
_______
(get)
lost
in
the
park.4.
When
I
visited
Suzhou,
I
_________
(take)
lots
of
photos.5.
My
father
is
not
at
home.
He
__________
(go)
to
Shanghai.二、单项选择
(
)
1.
Lushan
Mountain
is
a
good
place
for
_____.
A.
sailing
B.
swimming
C.
hiking
D.
shopping（
）2.
Amy
loves
Chinese
Gardens
very
much,
she
should
go
to
_______.
A.
Qingdao
B.
Suzhou
C.
Shanghai
D.
Shenzhen（
）3.
Kitty
loves
_______
souvenirs.
A.
buy
B.
buying
C.
buys
D.
bought（
）4.
Window
of
the
World
is
a
famous
theme
park.
It
is
in
_______
.
A.
Shanghai
B.
Nanjing
C.
Qingdao
D.
Shenzhen（
）5.
Have
you
bought
the
ticket
_______
tonight’s
show
A.
to
B.
of
C.
at
D.
on
板书设计
8下Unit
2
Travelling
Integrated
Skills1.
Places
for
travelling
Chinese
gardens
1.
Kitty
Museums
2.
Simon
Places
of
natural
beauty
3.
Sandy
Seaside
cities
4.
Daniel
Theme
parks
5.
Millie2.
“Kitty
likes
to
go….
Millie
wants
to
go…
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
about
training
Ss’
listening
skills
by
listening
to
a
radio
programme.
Ss
know
more
information
about
some
places
of
interest
and
when
the
best
time
to
visit
these
places
is
.This
section
not
only
trains
their
listening
but
also
train
their
speaking.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
know
famous
places
of
interest
in
New
York.2.
To
grasp
the
main
idea
of
this
article
according
to
the
key
words
and
context.3.
To
grasp
some
basic
skills
of
reading.过程与方法：1.get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
reading
then
do
some
comprehensions.2.to
discuss
in
groups
and
understand
the
meaning
of
the
article.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
reading
by
some
basic
skills
of
reading.
教学重点难点
New
words
and
expressions
appeared
in
the
article.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Lead-in1.
Do
you
know
which
city
is
called
“the
Big
Apple” 据传，大约在一百多年前，美国一群爵士乐师们（jazz
musicians）经常到各地巡回演出赚钱（make
money）。乐师们常常把所要去的城镇比喻成树上的苹果。他们去该城镇演出赚钱，就好像是去摘树上的苹果，由于纽约是他们演出赚钱最多的城市，自然被称为“the
Big
Apple”。不久，纽约一家俱乐部和一种流行舞蹈也取名为“the
Big
Apple”。后来，精明的纽约市官员们为了招揽游客（tourist），发展旅游业（tourism），索性把“the
Big
Apple”作为该城市的象征物（symbol）。从此，越来越多的游客被吸引到纽约去参观旅游，纽约的别名也就随之传开了。2.
Famous
places
in
New
York
city
Wall
StreetTimes
SquareCentral
Park
Broadway
Step2
While-readingDaniel
is
looking
at
a
website
called
"Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours
".
Here
is
what
the
website's
guide
says.1.
Read
the
article
quickly
and
answer
these
questions.(1).
What
is
the
name
of
the
website Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours.(2).
How
many
places
of
interest
are
mentioned
What
are
they
Four.
Wall
Street,
Times
Square,
Central
Park
and
Broadway.2.
B1
Daniel
does
not
know
the
meanings
of
some
words
on
the
web
page.Help
him
match
the
words
on
the
left
with
the
meanings
on
the
right.
Write
the
correct
letters
in
the
blanks.3.
B2
Daniel
is
introducing
the
website
to
Millie.
Millie
is
trying
to
find
out
what
people
can
see
in
New
York.
Help
her
fill
in
the
blanks
on
Page
38.4.
B3
Amy
is
also
interested
in
travelling
around
the
world.
She
is
telling
her
mum
about
the
website.
Check
whether
what
she
says
is
correct
or
not
Write
a
T
if
a
sentence
is
true
or
an
F
if
it
is
false.5.
B4
Kitty
also
wants
to
know
about
the
website.
She
is
asking
Daniel
about
it.
Complete
their
conversation
on
Page
39.Step
3
Homework
1.
Remember
the
important
phrases
and
sentences
by
heart.2.
Read
the
text
and
try
to
retell
it.
Learn
more
about
the
Big
Apple.Learn
famous
places
in
New
York
city.Read
the
article
quickly
and
answer
these
questions.Read
the
article
again
then
complete
B1,B2,B3,B4.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Learn
more
about
the
background
of
some
famous
places
in
New
York
city.Read
the
article
carefully
then
complete
Exx.
In
B1,B2,B3,B4.
课堂达标
用所给单词的适当形式填空1.
You
(notice)
the
man
with
black
glasses
over
there He
is
a
film
star.2.After
a
(week)
hard
work,you
can
have
a
good
rest.3.Many
people
(gather)
in
front
of
the
hospital
at
9
a.m.
yesterday
morning.4.It
is
exciting
for
you
(
start)
a
new
tour
online.5.Broadway
is
famous
for
(
it
)theatres.6.So
(
many
)for
today.
Class
is
over.7.Every
year,
many
(thousand)
of
people
visit
Taiwan.8.The
song
Memeory
comes
from
the
Broadway
(music)
cats.9.Did
you
see
a
star
(shine)
in
the
sky
last
night.10.Many
big
(company)
have
opened
in
our
city
since
2012.二、选择题(
)1.Have
you
been
to
the
temple
the
top
of
the
hill A.in
B.on
C.for
D.
at(
)2.Can
you
finish
reading
the
novel
only
eight
hours
A.during
B.after
C.in
D.at(
)3.Shanghai
has
been
the
world-famous
business
centre
since
century.
A.
twenty
B.the
twenty
C.the
twentieth
D.twentieth(
)4.There
are
lakes,hills
and
large
green
fields
in
Central
Park.
A.few
B.several
C.little
D.much(
)5.An
apple
from
the
tree
and
hit
on
Newton’s
head
many
years
ago.
A.is
falling
B.falls
C.fell
D.falling
(
)6.We
all
know
that
the
USA
is
in
.A.
Africa
B.Europe
C.
America
D.
China
板书设计
8下
Unit
3
Online
tours
Reading
11.
Famous
places
in
New
York
city
Wall
Street
Times
Square
Central
Park
Broadway
Empire
State
Building
UN
Headquarters
Rockefeller
Center
2.
(1).
What
is
the
name
of
the
website Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours.(2).
How
many
places
of
interest
are
mentioned
What
are
they
Four.
Wall
Street,
Times
Square,
Central
Park
and
Broadway.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
main
task
of
this
period
is
to
read
an
article
about
famous
places
in
New
York
city,In
order
to
let
the
Ss
understand
clearly,
the
teacher
let
the
Ss
learn
more
about
famous
places
in
New
York
city
.That
can
arouse
Ss’s
interest.Also,Ss
are
expected
to
grasp
the
usage
of
the
language
points
and
try
to
use
them
freely
without
looking
at
the
notebook.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
know
about
the
functions
of
different
public
signs
from
the
tape
recording.2.
To
finish
a
report
with
the
information
from
the
tape
recording3.
To
learn
how
to
ask
someone
not
to
do
sth
in
English过程与方法：to
get
the
Ss
to
list
many
Public
signs.listen
to
the
tape
then
complete
Part
A1
and
A2.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss
to
obey
the
rules
in
public.
教学重点难点
To
grasp
some
listening
skills.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】1、回顾复习：Talk
about
the
bad
manners
in
the
past
few
lessons2、自学教材P72-733、自学检测：Check
out
the
prepared
work..【自主探究】Step
1
RevisionTranslation1.他太小了而不能上学。（2种）2.Kitty
太专注于他的跳舞课程了，以至于不能听广播了。3.英国人太有礼貌了，以至于不能在公共场合大声叫嚷。4英国太遥远了，以至于Jenny
不能独自去那里。Step
2
Free
talk1.This
unit
has
mentioned
some
bad
manners
in
public
places．What
are
they
What
should
we
do
in
these
places 2.If
some
people
don’t
know
how
to
behave
properly
in
public,
we
have
something
to
help
them.
What
are
they
----public
signs.
3.Today
we’ll
learn
something
about
public
signs.
How
much
do
you
know
about
public
signs
Where
can
you
see
these
public
sings
What
does
this
public
sign
mean
What
does
it
tell
us
to
do
（explain、warn、parking、litter）Step
3
ListeningAmy
is
also
talking
with
her
cousin
Shirley
about
signs
used
in
public
places.
Listen
to
the
first
part
of
their
conversation
and
help
Shirley
complete
her
notes
in
Part
A1．(check
the
answers
and
read
the
transcript)Listen
to
the
second
part
of
the
conversation.
Help
Shirley
write
the
missing
information
in
the
table
in
Part
A2.
(check
the
answers
and
read
the
transcript)Shirley
is
writing
a
report
on
public
signs.
Help
her
complete
her
report
in
Part
A3.
You
can
use
the
information
in
Parts
A1
and
A2
to
help
you．(check
the
answers)Step
4
Discussion(Sample
conversation)
T：Where
can
you
see
this
public
sign S：We
can
see
it
in…．
T：What
does
it
mean
S：It
means…..
T：What
does
it
tell
us
to
do
S：It
tells
us
to…．Step
5
Speak
up(
Please
don’t
take
photos)When
we
go
to
a
museum，what
should
we
pay
attention
to
(We
shouldn’t
speak
loudly.
We
shouldn’t
take
photos.)listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
the
questions.(1)
Where
are
Amy
and
Shirley
(They
are
in
an
art
museum.)(2)
What
does
Amy
want
to
do
Can
she
do
it (She
wants
to
take
a
photo
of
a
famous
painting.
No,
she
cannot.)(3)
What
else
does
Amy
tell
Shirley
(They
should
not
shout
in
the
museum.)【课堂小结】LPS:1.warn
sb
not
to
do
sth
2.keep
sb
from
doing
sth【巩固拓展】1.父母总是使我们远离危险。2.
这个标志警告我们不要在这里吸烟。3.哪一个是“禁止拍照”的标志？4.电脑可以给我们很多有用的信息。这是齐白石的名画吗？Homework:1.Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.Finish
the
paper.
Talk
about
the
bad
manners
in
the
past
few
lessonsHave
a
free
talk
about
good/bad
manners.Listen
to
the
tape
then
complete
Part
A1-3check
the
answers
and
read
the
transcriplisten
to
the
tape
and
answer
the
questions.Translate
the
sentences
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
some
good
/bad
manners
in
some
places.Discuss
what
we
can
do
or
not
do
in
some
places
in
groups.To
learn
more
about
public
signs.
课堂达标
一、用所给单词适当形式填空1.
There
are
many
kinds
of
wonderful
___________(paint)
on
the
wall.2.
‘No
_________(park)
means
‘don’t
park
your
car
here.3.
Can
you
gives
us
a
pleasant
_________(explain) 4.
Jack,
_______(not
litter)
everywhere.5.
Our
parents
often
________(warn)
us
not
spend
more
time
on
games.二、单项选择(
)
1.
What
sign
can
we
see
in
the
museum
A.
No
parking
B.
No
photos
C.
No
littering
D.
No
smoking(
)
2.
We
can
see
different
public
signs
________
‘No
touching”
A.
for
example
B.
likes
C.
like
D.
just
as(
)3.
The
question
was
too
difficult
for
the
students
to
answer.
_______
of
them
could
work
it
out.
A.
Little
B.
Many
C.
Quite
a
lot
D.
Few(
)4.
He
found
________
difficult
to
learn
maths
well.
A.
it
B.
that
C.
this
D.
it’s(
)5.
I
need
_______
food
because
I
invited
another
guest
to
have
dinner
with
me.
A.
some
much
B.
some
more
C.
much
some
D.
more
some(
)6.
Be
quiet!
I
have
something
________
you.A.
tell
B.
told
C.
to
tell
D.
telling(
)7.
If
you
want
to
get
the
job,
please
contact
Miss
Wang
_________
5557
8841.A.
/
B.
at
C.
on
D.
with(
)8.
You
should
pack
___________
before
the
trip.A.
what
you
are
going
to
carry
B.
what
are
you
going
to
carryC.
you
are
going
to
carry
D.
that
you
are
going
to
carry(
)9.
Kitty
found
_________
interesting
________
the
difference
between
the
twins.A.
/,
to
learn
B.
it,
learning
C.
it,
to
learn
D.
/,
learning(
)10.
My
home
is
4
kilometres
____________
my
school.A.
on
the
south
of
B.
the
south
of
C.
south
of
D.
of
south
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Integrated
skillsT：Where
can
you
see
this
public
sign S：We
can
see
it
in…．
T：What
does
it
mean
S：It
means…..
T：What
does
it
tell
us
to
do
S：It
tells
us
to…．
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
get
the
Ss
to
know
more
about
public
signs
by
listening
to
the
conversation.
By
listening
,
the
Ss
can
complete
Shirley’s
notes
and
fill
in
the
blanks
with
some
information.
This
section
not
only
trains
their
listening
but
also
train
their
speaking.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Understand
the
work
of
the
United
Nations
children's
fund
category
and
basic
background
knowledge.2.
Talk
about
their
ideas
contribute
to
charity.过程与方法：1.
to
get
the
Ss
to
read
Part
A1,then
answer
some
questions.2.listen
to
the
materials
then
complete
Part
A2
and
A3,
check
the
answers
in
groups.情感态度与价值观：Develop
the
Ss
to
show
love
to
the
poor.
教学重点难点
1.
Understand
the
work
of
the
United
Nations
children's
fund
category
and
basic
background
knowledge.2.
Talk
about
their
ideas
contribute
to
charity.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionReview
the
international
charities
we
have
learnt
Watch
a
video
about
“联合国儿童基金会宣传片”Step
2
Presentation
new
words
war
n.
战争
organize
vt.
组织Step
3
Read
and
answer1.
When
was
UNICEF
set
up 2.
What
changed
children’s
lives
at
that
time 3.
How
many
countries
and
areas
does
it
work
in Step
4
Put
the
sentences
into
right
order.
Daniel
is
listening
to
a
radio
programme
about
UNICEF.
Help
him
put
the
sentences
in
the
correct
order.
Write
the
numbers
1-5
on
page
101.
UNICEF
provides
basic
education
for
poor
children
in
many
countries.
It
helps
them
go
to
school.UNICEF
provides
clean
water
and
food.
It
wants
all
children
to
be
healthy.You
can
help
by
donating
money
or
working
as
a
volunteer.UNICEF
raises
money
by
selling
Christmas
cards
and
organizing
other
activities.UNICEF
works
all
over
the
world.Step
5
Answer
the
questions
about
UNICEFMr
Wu
asked
the
students
to
write
a
report
on
UNICEF.
First,
he
gave
them
somequestions
to
help
them
organize
their
ideas.
Help
Daniel
answer
the
questions
with
the
information
in
parts
A1
and
A2
on
page
101.1.
When
was
UNICEF
set
up
2.
Why
was
UNICEF
set
up 3.
Where
does
UNICEF
work
4.
What
does
UNICEF
do
to
help 5.
How
does
UNICEF
raise
money Step
6
Daniel
is
writing
the
report
on
UNICEF.
Finish
Daniel’s
report.
Complete
his
report
with
the
information
on
page
101.
Then
listen
to
Daniel
andcheck
the
answers.UNICEF
is
a
part
of
______.
It
was
set
up
in
Europe
in
____,
after
_____.
At
that
time,
many
_____
were
changed
because
of
the
war,
and
UNICEF
wanted
to
help
them.Now
UNICEF
works
in
over
________.
It
helps
governments,
____
and
families
make
the
world
_________
for
children.UNICEF
wants
all
children
to
be
________,
so
it
provides
them
with
__
and
food,
and
tries
to
prevent
them
from
getting
illnesses.
UNICEF
also
believes
that
it
is
important
for
children
to
receive
___,
so
it
helps
them
go
to
school.UNICEF
raises
money
by
________
and
organizing
otheractivities.
People
can
support
it
by
donating
money
or
working
as
volunteers.Step
7
Useful
phrases
1.为孩子们将世界变成一个更美好的地方
make
the
world
a
better
place
for
children2.
为穷孩子提供教育和食物provide
food
and
education
for
poor
children3.
捐款
make
a
donation
4.
做一些志愿工作
do
some
voluntary
work5.
组织募集资金活动
organize
fund-raising
activities6.
全世界
all
over
the
worldStep
8
Homework.1.
Preview
the
dialogue
of
“Speak
up”.2.
Write
a
short
passage
about
the
charity
we
have
learned
today.
Review
the
international
charities
we
have
learntRead
and
answerPut
the
sentences
into
right
order.Answer
the
questions
about
UNICEFComplete
Daniel’s
report
with
the
information
on
page
101.Translate
the
phrases
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
get
the
Ss
to
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
in
this
period.First
let
the
Ss
read
the
contents
in
this
lesion,
then
listen
to
the
proper
plete
some
proper
exercises.To
check
the
answers
together.
课堂达标
.根据句意及中文意思完成句子1.
His
grandfather
died
in
the
(战争).2.
–Can
you
help
me
(组织)
the
activity
at
the
weekend 3.
His
face
looks
(苍白的)
because
of
his
illness.4.
I
want
to
ask
some
one
to
(检查)the
broken
machine.5.
UNICEF
is
one
of
the
best-known
(慈善机构)
that
help
poor
children
around
the
world.单项选择(
)1.
Dr.
Li
operated
over
200
patients
his
visit
to
that
poor
town.A.
in;
while
B.
on;
during
C.
for;
in
D.
on;
for(
)2.
is
a
charity
to
help
poor
children
in
the
world.A.
WHO
B.
UNICEF
C.
NATO
D.
WTO(
)3.
Han
Han’s
books
are
popular.
They
by
many
teenagers.
A.
is
read
B.
was
read
C.
are
read
D.
were
read(
)4.UNICEF
wants
to
make
the
world
a
place
for
.A.
good;
people
B.
better;
children
C.
best;
women
D.
nice;
the
blind(
)5.
Which
of
the
following
organization
is
to
provide
poor
children
with
basic
food,
health
care
and
educational
needs A.
ORBIS
B.
UNICEF
C.
Oxfam
D.
World
Vision用所给单词的适当形式填空1.
Many
people’s
(life)
were
changed
because
of
the
earthquake.2.
Many
strange
things
(take)
palce
every
year.3.
The
film
was
(good)
than
I
expected.4.
It
is
important
for
the
kids
in
poor
areas
(receive)
basic
education.5.
I
don’t
feel
(good)
.
I’d
better
see
a
doctor,
I
think.6.
He
tried
(catch)
the
early
bus,
but
failed.
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Integrated
skills一、answer
the
questions1.
When
was
UNICEF
set
up
2.
Why
was
UNICEF
set
up 3.
Where
does
UNICEF
work
4.
What
does
UNICEF
do
to
help 5.
How
does
UNICEF
raise
money 二、useful
expressions1.
make
the
world
a
better
place
for
children2.
provide
food
and
education
for
poor
children3.
make
a
donation
4.
do
some
voluntary
work5.
organize
fund-raising
activities6.
all
over
the
world
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Ss
can
know
more
about
UNICEF
in
this
period.
Ss’
listening
ability
can
be
trained
by
putting
the
sentences
into
correct
order.
The
Ss
can
also
develop
their
speaking
ability
by
talking
about
what
charities
they’d
like
to
support
and
give
out
the
reason.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
protect
the
environment2.
To
learn
to
correct
the
mistakes
by
checking
the
work过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
take
out
their
homework
and
check
out
their
homework
if
there
are
lots
of
mistakes.2.the
teacher
ask
the
Ss
how
to
correct
them.which
student
should
give
some
ways情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
good
habits
of
study.
教学重点难点
1.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
protect
the
environment2.
To
learn
to
correct
the
mistakes
by
checking
the
work
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
the
phrases
and
sentences.1.关掉水龙头
2.少于
3.
扔掉
4.
依靠
5.
自然资源6.
洗澡7.
刷牙8.
学生的数量
9.
用纸的两面10.
回收空瓶子11.
关灯
12.
做一个调查13.
…的结果
14.
保护环境15.
几乎没有学生带他们自己的袋子去超市。16.
这是调查的结果。17.
调查表明学生为帮助保护环境正在做许多事。Step
2
Presentation1.
Present
some
new
words
with
pictures
and
then
read
them
aloud2.
Let
some
students
spell
the
words.
3.
Read
after
the
teacher.4.
Read
together.Step
3
Speak
up1.
Listen
to
the
conversation
between
Sandy
and
Kitty
then
answer
the
questions:1)
What
has
been
a
serious
problem
all
around
the
world 2)
What
can
Kitty
do
to
protect
the
environment 3)
Is
air
pollution
harmful
to
our
health 2.
Listen
to
their
conversation
again
and
find
out
the
advantages
of
planting
trees.Trees
make
our
town
look
nicer.Trees
reduce
dust
and
help
keep
air
clean.Trees
help
keep
soil
in
place
during
storms.Trees
provide
home
for
animals.
3.
Read
aloud
the
conversation
then
work
in
pairs
to
ask
and
answer.
Use
the
conversation
as
a
model4.
Make
your
own
dialogue.
Sample
conversationS
1:
Water
is
very
important
for
all
living
things.
S
2:
Yes.
We
should
use
our
water
carefully
and
not
waste
it.S
1:
Right.
We
can
help
save
water
by
doing
many
simple
things
like
turning
off
the
tap
while
we
brush
our
teeth.S
2:
Taking
short
showers
saves
even
more
water.S
1:
Saving
water
is
good
for
the
environment.
I
hope
all
of
us
do
our
best
to
save
water.
S
2:
I
hope
so
too.Step
4
Study
skills1.
ExplanationWe
can
correct
a
lot
of
our
own
mistakes
by
checking
our
work.
After
we
have
finished
a
piece
of
writing,
always
spend
some
time
reading
it
through.
Types
of
mistakesStep
5
Exercises1.
Complete
the
exercises
on
page
117.
Millie
has
written
an
article.
Help
her
check
her
work.
Underline
the
mistake,
make
the
corrections
and
decide
the
types
of
mistakes
she
has
made.Let’s
protect
the
environment!
2.
Check
the
answers.3.
Then
read
them
aloud.
4.
Do
more
exercisesCorrect
mistakes
in
the
sentences.Step
6
Language
points1.
I
think
our
town
will
look
nicer
with
more
trees
around.
句中with
more
trees
around
为介词短语，起副词作用。Around
用作副词，意思是“周围，四周”。
2.
Air
pollution
is
harmful
to
our
health.be
harmful
to
sb.=
harm
sb.
=
do
harm
to
sb.
对某人有害3.
They
provide
home
for
animals
too.
provide
sth.
for
sb.
=
provide
sb.
with
sth.
提供给某人某物Step
7
Homework1.
Remember
the
new
words
and
the
language
points
in
this
lesson.
2.
Write
a
short
passage
“My
green
life”
and
use
the
skills
we
have
learnt
today
to
check
your
work.
Translate
the
phrases
and
sentences.Learn
some
new
words
and
master
them.Listen
to
the
conversation
between
Sandy
and
Kitty
then
answer
the
questions:Listen
to
their
conversation
again
and
find
out
the
advantages
of
planting
trees.Make
your
own
dialogue.
Learn
how
to
correct
plete
the
exercises
on
page
117.Check
the
answers.Do
more
exercisesCorrect
mistakes
in
the
sentences.Learn
these
language
points
and
master
them.
Check
out
the
homework
and
the
preview.The
Ss
can
read
the
contents
on
page
117.Learn
how
to
correct
the
mistakes
.Learn
the
following
:
W=
word
usage
mistakeP
=
punctuation
mistakeS
=
spelling
mistakeM
=
missing
word
G
=
grammatical
mistakeDo
more
exercises.
课堂达标
一.
根据中文提示写出单词1.
He
does
his
homework
(粗心地),
so
he
often
gets
bad
marks.2.
These
(活着的)
plants
need
watering.3.
How
much
is
the
(煤) 4.
Don’t
throw
it
away.
We
can
(再使用)
it.二．单项选择(
)1.We
depend
water
and
air
to
live.
A.
in
B.
to
C.
for
D.
on(
)2.
Water
is
not
only
useful
for
families,
but
a
wider
use
for
factories.
A.
to
have
B.
haveC.
having
D.
has(
)3.
I
will
see
my
parents
.
A.
if
possible
B.
if
it
is
possibleC.
if
is
possible
D.
A
and
B(
)4.
He
came
home
late.
,
he
didn’t
see
his
father.
A.
As
a
result
B.
BecauseC.
But
D.
Although(
)5.
The
things
will
be
if
they
are
watered.
A.
living;
living
B.
alive;
livingC.
alive;
alive
D.
living;
alive
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Speak
up
and
Study
skills1.
Types
of
mistakesW=
word
usage
mistake
单词使用错误P
=
punctuation
mistake
标点符号错误S
=
spelling
mistake
拼写错误M
=
missing
word
遗漏单词G
=
grammatical
mistake
语法错误2.
Language
points1.
I
think
our
town
will
look
nicer
with
more
trees
around.
句中with
more
trees
around
为介词短语，起副词作用。Around
用作副词，意思是“周围，四周”。
2.
Air
pollution
is
harmful
to
our
health.be
harmful
to
sb.=
harm
sb.
=
do
harm
to
sb.
对某人有害3.
They
provide
home
for
animals
too.
provide
sth.
for
sb.
=
provide
sb.
with
sth.
提供给某人某物
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
Speak
up
and
study
skills.
First
The
Ss
can
also
develop
their
speaking
ability
by
talking
about
planting
more
trees.Then
the
Ss
can
learn
how
to
correct
a
lot
of
their
own
mistake
by
checking
their
work..
By
learning
,
most
of
the
Ss
can
use
them
correctly.
After
class,
the
Ss
need
more
practice.
W=
word
usage
mistake
P
=
punctuation
mistake
S
=
spelling
mistake
M
=
missing
word
G
=
grammatical
mistake
单词使用错误
标点符号错误
拼写错误
遗漏单词
语法错误Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1To
grasp
the
expression
about
the
text.2
To
train
the
Ss’
comprehension
ability3
To
learn
some
language
points过程与方法：to
listen
to
the
reading
the
answer
some
questions.to
get
the
Ss
to
talk
about
the
manners
in
UK
without
books.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’good
manners
in
different
countries.
教学重点难点
1.To
grasp
the
expression
about
the
text.2.
To
train
the
Ss’
comprehension
ability3.
To
learn
some
language
points
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】回顾复习：如果有人挡住了我们的路，我们该怎么办？在公共场所要尽量压低声音。
在英国和别人打招呼的合适方式是什么？自学教材P66-67知识点和难点自学检测：Dictation【自主探究】Step1
Revision1
How
do
British
people
greet
each
other /… 2
Create
new
situations
and
make
students
say
something
more
about
customs
in
the
UK.Mini-dictionaryavoid
(1ine
9)
vt．stay
clear
from；keep
away
from
(避免)
Please
avoid
talking
about
her
age.conversation
(1ine
7)
n．an
informal
talk
(<非正式>交谈，谈话)
You
can
start
the
conversation
first．loudly
(line
22)
adv．with
relatively
high
volume
(大声地)
This
lady
never
talked
loudly
in
public．proper
(1ine
2)
adj．socially
and
normally
acceptable；right．appropriate
or
correct
(符合习俗的；正确的)
She
is
always
proper
in
her
behaviour.
public
(1ine
10)
n.
ordinary
people
in
society
in
general
(民众,群体)
The
palace
is
now
open
to
the
public．saying
(1ine
25)
n.
a
well-known
phrase
or
statement
(成语,
谚语)
My
grandpa
knows
a
lot
of
English
sayings．subject
(line
9)
n.
a
thing
or
person
that
is
being
discussed
or
described
(话题；主题)
This
book
includes
many
different
subjects.touch
(line15)
vt.
put
your
hand
or
another
pan
of
yore
body
onto
sb/sth
(触摸、碰)
You
cannot
touch
that
thing·as
well,
in
one’s
way,
in
public,
push
in,
shake
sb’s
hand(1)
My
classmates
love
music.
I
love
it
________________.
(as
well)(2)
It
is
impolite
to
_________________before
others.
(push
in)(3)
We
should
not
speak
loudly_____________.
(
in
public
)(4)
Chinese
people
usually
______________when
they
meet
you
for
the
first
time.
(shake
your
hand)(5)
Please
do
not
stand___________________
.
I
am
in
a
hurry.
(in
my
way)Step2.
Practice1
Think
and
discuss
about
the
customs
in
China,
and
make
students
finish
the
exercise
of
Part
C
on
P
69
We’ve
learnt
about
the
good
manners
In
the
UK。
It’s
time
for
you
to
say
something
about
the
good
manners
in
China.
Discuss
this
in
groups
of
four
and
then
answer
the
questions
in
Part
C
on
page
69.2
Make
cards
about
the
customs
according
to
the
exercise【课堂小结】In
one’s
way
;
on
one’s
way
to…;
by
the
way;
Do
sth.
politelyAvoid
doingDo
sth.
till…（tillnot
…until…）巩固拓展】1.
他们用亲吻这种方式打招呼吗？.2.
嘴里含着食物和别人讲话时不礼貌的。3.
谈论天气是比较安全的话题。4.
在英国你不应该问一个妇女的体重。5.
你去过美国，你能给我一些关于参加晚会的建议吗？Homework:1.
Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.
Write
an
article
to
introduce
their
own
homes,
using
the
four
home
pages
as
a
model.
To
translate
the
sentences
make
students
say
something
more
about
customs
in
the
UKComplete
the
exercises.say
something
about
the
good
manners
in
China.Discuss
this
in
groups
of
four
and
then
answer
the
questions
in
Part
C
on
page
69.
Check
out
the
homework
and
the
preview.To
go
over
the
expressions
in
the
conversation.To
talk
about
the
manners
in
UK,then
in
China.To
get
some
Ss
to
retell
the
conversation.
课堂达标
完型填空Long
ago,
there
was
a
woman
in
the
countryside.
She
had
two
__1__--Mandy
and
Britney.
Mandy
and
Britney.
Mandy
had
a
bad
temper.
__2__
her
younger
sister
Britney
was
sweet
and
nice.
The
mother
only
__3__
Mandy.
So
she
made
Britney
do
all
the
work
while
Mandy
and
she
did
__4__
at
all.
One
morning,
the
mother
sent
Britney
to
get
some
__5__.
Britney
met
with
an
old
woman
who
asked
her
__6__
some
water
to
drink.
Britney
gave
some
fresh
water
to
the
old
woman
and
also
helped
her
to
make
a
fire
and
__7__
some
food.
In
return,
the
woman
wanted
to
send
her
a
__8__.
She
said,
“Go
the
the
__9__
house.
Only
take
the
eggs
that
say
‘Take
me’.
When
you
are
on
the
road,
break
the
eggs,
__10__,
and
you
will
have
a
surprise.”
Britney
did
so.
To
her
surprise,
there
were
diamonds
and
gold
jewelry
in
the
eggs.
The
mother
__11__
the
old
woman.
So
the
next
__12__,
she
awoke
__13__
and
sent
her
to
find
the
old
woman
and
get
more
diamonds.
But
Mandy
was
not
__14__
do
anything
for
the
old
woman.
She
didn’t
listen
to
the
old
woman
and
took
__15__
from
the
chicken
house.
To
her
and
her
mother’s
surprise,
there
were
no
diamonds
inside
the
eggs
but
snakes
and
bees,
instead.(
)1.
A.
brothers
B.
sisters
C.
sons
D.
daughters(
)2.
A.
And
B.
But
C.
So
D.
Then(
)3.
A.
hated
B.
loved
C.
complained
D.
controlled(
)4.
A.
something
B.
anything
C.
nothing
D.
everything(
)5.
A.
bread
B.
water
C.
fruit
D.
meat(
)6.
A.
about
B.
with
C.
on
D.
for(
)7.
A.
cook
B.
buy
C.
eat
D.
sell(
)8.
A.
book
B.
surprise
C.
present
D.
hug(
)9.
A.
birds
B.
ducks
C.
chicken
D.
geese(
)10.
A.
one
by
one
B.
now
and
then
C.
from
time
to
time
D.
little
by
little(
)11.
A.
heard
with
B.
heard
from
C.
heard
of
D.
heard
about(
)12.
A.
morning
B.
afternoon
C.
evening
D.
night(
)13.
A.
Mandy
B.
Britney
C.
herself
D.
her
husband(
)14.
A.
crazy
about
B.
used
to
C.
grateful
to
D.
willing
to(
)15.
A.
no
eggs
B.
all
the
eggs
C.
some
of
the
eggs
D.
one
egg
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Reading
2Mini-dictionaryavoid
(1ine
9)
vt．stay
clear
from；keep
away
from
(避免)
Please
avoid
talking
about
her
age.conversation
(1ine
7)
n．an
informal
talk
(<非正式>交谈，谈话)
You
can
start
the
conversation
first．loudly
(line
22)
adv．with
relatively
high
volume
(大声地)
This
lady
never
talked
loudly
in
public．proper
(1ine
2)
adj．socially
and
normally
acceptable；right．appropriate
or
correct
(符合习俗的；正确的)
She
is
always
proper
in
her
behaviour.
public
(1ine
10)
n.
ordinary
people
in
society
in
general
(民众,群体)
The
palace
is
now
open
to
the
public．saying
(1ine
25)
n.
a
well-known
phrase
or
statement
(成语,
谚语)My
grandpa
knows
a
lot
of
English
sayings．subject
(line
9)
n.
a
thing
or
person
that
is
being
discussed
or
described
(话题；主题)
This
book
includes
many
different
subjects.touch
(line15)
vt.
put
your
hand
or
another
pan
of
yore
body
onto
sb/sth
(触摸、碰)
You
cannot
touch
that
thing·
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
different
kinds
of
manners
,Through
Jenny’s
introduction,
the
Ss
can
know
about
manners
in
UK.By
studying
the
dialogue
,the
Ss
should
use
polite
language
like
“please
,thank
you,
excuse
me
,
sorry
ect.
in
public
and
at
home
.”
Also
,the
Ss
should
understand
the
local
conditions
and
the
customs
of
Britain.the
teacher
encourages
the
Ss
to
respect
each
other
and
use
the
polite
language
as
usual.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：To
learn
to
guess
meanings
of
new
words
from
the
contextTo
learn
to
skim
text
for
overall
meanings
and
scan
for
details.Learn
to
introduce
the
ORBIS
doctors’
jobs
in
correct
languages.
To
understand
the
structure
of
difficult
sentences.过程与方法：1.get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
reading
then
do
some
comprehensions.2.to
discuss
in
groups
and
understand
the
meaning
of
the
article.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
help
the
people
in
need.
教学重点难点
Words:
interviewer
blindnessmedical
patient
affordproud
reader
medicinedevelop
treat
Phrases:
go
to
hospital
on
board
carry
on
Sentences:
The
plane
is
also
used
as
a
training
centre.Many
of
our
patients
can’t
afford
to
go
to
hospital,
so
we
have
to
go
to
them.
Also,
local
doctors
and
nurses
are
invited
on
board
to
learn
about
eye
operations.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Task
One
Leading
–
inStep
1
Review
something
about
comics
and
welcome
to
the
unit.Ⅰ.Translate
phrases
and
sentences.
Ⅱ.Charities
around
the
worldStep
2
T:
ORBIS
is
an
international
charity
which
can
help
people
with
eye
problems.
Do
you
want
to
know
more
about
ORBIS Task
Two
Pre-readingStep
1
Watch
a
video
about
ORBIS.
Question:
Why
is
there
a
plane
in
the
logo
Step
2
Information
about
ORBISStep
3
Use
pictures
to
talk
about
some
important
words
and
complete
Part
B1
on
page
96.Task
Three
While-readingStep
1
Skim
and
write
T
or
F.Step
2
Read
lines
1-6,
lines
7-15,
lines
16-20
and
lines
21-26
separately
and
answer
some
questions
or
do
some
other
exercises.Step
3
Try
to
divide
the
interview
into
four
parts
and
conclude
the
main
idea
of
each
part.Step
4
Read
the
whole
interview
again
and
complete
Part
B3
and
B4
on
page
97.
Help
Amy
complete
the
notes
and
the
article.Activity
Four
Post-reading
T:
After
reading
the
interview,
what
do
you
think
of
Dr
Ma’s
job
Do
you
want
to
be
a
person
like
him
Why
(Discuss
in
groups.)Task
Five:
Exercises一．从方框中选择适当的单词并用其适当形式填空。1.
My
parents
are
of
my
sister
and
me.2.
She
uses
her
car
for
driving
to
work.3.
The
girl
needed
to
have
a
new
in
hospital.4.
If
you
want
to
be
a
good
writer,
you
must
be
a
good
first.5.
He
can’t
see
things.
His
is
the
result
of
an
accident.二．单项选择。(
)
1.—
How
do
you
learn
English,
Toby
—
I
often
practice
English
chatting
my
American
friends.
A.
in;
to
B.
by;
of
C.
by;
with
D.
on;
with(
)
2.
—
Do
you
know
anything
about
the
players
of
our
school
football
team
—
Yes.
They
are
young
boys
between
the
age
of
thirteen
and
fifteen.
A.
most
B.
mostly
C.
almost
D.
nearly(
)
3.
This
type
of
mobile
phone
is
my
favourite,
but
I
can’t
it.
A.
spend
B.
cost
C.
pay
D.
afford(
)
4.
Yao
Ming
was
one
of
the
best
players
in
NBA.
We
were
all
him.
A.
angry
with
B.
strict
with
C.
worried
about
D.
proud
of(
)
5.
The
man
and
got
well
quickly.
A.
operated
B.
is
operated
C.
was
operated
on
D.
operated
onHomework:
1.
Read
the
interview
about
ORBIS.2.
Workbook
Period
2
3.
Preview
Reading
(2)
Review
something
about
comics
and
welcome
to
the
unit.Watch
a
video
about
ORBIS.Skim
and
write
T
or
F.Read
the
whole
interview
again
and
complete
Part
B3
and
B4
on
page
97.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
something
about
some
international
charities.After
skimming
,do
some
comprehensions.Have
a
test
in
class.
课堂达标
一、用所给词的适当形式填空1.The
doctor
said
he
needed
an__
___(
operate)
at
once.2.
Look,
there
is
an____________
(advertise)
on
the
wall.
3.
We
hope
people
will
support
our
work
by
sending____________
(donate)
to
ORBIS.4.
Timmy
tells
me___________
(not
tell
)you
the
bad
news.5.
He
is
used
to____________
(drink)
milk
in
the
morning.
6.
They
are
looking
forward
to________(
see)
you
again.
7.
My
brother
used_________(
watch)
TV
in
the
evening,
but
now
he
doesn’t.二、根据汉语提示，完成句子他们大多数人如此贫穷，付不起出国留学的钱。Most
of
them
are
poor
that
they
to
study
abroad.这间教室将被用作阅览室。The
classroom
will
be
a
reading
room.现代医学发展如此迅速。Modern
medicine
is
so
.雨停之后我们将继续在田里干活。
We
will
in
the
field
after
the
rain.
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Reading
1Words:
interviewer
blindness
medical
patient
afford
proud
reader
medicine
develop
treat
Phrases:
go
to
hospital
on
board
carry
on
Sentences:
The
plane
is
also
used
as
a
training
centre.Many
of
our
patients
can’t
afford
to
go
to
hospital,
so
we
have
to
go
to
them.
Also,
local
doctors
and
nurses
are
invited
on
board
to
learn
about
eye
operations.
By
training
them,
we
hope
to
help
more
people.During
my
last
visit,
150
patients
were
operated
on.
I’m
proud
to
help
people
see
again
and
improve
their
lives.
But
more
money
is
needed
to
carry
on
with
our
work.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
Ss
learn
an
interview
about
ORBIS.
they
can
understand
the
charity
work
better
from
Dr
Ma.
Also
they
can
know
that
the
charity
need
people
to
offer
help,
so
they
will
develop
the
idea
of
trying
to
help
the
charities.
blind
most
read
operate
pride
1Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
explain
some
key
points
mentioned
in
this
reading
passage
,
and
help
the
students
use
these
key
points
to
talk
their
own
travelling
.2.
To
expand
some
vocabulary
to
talk
about
travelling
.3.
To
offer
the
students
more
chances
to
speak
English
:
过程与方法：
1.
To
speak
out
the
passage
in
their
own
words2.
To
understand
and
use
the
expressions
in
the
text 情感态度与价值观：To
recognize
and
understand
vocabulary
about
traveling
教学重点难点
1.
To
practise
the
main
language
points
of
the
context. 2.
To
speak
out
the
passage
in
their
own
words,
following
the
structure
of
the
passages.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Revision
&
presentation
Revise
the
contents
we
learned
yesterday
,
using
some
questions
.
(ppt)Step
2
Explanation
&
practiceGo
through
the
text
in
details
with
the
students
together
,
explaining
something
important
.e.g.
1.
We
haven’t
seen
each
other
since
last
week
.
2.
My
parents
and
I
have
been
in
Hong
Kong
for
two
days
.
(Using
these
two
sentences
to
review
the
present
perfect
tense
the
students
have
learned
in
the
1st
unit
.
Give
the
students
some
more
examples
.)3.
have
a
fantastic
/
good
/
nice
/
great
/
wonderful
time
(--
have
fun
/
enjoy
oneself
/
play
happily)4.
I
couldn’t
stop
taking
photos
.
(
stop
to
do
...
/
stop
doing
...)5.
At
the
end
of
the
day
,
we
watched
the
fireworks
in
front
of
Sleeping
Beauty
Castle
.
(
at
the
end
of
...
/
in
the
end
)Step
3
Practice
for
consolidation
(ppt)Give
the
students
some
exercises
to
practice
the
important
points
we’ve
just
learnt
.Step
4
Oral
practice
(
Group
work)Group
the
students
into
four
,
then
discuss
the
following
topic
:
TravellingWhen
Where
How
What
Who
etc
.Present
their
results
in
the
end
.
Offer
the
students
more
chances
to
practice
speaking
English
.Homework
1.
Review
the
contents
we’ve
learned
this
period
.2.
Finish
off
the
exercises
in
period
3
,
workbook
.
课堂达标
一、用所给单词的正确形式填空1.
It
______________
(rain)
for
a
week..2.
She
can
dance_____________
(beautiful).3.Hearing
the
news
,
I
jumped
with
_________
(excite).4.All
of
us
couldn’t
stop
_______
(wave)
to
the
children
.
5.–Where
is
Kate
She
__________
(go)
to
England
for
a
holiday
.6.-______
Mr.
Li
_______
(be)
to
the
Great
Wall
Yes
,
twice
.☆7.I’ll
spend
as
much
time
as
I
can
________
(practice)
English8.1．We’ll
start
our
class
as
soon
as
Tim
_____________(arrive).9.
They
went
to
the
dining
room
_______________(have)lunch.10.
The
farmers
still
worked
hard
in
the
field
even
though
it
______________(rain)
heavily.11.
I
________________(work)
here
since
I
___________(move)
here
in
1990.12.
So
far
I
__________________(make)quite
a
few
friends
here.
二、单项选择(
)1.----I
called
you
at
half
past
nine
this
morning,
but
there
was
no
answer.
----Oh,
sorry.
I
_________________
with
my
cousin
in
the
playground.
A.
shop
B.
was
playing
basketball
C.
shopped
D.
will
shop(
)2.
Sandy’s
father
bought
a
bike
____________
a
gift
_________
Sandy.
A.
for;
as
B.
as;
as
C.
as;
for
D.
for;
for(
)3.
My
mother
was
_________
at
the
__________
news.
A.
surprising;
surprising
B.
surprised;
surprising
C.
surprised;
surprised
D.
surprising;
surprised(
)4.She
___________
the
room
when
I
knocked
at
the
door.
A.
are
cleaning
B.
were
cleaning
C.
cleaned
D.
was
cleaning(
)5.
Denmark
is
famous
for
its
_____________.
A.
the
Mount
Fuji
B.
the
Statue
of
Liberty
C.
the
Little
Mermaid
D.
the
Tower
Bridge
板书设计
8下
Unit
2
Travelling
Reading
21.Phrases
:
have
a
fantastic
time
;
spend
the
whole
day;
move
at
high
speed
;
through
the
ride
;
hurry
to
...
;
such
as
;
can’t
stop
doing
...
;
watch
a
4-D
film
;
a
couple
of
......
;
at
the
end
of
the
day
;
2.Sentences
:
We
haven’t
seen
each
other
since
last
week
.
Have
you
come
back
yet
I
ran
after
them
and
couldn’t
stop
taking
photos
.
I
know
you’ve
gone
to
Hainan
.
Hope
you’ve
enjoyed
yourself
there
.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
deals
with
words
and
expressions,
phrases
related
to
travelling
.
According
to
the
exercises
on
book,Ss
are
guided
to
pay
particular
attention
to
the
reading
strategy
of
skimming
and
scanning
methods.
Get
the
Ss
to
gain
the
information
of
the
passage
and
the
expressions.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.To
work
out
the
structure
of
each
sentence.2.To
retell
the
story
in
their
own
words,
following
the
organization
of
the
passage.3.To
explain
all
the
language
points
.过程与方法：1.get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
reading
then
do
some
comprehensions.2.to
discuss
in
groups
and
understand
the
meaning
of
the
article.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
help
the
people
in
need.
教学重点难点
1.To
grasp
some
useful
expressions.2.
To
understand
the
usage
of
some
words
through
the
exercises.3.
To
understand
the
usage
of
some
words
through
the
exercises.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Task
One:
Retelling
the
storySomething
about
blindness:
About
around
the
world
are
blind
or
have
,
mostly
in
countries.
The
good
news
is
that
______________________________________________.The
bad
news
is
that________________________________________________.
The
work
of
ORBISORBIS
uses_________________
to
visit
poor
countries.
On
the
plane,
volunteer
doctors
______________________
.Local
doctors
and
nurses
can
come
to
the
plane
to
___________________________.
We
teach
them
.Dr
Ma’s
work
and
his
feeling:During
his
last
visit,
he
__________________________________________________Dr
Ma
is
proud
that
_____________________________________________________Task
Two
：Useful
expressions1.
全球约两亿八千五百万人
about
285
million
people
around
the
world2.
这些案例中的百分之八十
80
per
cent
of
these
cases3.
有钱医治
have
money
for
medical
treatment4.飞行的眼科医
on
board6.
志愿者医生
volunteer
doctors7.
做手术
do
operations8.
把它当作教学中心
use
it
as
a
teaching
center9.
学习有关眼科手术
learn
about
eye
operations10.
通过训练他们
by
training
them11.
给150位病人做手术
operate
on
150
patients12.
为此感到骄傲
feel/
be
proud
that
/
of/
to
…13.
继续我们的工作
carry
on
with
our
workTask
Three
：Explain
some
important
language
points
1.
Dr
Ma,
please
tell
us
something
about
blindness.
blindness为名词，意思是“失明”,其形容词形式为blind“失明的”。2.
prevent:
vt.
阻止,
预防vt.
prevent
sb.
from
doing
sth.阻止某人做某事stop…
from
doing
sth.
keep…from
doing
sth.keep
结构中的from
不可以省略,
其余结构中的from
可以省略.Prevention
is
better
than
cure.
预防总比治愈强3.
On
the
plane,
volunteer
doctors
perform
operations.volunteer:
n.
v.operate
vi.
做手术,operate
on
某人或某身体部位5.
Many
of
our
patients
cant’t
afford
to
go
to
hospital,,
so
we
have
to
go
to
them.
(1)
patient
为名词，意为“病人”，其对应词为doctor.
（2）afford
为动词，意为“买得起,能做”，常与情态动词can或者can’t,
could,
be
able
to
连用。
（3）go
to
hospital意为“去看病”。同义短语为go
to
a
doctor。6.
Also,
local
doctors
and
nurses
are
invited
on
board
to
learn
about
eye
operations.
On
board
意为“在飞机（船、火车）上”。7.
By
training
them,
we
hope
to
help
more
people.
“by+动名词”，意为“通过某种方式”。对于这样的短语应用
“how”提问。
8.
I’m
proud
that
I
can
help
so
many
people.proud:
adj.
骄傲的,
自高自大的,
自豪的be
proud.
of
sb.(sth.)
/
to
do
sth.be
proud
that…
对…感到得意或自豪.pride
n.
骄傲
take
pride
in…为…而骄傲He
takes
pride
in
his
collection
of
stamps.
=He
is
proud
of
his
collection
of
stamps.9.
Modern
medicine
is
developing
quickly
and
now
most
eye
problems
and
disease
can
be
treated
and
cured.
(1)
medicine
作为名词，意为“医学，药”，为不可数名词，其形容词为medical,
(2)
treat
作动词，意为“治疗处理”，其名词为treatment,
常见短语为treat…as“把……作为……对待”。
He
treat
me
as
his
good
friend.
他把我当好朋友对待。10.
All
we
need
is
enough
money
to
carry
on
with
our
work.(1)
carry
on
with
sth
=
carry
on
doing
sth.,
carry
sth.
on
继续
=continueCarry
on
with
your
work
while
I’m
away.=Carry
on
working
while
I’m
away.(2)
carry
sth.
on
进行或举行某事
carry
on
a
conversation
/
a
discussion
/
a
dialogue
继续做同一件事
go
on
doing
sth
/carry
on
doing
sth/continue
doing
sth/keep
doing
sthTask
four：PracticeWrite
an
article
to
introduce
the
ORBIS
and
the
ORBIS
doctor.Homework:
1.
Workbook
Period
3.
2.
Write
an
article
to
introduce
the
ORBIS
and
the
ORBIS
doctor.3.
Preview
Grammar.
Fill
in
the
blanks.Translate
the
expressions.Master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.Write
an
article
to
introduce
the
ORBIS
and
the
ORBIS
doctor.
Check
out
the
homework
and
the
preview.Do
some
proper
exercises
according
to
the
passage.
课堂达标
一、根据首字母提示，完成下列句子。1.
The
old
man
felt
very
p______
of
her
son
because
he
won
the
first
prize.2.
You
should
work
hard
to
i_________
your
study.3.
I
don’t
have
any
p________
money
with
me.4.
By
t________
local
doctors
and
nurses
,
ORBIS
hopes
to
help
more
people.5.
The
doctor
will
do
an
o_______
on
the
man.二、
翻译句子。1.
人们通过向希望工程捐款来帮助贫困地区的学校和学生People
helps
schools
and
students
in
by
to
.2.他没有足够的钱进行医疗诊治。
He
doesn’t
have
money
.
3
.Tom
过去经常上学迟到，但他现在到校比以前早，再也不迟到了Tom
late
for
school,
but
now
he
comes
than
before,
he
is
never
late
now.4.
李医生不习惯在飞机上工作。Dr
Li
on
the
plane.5.
雨下得太大了，以致于人们不能继续在外面干活。It
rained
people
couldn’t
_______
outside.
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Reading
21.
Dr
Ma,
please
tell
us
something
about
blindness.
blindness为名词，意思是“失明”,其形容词形式为blind“失明的”。2.
prevent:
vt.
阻止,
预防vt.
prevent
sb.
from
doing
sth.阻止某人做某事stop…
from
doing
sth.
keep…from
doing
sth.keep
结构中的from
不可以省略,
其余结构中的from
可以省略.Prevention
is
better
than
cure.
预防总比治愈强3.
On
the
plane,
volunteer
doctors
perform
operations.volunteer:
n.
v.operate
vi.
做手术,operate
on
某人或某身体部位5.
Many
of
our
patients
cant’t
afford
to
go
to
hospital,,
so
we
have
to
go
to
them.
(1)
patient
为名词，意为“病人”，其对应词为doctor.
（2）afford
为动词，意为“买得起,能做”，常与情态动词can或者can’t,
could,
be
able
to
连用。
（3）go
to
hospital意为“去看病”。同义短语为go
to
a
doctor。6.
Also,
local
doctors
and
nurses
are
invited
on
board
to
learn
about
eye
operations.
On
board
意为“在飞机（船、火车）上”。7.
By
training
them,
we
hope
to
help
more
people.
“by+动名词”，意为“通过某种方式”。对于这样的短语应用
“how”提问。
8.
I’m
proud
that
I
can
help
so
many
people.proud:
adj.
骄傲的,
自高自大的,
自豪的be
proud.
of
sb.(sth.)
/
to
do
sth.be
proud
that…
对…感到得意或自豪.pride
n.
骄傲
take
pride
in…为…而骄傲He
takes
pride
in
his
collection
of
stamps.
=He
is
proud
of
his
collection
of
stamps.9.
Modern
medicine
is
developing
quickly
and
now
most
eye
problems
and
disease
can
be
treated
and
cured.
(1)
medicine
作为名词，意为“医学，药”，为不可数名词，其形容词为medical,
(2)
treat
作动词，意为“治疗处理”，其名词为treatment,
常见短语为treat…as“把……作为……对待”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
Ss
learn
an
interview
about
ORBIS.
they
can
understand
the
charity
work
better
from
Dr
Ma.
Also
they
can
know
that
the
charity
need
people
to
offer
help,
so
they
will
develop
the
idea
of
trying
to
help
the
charities.Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
skim
the
article
for
the
main
idea
of
each
part;2.
scan
the
article
to
get
specific
information;3.
retell
the
changes
in
Sunshine
Town
and
the
feelings;
教学重点
1.New
words
and
phrases2.
New
structures:
Do
you
know
Sunshine
Town
very
well I’ve
lived
here
since
I
was
born.Has
the
town
changed
a
lot
over
the
years
教学难点
1.
To
use
skimming
or
scanning
strategies
to
get
information.
2.
To
discuss
the
changes
in
our
own
city.
教学方法
Try
reading
the
new
words
and
learning
them
by
heart.
Underline
the
puzzles
of
this
part.
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
Lead-inStep2
Pre-reading
Step3
While-readingStep4
Post-reading
Encourage
the
students
to
preview
the
lessons
well.Try
to
find
the
main
idea
correctly.Read
the
text
before
class
and
try
to
get
the
meaning
of
the
sentences.
Try
to
find
the
answers
to
the
questions.Check
the
preview.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.After
answering
the
questions,
the
students
discuss
in
groups
and
show
their
thoughts.
Present
some
pictures
and
get
the
students
to
know
some
new
words
and
phrases.1.
Prediction2.
Group
work1.
Skimming2.
Scanning3.
Listening
and
reading(1)
Read
after
the
tape
loudly.
(2)
Read
in
roles.(3)
Finish
task-based
reading.1.
Have
an
interview2.
Group
discussion(1)
Do
you
think
life
in
our
hometown
is
better
now (2)
Give
more
advice
on
how
to
improve
our
city.
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
1.
Listen
to
the
tape
after
class
and
read
the
passage
more
fluently.
2.
Write
an
article
about
the
changes
in
our
hometown
according
to
the
discussion.
教学反思
PAGE
2Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
introduce
some
international
charities
to
students.2.
Learn
to
discuss
how
to
help
people
in
the
poor
areas.过程与方法：1.talk
about
some
international
charities
in
groups
2.to
use
some
pictures
and
questions
to
talk
about
some
international
charities.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
work
for
some
international
charities.
教学重点难点
Words:
especially
basic
education
right
spreadPhrases:
pocket
money
basic
educationPatterns:
Eddie,
more
money
is
needed
for
charity.
I’m
too
weak
to
walk
any
further.We
only
have
five
kilometers
left.
It
provides
basic
education
for
children
in
poor
areas.
It
also
works
to
prevent
the
spread
of
some
serious
diseases,
like
AIDS,
among
young
people.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Task
One
Welcome
to
the
unitStep
1.
Free
talkT
shows
some
pictures.
(PPT)1.
What
can
you
see
from
the
pictures 2.
What
do
you
think
of
them T:
They
need
help,
who
can
help
them In
this
unit,
we’ll
learn
some
international
charities.
What
international
charities
do
you
know Have
you
ever
heard
of
famous
international
charities
like:
ORBIS,
Oxfam,
UNICEF,
and
World
Wide
Fund
for
Nature Step
2.Presentation1.
There
are
some
logos
and
pictures
on
the
screen.
Could
you
match
the
logos
with
the
charities 2.
Complete
part
A
on
page
93
and
try
to
remember
their
names
and
Chinese
names.3.
Ss
discuss
in
groups:
“Which
charity
would
you
like
to
work
for
Why ”Step
3
.Listen
to
Part
B
and
answer
the
question:1.
Which
charity
are
they
talking
about
2.
Put
these
phrases
into
the
correct
order
while
listening.(
)
work
for
the
equal
rights
of
girls
and
women(
)
prevent
the
spread
of
serious
diseases(
)
build
a
better
world
for
everyone
especially
children(
)
provides
basic
education
for
children
in
poor
areasPay
attention
to
the
underlined
words,
read
and
explain.Ⅱ.Let
students
discuss
other
charities
and
make
their
own
conversation
in
different
roles,
using
Part
B
as
a
model.Task
Two
Comic
stripStep
1.Listen
to
the
comic
strip
and
answer
the
following
questions.1.
What
does
Hobo
want
Eddie
to
do 2.
What
does
Eddie
want
to
do
first
Why Step
2.Read
and
act
outStep
3.
Fill
in
the
blanks.More
______________
is
needed
for
charity.
Hobo
found
Eddie
has
some
______________
money
left,
so
he
asks
Eddie
to
go
and
______________
it.
Eddie
says
it’s
time
to
have
______________.
Hobo
tells
him
not
to
______________
because
they
can
have
a
big
lunch
after
that.
On
the
way,
Eddie
tells
Hobo
that
he
is
too
______________
to
walk
any
further.
He
wants
to
have
lunch
______________.
But
Hobo
doesn’t
agree.
He
says
they
only
have
five
______________
left.Task
Three
Language
points1.
Eddie，more
money
is
needed
for
charity.
埃迪，慈善事业需要更多的钱。be
needed
意为“被需要
e.g.
Xu
Song
is
loved
by
many
young
students.2.
You
have
some
pocket
money
left.
你有一些剩余的零花钱。
left
为leave的过去分词，修饰money,
作后置定语。
have/there
be…left
有……留下，剩下3.
I’m
too
weak
to
walk
any
further.
我太虚弱了而不能走更远。
further是far的比较级，表示距离上更远。any
能够修饰比较级但多用于否定句或疑问句
too
…
to
…
太……而不能…… 4.
It
helps
build
a
better
world
for
everyone
,
especially
children
all
over
the
world.
especially为副词，意为“特别，尤其”。
specially
也是副词，意为“专门地，特地”。
5.
It
provides
basic
education
for
children
in
poor
areas.
basic
为形容词，意为“基础的，基本的”。basic
education
意为“基础教育”。education
为名词，意为“教育”，一般不可数。
education
的动词形式为educate,
形容词形式为
educational.6.
It
works
for
the
equal
rights
of
girls
and
women.
它也为女孩和妇女争取平等的权利。
equal为形容词，意为“平等的”。
right
为名词，意为“权利”。
e.g.
Every
child
has
the
right
to
receive
education.
每个孩子都有接受教育的权利。7.
It
also
works
to
prevent
the
spread
of
some
serious
diseases,
like
AIDS,
among
young
people.
prevent
为动词，意为“阻止”。常见短语为prevent
sb
from
doing
sth
“阻止某人做某事”，同义短语为stop/keep
sb
from
doing
sth.
spread
在此句中为名词，意为“扩散；分布；展开”，the
spread
of
…
…的传播/扩散
spread-spread-spreadTask
Four
Exercises根据句意和汉语提示完成句子1.
Students
have
the
______________
(权利)
to
go
to
school
for
study.
2.
He
likes
playing
ball
games,
______________
(尤其)
football.
3.
We
should
try
our
best
to
prevent
the
______________
(传播)
of
AIDS.4.
Some
poor
children
can’t
afford
to
go
to
school,
so
they
can’t
get
basic
______________.5.
In
English
class,
every
student
has
the
______________
chance
to
show
themselves.二、句子翻译1．他走得太慢，没能按时到达那儿。________________________________________________________2.
冰箱里没有剩余的东西了，我们需要买一些。________________________________________________________3.
当地政府必须采取措施来阻止这种疾病的传播。________________________________________________________4.
慈善事业需要更多的钱。________________________________________________________5.
它为贫困地区的孩子们提供基础教育。_______________________________________________________
Homework:Recite
the
content
we
learnt
in
class.Workbook
Period
1.Preview
Reading.
Watch
some
pictures
and
then
answer
some
questions.match
the
logos
with
the
plete
part
A
on
page
93
and
try
to
remember
their
names
and
Chinese
names.Listen
to
Part
B
and
answer
the
question:Listen
to
the
comic
strip
and
answer
the
following
questions.Read
and
act
outTo
learn
and
master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
plete
the
following
exercises.then
check
the
answers
together.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
some
international
charities.Discuss
in
groups
what
you
have
ever
done
for
international
charities.To
learn
some
charities
logos
and
master
what
they
mean
for.
课堂达标
一、根据中文提示写出单词。1.
I
like
playing
games,
(尤其)
this
game.2.
We
all
have
equal
(权利)
about
education.3.
That,
as
I
say,
is
the
first
(基本的)
view.4.
I
have
only
one
ticket
(剩下)。5.
Why
were
the
toys
(分布)
all
over
the
ground 二、用方框中动词的适当形式填空。protect
be
hurt
work
write1.
I
to
you
soon
and
let
you
know
more
about
the
show.2.
We
should
do
everything
we
can
the
environment.3.
Since
last
winter,
the
old
lady
ill
in
hospital.4.
–May
I
speak
to
Mr.
Morgan
–
Sorry.
He
on
the
farm.5.
Tom
was
so
careless
that
he
his
right
arm
when
he
was
riding
to
school.
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Comic
strip
and
welcome
to
the
unit1.
Eddie，more
money
is
needed
for
charity.
埃迪，慈善事业需要更多的钱。be
needed
意为“被需要
e.g.
Xu
Song
is
loved
by
many
young
students.2.
You
have
some
pocket
money
left.
你有一些剩余的零花钱。
left
为leave的过去分词，修饰money,
作后置定语。
have/there
be…left
有……留下，剩下3.
I’m
too
weak
to
walk
any
further.
我太虚弱了而不能走更远。
further是far的比较级，表示距离上更远。any
能够修饰比较级但多用于否定句或疑问句
too
…
to
…
太……而不能…… 4.
It
helps
build
a
better
world
for
everyone
,
especially
children
all
over
the
world.
especially为副词，意为“特别，尤其”。
specially
也是副词，意为“专门地，特地”。
5.
It
provides
basic
education
for
children
in
poor
areas.
basic
为形容词，意为“基础的，基本的”。basic
education
意为“基础教育”。education
为名词，意为“教育”，一般不可数。
education
的动词形式为educate,
形容词形式为
educational.6.
It
works
for
the
equal
rights
of
girls
and
women.
它也为女孩和妇女争取平等的权利。
equal为形容词，意为“平等的”。
right
为名词，意为“权利”。
e.g.
Every
child
has
the
right
to
receive
education.
每个孩子都有接受教育的权利。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）The
context
of
this
period
is
to
get
Ss
to
learn
some
international
charities
and
develop
their
ideas
of
helping
poof
people
.the
main
task
is
to
let
Ss
know
something
about
the
charities
and
their
functions.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
know
how
to
make
charts2.
To
understand
the
uses
of
charts3.
To
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing过程与方法：to
get
the
Ss
to
go
over
how
to
organize
our
ideas
using
five
Main
points
of
Study
skills
in
Unit
2
2.
to
get
the
Ss
to
learn
how
to
make
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing
by
themselves情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
writing
abilities.
教学重点难点
1.
To
understand
the
uses
of
charts2.
To
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Present
the
learning
targetsStep
2
Revision你介意为我们唱首歌吗？2.
上海位于中国的东海岸。3.
—
谢谢你的帮助。—
我的荣幸。4.
步行到学校要花费我半个小时。5.
我的看法和他正好相反。Step
3
Free
talkHow
do
you
know
about
Sydney Step
4
Making
chartsWe
can
use
charts
to
organize
our
ideas
when
we
write.
This
helps
us
see
and
understand
the
ideas
better.
We
can
also
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing.We
can
use
the
following
chart
to
show
people
what
the
website
"Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours"
is
about.Tip
When
we
make
charts,
we
do
not
need
to
use
complete
sentences.Step
5
ExercisesMillie
is
making
a
chart
to
introduce
an
online
course
to
her
classmates.
Help
her
use
the
chart
to
organize
her
ideas.
Write
the
letters
in
the
boxes.a
an
online
courseb
asking
the
wayc
booking
tickets
and
hotelsd
Daily
Englishe
ordering
mealsf
seeing
a
doctorg
shoppingh
using
English
in
daily
communicationStep
6
Make
your
own
charts!Step
7
HomeworkRemember
the
words
and
expressions.Preview
the
next
lesson.
Read
the
learning
targets.Translate
the
sentences
Talk
about
Sydney.Learn
to
use
charts
to
organize
our
ideas
when
we
write
and
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
plete
the
charts.Make
your
own
charts!
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
talk
about
some
places
of
interest
in
Sydney.To
go
over
how
to
organize
our
ideas
using
five
Main
points
of
Study
skills
in
Unit
2
Learn
to
use
charts
to
organize
our
ideas
when
we
write
and
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing.
课堂达标
一、根据中文用所给单词的适当形式填空1.We
can
(预定）train
tickets
on
this
website.2.Can
you
use
English
in
your
（日常的）communication 3.
-----Have
you
ever
been
tp
（非洲）？
-----No,never,
I
really
hope
I
can
go
there
some
day.4.You
are
coughing
so
hard.
You
must
go
to
（看）the
doctor.5.People
call
us
up
mainly
to
（点）meals.
选择题。(
)
1.
They
get
together
and
go
from
house
to
house_________
songs.A.
sing
B.
sang
C.
singing
D.
sung(
)
2.
His
father
________Beijing.
He'll
come
back________
a
week.A.
has
been
to;
in
B.
has
gone
to;
inC.
has
been
to;
after
D.
has
gone
to
;
after(
)
3.
---
How
long
_______your
sister_______
the
book
---
_______
a
week.A.
has;
kept;
for
B.
has
;
kept;
sinceC.
has
;
borrowed
;
for
D.
has;
borrowed;
since(
)
4.
There
a
small
river
near
my
home.A.
used
to
be
B.
was
used
to
be
C.
was
used
to
being
D.
used
to
being(
)
5.
The
package
tour
_______
everything.
Don’t
worry
about
it.A.
including
B.
include
C.
is
covered
D.
covers(
)
6.
Would
you
mind
__________me
how
to
chat
online
板书设计
8下Unit
3
Online
tours
Study
skillsa
an
online
course
b
asking
the
wayc
booking
tickets
and
hotels
d
Daily
Englishe
ordering
meals
f
seeing
a
doctorg
shopping
h
using
English
in
daily
communication
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
help
the
Ss
to
use
charts
to
organize
our
ideas
when
we
write
and
use
charts
to
make
notes
of
a
piece
of
writing.
It
is
important
for
the
Ss
to
master
many
Study
skills
in
study.
It
can
help
the
Ss
to
master
more
knowledge.
So
,most
of
the
Ss
are
interested
in
it.
a
d
e
f
h
c
g
b
a
d
e
f
h
c
g
bUnit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、单项选择（共18分，每小题1分）从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。(
)
1.
Mr.
Jiang,
as
______
elderly
man,
took
part
in
the
Special
Games
for
____
elderly,
and
finished
_______
second
in
the
race.
A.
a;
the;
the
B.
an;
the;
/
C.
an;
an;
the
D.
the;
an;
/(
)
2.
Before
working
as
a
businessman,
his
first
________
was
to
be
a
volunteer
for
the
2007
Shanghai
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
A.
work
B.
task
C.
job
D.
duty(
)
3.
We
students
can
_______
food
and
old
clothes
to
the
homeless
people,
and
the
teachers
can
__________
learning
skills
for
the
poor
children.
A.
provide;
give
B.
provide;
offer
C.
offer;
give
D.
give;
provide(
)
4.
As
you
know,
we
can
organize
our
ideas
in
different
ways
according
to
the
type
of
writing.
For
example,
when
we
describe
a
place
or
an
object,
we
use
_______.
A.
Time
order
B.
Space
order
C.
General
to
specific
D.
Specific
to
general(
)
5.
The
______
boy
has
been
in
hospital
for
about
two
months.
The
doctor
says
he
has
a
serious
heart
________.
A.
sick;
disease
B.
ill;
illness
C.
sick
illness
D.
ill;
disease(
)
6.
Mr.
White
says
the
doctors
will
__________
on
my
mother,
and
it
will
____
about
200,000
yuan.
A.
have
a
check;
take
B.
provide
an
opeation;
spend
C.
do
an
operation;
cost
D.
take
a
good
care;
spend(
)
7.
—The
volunteers
really
provided
the
athletes
with
support.
—Exactly.
__________
they
helped
make
the
event!
A.
What
a
great
success
B.
What
great
success
C.
How
a
great
success
D.
How
great
success(
)
8.
As
a
top
student
in
our
class,
itt’s
good
____
Jim
to
help
us
when
we’re
in
need,
and
also
good
_____
him
to
exercise
for
an
hour
every
day.
A.
of;
of
B.
for;
for
C.
for;
of
D.
of;
for(
)
9.
—How
many
letters
have
you
got
from
your
online
friends
since
last
year
—_______.
We’re
just
chatting
with
each
other
when
we’re
free.
A.
Nothing
B.
None
C.
No
D.
No
one(
)
10.
—What
do
you
think
of
Jack
when
has
save
the
boy
from
the
river
—I
think
it’s
_______
of
him
to
do
so,
for
the
boy
was
in
great
danger.
A.
important
B.
necessary
C.
brave
D.
honest(
)
11.
Daniel
________
the
Party
last
month,
and
_________
our
activities
to
help
people
at
the
community
center.
A.
joined
in;
took
part
in
B.
joined;
joined
in
C.
took
part
in;
joined
D.
joined
in;
took
part
in(
)
12.
—Look!
The
two
brothers
are
arguing
about
what
to
do
next.
—Oh,
well.
In
fact,
the
_____
brother’s
idea
is
_________
the
younger’s.
A.
older;
the
same
as
B.
elder;
similar
to
C.
elderly;
as
good
as
D.
older;
different
from(
)
13.
It
was
a
hard
time
for
those
students
because
of
losing
the
game,
but
they
did
not
______
hope.
A.
give
up
B.
give
off
C.
give
in
D.
give
out(
)
14.
It’s
dangerous_________
a
close
look
at
the
tiger
in
zoo.
A.
for
us
taking
B.
of
us
to
take
C.
of
us
taking
D.
of
us
to
take(
)
15.
After
the
earthquake
in
Sichuan,
all
the
local
governments
were
trying
to
help
the
________
people
to
rebuild
(重建)
their
homes.
A.
careless
B.
hopeless
C.
useless
D.
homeless(
)
16.
The
people
who
are
confident
have
more
_____
to
make
them
successful.
A.
education
B.
chances
C.
excuses
D.
prizes(
)
17.
—Please
speak
louder.
My
grandfather
is
a
little
______.
—Sorry.
I
________.
A.
blind;
do
B.
disabled;
won’t
C.
deaf;
will
D.
worried;
don’t(
).
18.
—Yes.
I
agree.
If
my
neighbors
are
busy,
I
can
look
after
their
children
for
them.
—_________________________
like
that.
A.
It’s
useful
for
them
to
do
things
B.
It’s
wise
of
them
to
do
things
C.
It’s
wrong
of
you
to
do
things
D.
It’s
helpful
of
you
to
do
things二、完形填空（共12分，每小题1分）阅读下面短文，从短文后各题所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出最佳选项。Last
Friday,
after
doing
all
the
family
shopping
in
the
town.
I
wanted
to
have
a
rest
before
catching
the
rain.
I
19
a
newspaper
and
some
chocolate
and
went
into
the
station
coffee
shop.
It
was
a
cheap
self-service
place
with
long
tables
to
20
at.
I
put
my
heavy
bag
down
on
the
floor,
21
the
newspaper
and
the
chocolate
on
the
table
and
then
went
to
get
a
cup
of
coffee.When
I
came
back
with
the
coffee,
There
was
someone
22
in
the
next
seat.
23
was
a
boy,
with
dark
glasses
and
old
clothes,
and
24
bright
red
at
the
front.
He
had
started
to
eat
my
chocolate!Naturally,
I
was
rather
uneasy
about
him,
but
I
didn't
want
to
have
any
25
.
I
just
read
the
newspaper,
tasted
my
coffee
and
took
a
bit
of
chocolate.
The
boy
looked
at
me
in
surprise.
Then
he
took
a
26
piece
of
my
chocolate.
I
could
hardly
believe
it.
Still
I
didn't
say
anything
to
him.
When
he
took
a
third
piece,
I
felt
more
angry
than
uneasy.
I
thought,
"Well,
I
shall
have
the
last
piece."
And
I
got
it.The
boy
gave
me
a
strange
look,
then
27
up.
As
he
left,
he
shouted
out,
"There's
something
28
with
that
woman!"
Everyone
looked
at
me,
but
I
didn't
want
to
quarrel
with
the
boy,
so
I
kept
quiet.
I
did
not
realize
that
I
had
29
a
mistake
until
I
finished
my
coffee
and
was
ready
to
30
.
My
face
turned
red
when
I
saw
my
unopened
chocolate
under
the
newspaper.
The
chocolate
that
I
had
been
eating
was
the
boy's!(
)
19.
A.
stole
B.
bought
C.
sold
D.
wrote(
)
20.
A.
sit
B.
seat
C.
lie
D.
laugh(
)
21.
A.
pushed
B.
took
C.
put
D.
pulled(
)
22.
A.
jumping
B.
playing
C.
sitting
D.
sleeping(
)
23.
A.
He
B.
It
C.
Who
D.
What(
)
24.
A.
cut
B.
washed
C.
covered
D.
colored(
)
25.
A.
coffee
B.
trouble
C.
chocolate
D.
matter(
)
26.
A.
first
B.
second
C.
very
D.
last(
)
27.
A.
stood
B.
took
C.
cried
D.
looked(
)
28.
A.
strange
B.
wrong
C.
OK
D.
funny(
)
29.
A.
spelt
B.
corrected
C.
made
D.
found(
)
30.
A.
finish
B.
leave
C.
jump
D.
shop三、阅读理解（共26分，每小题2分）阅读下面短文，从短文后各题所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出最佳选项。(A)Millie
was
in
a
street
in
London.
The
sky
was
dark.
This
was
Mary’s
big
day—her
first
day
England.Millie
got
out
of
a
taxi.
The
driver
carried
a
very
heavy
bag
for
her.
They
walked
through
the
rain
to
the
front
door
of
a
big
house.
A
small
girl
opened
the
door.
She
was
about
four
years
old.
Her
brother
stood
behind
her.
He
was
only
two
years
old.
Then
a
young
woman
came
to
the
door.
“Welcome
to
London!”
she
said
and
she
gave
Millie
her
hand.
“These
are
my
two
children,
Mary
and
Tom.”“Glad
to
meet
you,
Mrs.
Bright!”
said
Millie
with
a
strong
French
accent
(口音).The
two
children
ran
into
the
living
room.“Don’t
worry
about
them!
They
are
a
little
shy.
And
please
call
me
Jenny!
Now
let
me
show
you
around
your
room
and
then
we
can
have
a
nice
cup
of
tea.
Or
would
you
like
some
coffee ”“This
is
your
bedroom.
You
can
enjoy
the
view
of
the
Green
Park
and
here’s
a
desk
where
you
can
study.
The
bathroom
and
toilet
are
just
opposite
you
door.
Mow
I’ll
go
and
put
the
kettle
on.”In
England,
we
use
a
kettle
to
make
hot
water.
We
can
then
put
the
hot
water
in
a
teapot
or
use
it
to
make
coffee.”Millie
was
happy
with
her
new
home,
but
she
was
a
little
puzzled.
Perhaps
her
mother
was
right.
The
British
people
are
quite
different.
They
didn’t
kiss
when
they
met
each
other
and
they
lived
on
large
old
houses.
Their
favorite
drink
was
tea
and
they
used
strange
kettle
to
make
the
water
hot.
What
was
she
going
to
say
to
Mary
and
Tom
How
could
he
make
friends
with
the
two
shy
children
(
)
31.
Where
did
Millie
possibly
come
from
A.
England
B.
Japan
C.
The
USA
D.
France(
)
32.
Who
was
Millie’s
host
A.
Mary
Bright
B.
Tom
Bright
C.
Jenny
Bright
D.
Millie
Bright(
)
33.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“kettle”
mean
A.
茶杯
B.
烧开水的壶
C.
煮咖啡的壶
D.
热水瓶(
)
34.
What
can
we
learn
from
the
passage
A.
Millie
had
some
trouble
living
in
England.
B.
The
two
children
did
not
like
Millie.
C.
Mr.
Bright
helped
Mary
a
lot.
D.
Millie
could
not
understand
some
of
their
customs
(习俗).(B)How
would
we
travel
without
maps
It
would
be
a
bit
adventurous
(冒险的)
to
set
off
from
Oxford
University
to
go
to
London
Bridge
if
there
was
not
a
map
of
the
London
Underground
at
each
station.
In
fact,
a
lot
of
the
early
map—makers
were
explorers
(探险家),
especially
in
the
15th
and
16th
centuries.So
what
did
people
do
before
there
were
maps
Well,
it
was
quite
easy
to
use
natural
signs
like
mountains
and
rivers
if
you
were
travelling
on
foot
or
riding
a
horse.
People
took
small
boats
down
rivers
and
followed
coastlines
(海岸线).
And
people
world
use
time,
not
distance
(距离),
to
measure
the
way
they
went;
the
next
village
was
a
three—hour
ride,
for
example.
In
fact,
in
the
early
maps,
people
did
not
draw
marks.
They
drew
stars.
It
was
very
easy
to
the
night
sky
and
use
it
for
navigation
(航行).
The
sky
was
a
lot
clearer
before
the
light
pollution
from
cities
appeared.
When
towns
and
cities
were
built,
people
drew
maps
road
maps
which
gave
distances
and
directions.
The
London
Underground
was
opened
in
1863
and
it
also
used
a
road
map
style.
But
a
man
called
Henry
Beck
realized
that
travelling
by
train
was
not
the
same
as
driving
your
car
across
London.
Passengers
only
needed
to
know
which
stations
to
change.
His
new
design
for
the
Underground
map
was
not
very
popular
with
the
train
companies
at
first.
But
the
passengers
loved
it
and
700,000
copies
were
printed
in
1933.
These
days,
of
course,
you
can
ride
a
bike,
drive
a
car
or
go
through
a
forest
and
know
where
you
are
exactly
with
a
GPS.
It’s
really
difficult
to
get
lost!(
)
35.
When
did
road
maps
come
out
A.
Around
15th
and
16th
centuries.
B.
When
people
began
to
travel
by
train.
C.
When
people
began
to
travel
by
sea.
D.
When
cities
and
towns
were
built.(
)
36.
Which
of
the
following
is
TRUE GPS
helped
people
to
travel
long
time
ago.Ancient
(古代的)
people
could
travel
on
a
horse
without
maps.
The
sky
was
polluted
by
light
before
cities
were
built.Henry
Beck’s
map
was
not
popular
with
passengers.
(
)
37.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“measure”
mean
in
Chinese
A.
描述
B.
计划
C.
测量
D.
准备(
)
38.
What
is
the
main
idea
of
the
passage
A.
Maps
have
a
long
history.
B.
We
never
get
lost
these
days.
C.
We
can’t
travel
with
maps.
D.
Henry
Beck
designed
a
new
map.
(C)Our
environment
is
getting
worse
and
worse
with
the
increase
(增长)
of
the
world
population
(人口),
which
affects
the
environment
in
two
days.
Firstly,
the
limited
energy
resources
(资源)
will
be
used
up
mach
faster.
Secondly,
the
increasing
population
creates
more
pollution,
another
serious
problem
that
needs
to
be
solved.
Both
problems
are
long-term
ones
because
actions
taken
now
show
their
result
slowly
over
many
years.
They
are
also
urgent
(严重的)
because
delays
in
action
can
lead
to
great
suffering
(痛苦)
and
social
problems.
The
question
seems
to
be
difficult
to
do
with
for
most
people.
However,
a
person
can
be
protector
of
environment
in
everyday
life
if
he
takes
actions
to
save
the
environment
right
now.
With
the
development
of
technology,
cars
make
the
transport
easier
and
quicker
than
before,
but
we
can’t
ignore
(忽视)
the
disadvantages
brought
to
us
by
more
and
more
cars
in
use.
For
example,
we
are
consuming
(消耗)
gasoline,
which
is
a
non-renewable
resources,
and
will
soon
be
gone.
Moreover,
the
exhausted
gas
(排放的气体)
from
cars
pollutes
our
air,
and
our
health
is
therefore
threatened
by
air
pollution,
which
has
a
big
potential
effect
on
our
daily
life.
So
we
can
take
a
walking,
take
buses,
carpool
(合用汽车)
instead
of
driving
cars
alone.
This
seems
to
be
a
very
slow
process
that
can’t
be
so
effective
if
a
single
person
takes
it.
but,
when
more
and
more
people
understand
the
importance
and
positively
take
it
as
personal
responsibilities,
the
condition
of
the
air
will
be
improved
to
a
great
extent
(显著).
(
)
39.
According
to
the
writer,
the
main
problem
to
our
environment
today
is
________.
A.
the
increase
of
population
B.
the
limited
energy
resources
C.
the
more
serious
air
pollution
D.
the
development
of
technology.
(
)
40.
From
the
passage,
we
can
know
that
___________________.
A.
the
government
mainly
can
take
effective
actions
B.
taking
actions
now
can
soon
improve
the
environment
C.
immediate
(及时的)
actions
can
cause
great
suffering
and
social
problems
D.
every
single
person’s
actions
has
some
effect
on
the
environment
protection(
)
41.
The
writer’s
main
purpose
in
writing
this
passage
is
most
probably
to
_________.
A.
complain
about
(抱怨)
people’s
slow
actions
to
protect
the
environment
B.
advice
people
to
take
actions
to
protect
the
environment
C.
show
himself
to
be
an
active
environment
protector
D.
point
our
the
bad
effects
of
the
technologies
in
protecting
environment(
)
42.
Because
of
the
serious
pollution,
people
had
better
________________.
A.
take
a
walking
B.
take
buses
C.
carpool
D.
all
of
the
above(
)
43.
The
passage
is
mainly
about
___________________.
A.
energy
resources
saving
B.
environment
protection
C.
population
control
D.
air
pollution四、阅读表达（共5分，每小题1分）阅读下面短文，并根据所读短文内容在文章后的空格里填入一个最恰当的单词。Are
you
bored
with
your
daily
life
Here
are
some
things
you
should
try
before
you
are
18,
because
after
that
it’s
too
late.
Learn
to
swimSeriously,
this
is
so
important
that
it
can
save
your
life.
If
you
can’t
swim
well,
you
won’t
be
able
to
do
water
sports
like
waterskiing,
surfing
and
diving.
Even
taking
a
boat
trip
will
be
dangerous
for
you.
Make
sure
you
do
it.
Try
at
least
one
kind
of
team
sportBeing
a
good
team
player
is
an
important
skill
in
life.
You
can’t
just
think
of
yourself,
but
to
work
well
with
other
people.
Other
advantages
of
team
sports
like
basketball,
football
and
baseball
are
that
they
keep
you
fit,
and
they
are
also
great
fun.
Teams
usually
have
a
good
social
life
too—you’ll
go
to
lots
of
parties
and
make
many
friends.
Collect
somethingOne
of
the
best
hobbies
for
under—18s
is
collecting
things.
You
could
collect
kinds
of
stamps,
you
could
collect
things
that
you
remember
what
you
have
done,
like
cinema
tickets
for
films
you
have
seen
or
emails
from
friends.
The
best
way
to
collect
is
to
have
a
special
album
to
put
your
collection
in
and
write
what
each
thing
means
to
you.
That
way
you
won’t
forget.Some
things
you
should
try
before
you
are
18Learn
to
swimLearning
to
swim
can
(44)
_________
your
life.
You
can
also
enjoy
yourself
when
doing
water
sports.Try
at
least
one
kind
of
team
sportTeam
sports
can
let
you
know
how
to
work
with
others
and
keep
you
(45)
_________.
You
can
also
have
fun
and
make
many(46)
________.
Collect
something(47)
________
things
is
a
good
hobby.
It
can
make
you
(48)
_________
things
well.
44.
_________;
45.
__________;
46.
_________;
47.
__________;
48.
__________五、词汇（共10分，每小题1分）。A）根据句子意思，用括号中所给词的正确形式填空，每空填一词。49.
The
__________
(survive)
in
the
natural
disaster
are
in
great
need
of
help.
50.
Most
of
the
food
for
the
homeless
is
provided
by
voluntary
__________
(organize).
51.
The
12th
Special
Olympics
World
Games
were
_________
(success)
held
in
Shanghai
in
2007.52.
Can
Mr.
Smith
helps
us
with
soccer
________
(train)
We’ll
have
a
match
soon.
53.
Please
tell
me
the
__________
(athlete)
telephone
numbers.
I
want
to
interview
them
some
day.
B）根据句意及汉语提示，写出各单词的正确形式，每空填一词。54.
Would
you
like
to
go
to
_______
(西北的)
China
to
teach
poor
children
as
a
volunteer.55.
This
company
need
some
people
with
business
___________
(背景).56.
You
can
get
the
_________
(奖赏)
by
calling
our
hotline
next
week.57.
We
all
_________
(期待)
him
to
come
soon
so
that
we
could
finish
all
the
work
earlier.58.
They
studied
the
_________
(项目)
very
carefully
to
save
more
money.
六、用括号内所给动词的正确形式填空（共5分，每小题1分）。59.
Although
he
has
something
wrong
with
her
hearing,
but
he
never
gives
up
________
(learn)
another
foreign
languages.
60.
Teachers
found
it
important
_______
(give)
them
chances
to
learning
by
themselves.61.
As
we
know
that
__________
(help)
others
will
make
us
live
happily.
62.
Do
you
have
any
trouble
_________
(win)
the
game
If
so,
I’d
like
to
give
you
a
hand.63.
His
teachers
warned
the
students
________
(not
stay)
up
too
late
close
to
the
exams.七、根据所给中文完成句子（共9分，每小题1.5分）。64.
对李海来说，最重要的事不是夺取金牌或银牌，而是参与。
To
Li
Hai,
the
most
important
thing
___________________________________.65.
他们用这种方式可以帮助提高当地人的生活质量。
_______________,
they
can
help
____________________________.66.
我们可以将零花钱节省下来捐给那些贫穷的人。
We
can
_________________________________________
in
need.67.
他妈妈需要尽快手术，不然的话，她可能会失去生命。
His
mother
needs
to
_______________________.
Otherwise,
she
may
__________.68.
这位男孩天生有智力有缺陷，但是他从来没有失去信心。
This
boy
____________________________________,
but
he
never
loses
his
heart.69.
这些志愿者们在执行任务前必须接受培训。
It’s
necessary
__________________________________________________.
八、书面表达（共一题，计15分）。假如你是学生会主席吴非凡，号召同学们为李俊的妈妈踊跃捐款。李俊是一中的学生，平时学习刻苦，成绩优秀，今年14岁。他的爸爸是位工人，妈妈没有工作。他家境贫寒。现在她妈妈患病住院，需要手术。希望大家踊跃捐款，这样他妈妈就可以接受手术（手术费月十五万元），很快恢复健康。要求：1、不能逐条翻译所给信息，可以适当增减内容；2、短文中不得出现你的真实地名、人名和校名；3、词数90字左右。文章开头与结尾已经给出，但不计入总字数。Give
a
helping
handDear
all.
A
student
from
Number
One
Middle
School
needs
our
help!
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Thanks
a
lot
for
your
help!Wu
Feifan
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“using
it’s
adj.
for
sb
+to
do
sth,”skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
help
the
students
have
a
deep
understanding
of
the
present
perfect
tense
.2.
To
help
the
students
understand
the
differences
between
‘have
/
has
been’
&
‘have
/
has
gone’
,
and
make
sure
they
can
use
them
correctly
in
correct
context
.3.
To
teach
the
students
know
how
to
use
verbs
with
‘for’/
‘since’
correctly
,
and
help
them
know
the
differences
between
short
action
and
long
action
.
4.
To
help
the
students
use
the
present
perfect
tense
with
long
action
and
short
action
,
and
make
sure
they
can
transform
this
two
kinds
of
verbs
while
using
the
present
perfect
tense
.过程与方法：To
understand
the
verbs
with
‘for’,
‘since’
or
‘ago’情感态度与价值观：To
use
the
present
perfect
tense
in
the
daily
life
教学重点难点
1.the
differences
between
“have/has
been
to…
,have/has
gone
to
…”2.the
usage
of
“since
,for
,ago.”
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Review
Fill
in
the
blanks.The
old
man
_______
(live)
here
since
1992._____
you
_______(visit)
our
factory
yet 3.
I
__________
(not
see)
you
for
a
long
time.
You
___________
(change)
a
lot.4.
I’m
afraid
I
__________
(keep)
you
waiting
for
such
a
long
time.5.
He
__________
(know)
the
city
since
he
was
very
young.Step
2
Study
Grammar
A:
Using
have/has
been
和
have/has
gone
We
use
have/has
been
to
express
the
idea
that
someone
went
to
a
place
and
has
already
come
back.
It
refers
to
an
experience.e.g.
Mille
and
Amy
have
been
to
South
Hill.
They
want
to
go
there
again.
Sandy
has
never
been
to
South
Hill.
She
wants
to
go
with
them.We
use
have/has
gone
to
express
the
idea
that
someone
went
to
a
place
but
has
not
yet
returned.e.g.
Kitty
and
her
family
have
gone
to
Hong
Kong.
They
will
come
back
next
week.
Suzy
is
not
at
home
at
the
moment.
She
has
gone
to
the
bookshop.Step
3
Summary
have/has
been和have/has
gone的区别Step
4
PracticeFinish
the
exercises
on
pages
26
&
27.A1
The
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
are
talking
about
their
classmates
and
families.
Help
them
complete
the
sentences
with
have/has
been
or
have/has
gone.1.
Millie
isn’t
here.
She
_________
to
the
library.2.
Peter
and
Simon
____
just
_____
to
the
library.
They
borrowed
some
interesting
books.3.
My
cousin
__________
to
Xi’an
twice.4.
My
parents
__________
to
Xi’an
and
they’ll
stay
there
for
a
week.5.
Daniel
won’t
be
with
us
at
the
party.
He
_________
to
Shanghai.A2.
Daniel
and
Millie
are
chatting.
Complete
their
conversation.
Use
the
correct
forms
of
the
verbs
in
brackets.Daniel:
I
haven’t
seen
Mr
Wu
for
days.
Where
____
he
_____(go)
Millie:
He
__________
(go)
to
Tianjin
to
attend
a
meeting.Daniel:
_____
you
_____
(be)
anywhere
recently Millie:
Yes,
I
__________
to
Hainan
with
my
parents.Daniel:
Oh,
that’s
great!
______
you
______
to
Sanya Millie:
Sure,
we
_________(be)
to
the
beach
there.
Look
at
these
photos.Daniel:
The
beach
is
beautiful.
I
see
Andy
playing
on
the
sand
too.Millie:
Yes,
We
went
there
with
his
family.Daniel:
I
see.
By
the
way,
shall
we
invite
Andy
to
go
for
a
picnic
tomorrow Millie:
Andy
isn’t
here
this
weekend.
He
and
his
parents
__________(go)
to
countryside.
They’ll
be
back
tomorrow
afternoon.Step
5
Study
Grammar
B:
Verbs
with
for
and
sinceWe
use
for
when
we
talk
about
a
period
of
time,
and
we
use
since
when
we
talk
about
a
time
point
in
the
past.e.g.
Mr
Dong
has
lived
here
for
many
years.
Mr
Dong
has
lived
her
since
he
was
born.Some
verbs,
such
as
come,
go,
buy
and
leave,
can
be
used
in
the
present
perfect
sense,
but
they
cannot
be
used
with
for
or
since
in
positive
statements.
Step
6
Summary
since和for的区别e.g.
He
has
lived
here
for
16
years.
他住在这里有十六年了。He
has
lived
here
since
16
years
ago.
他从十六年前起就住在这里了。He
has
lived
here
since
1991.
他从1990年起就住在这里了。He
has
lived
here
since
he
was
born.
他从出生起就住在这里。If
we
want
to
express
a
continuous
state,
we
can
use
another
way
like
this.VerbUsed
for
a
continuous
stateExamplebegin/starthave/has
been
onThe
film
has
been
on
for
20
minutes.finish/stophave/has
been
overThe
parade
has
been
over
for
e/go/arrivehave/has
been
in/atKitty
has
been
in
Hongkong
for
two
days.leavehave/has
been
awayShe
has
been
away
from
home
since
last
Tuesday.borrowhave/has
keptShe
has
kept
this
book
since
last
week.joinhave/has
been
inhave/has
been
a
member
ofSimon
has
been
a
member
of
the
Football
Club
since
last
year.marryhave/has
been
marriedThey
have
been
married
for
15
years.diehave/has
been
deadThe
fish
have
been
dead
for
some
time.Step
7
PracticeKitty
is
telling
Millie
about
her
holiday
in
Hong
Kong
on
the
phone.
Complete
what
she
says
with
the
correct
forms
of
the
verbs
in
brackets.My
parents
and
I
_________(arrive)
in
Hong
Kong
on
the
first
day
of
the
winter
holiday.
We
_________(be)
here
for
three
days.I
__________(borrow)
a
book
about
Hong
Kong
a
week
ago.
It’s
very
useful.
I
____
____
(keep)
it
with
me
for
a
few
days.
It
helps
me
learn
more
about
Hong
Kong.Now
it’s
noon
and
we’re
in
Ocean
Park.
The
first
dolphin
show
______(begin)
at
11:30
a.m.
It
________(be)
on
for
about
half
an
hour.
The
show
is
really
exciting.Homework1.
Revise
the
contents
in
grammar
items
in
this
unit
.2.
Finish
the
exercises
in
period
4
in
workbook
.
Complete
the
exercises.To
master
the
differences
between
“have/has
been,
have/has
gone
”.Finish
the
exercises
on
pages
26
&
27.Check
the
answers
together.To
learn
the
usage
of
“verbs
with
for
and
since.”Master
the
usage
“verbs
with
since
and
for.”Pay
attention
to
the
long
verbs
and
short
plete
the
short
passage.Check
the
answers
together
in
class.
Check
out
the
home
work
and
preview.To
learn
the
usage
of
“have/has
been,have/has
gone.”through
some
examples.Pay
attention
to”
We
use
have/has
been
to
express
the
idea
that
someone
went
to
a
place
and
has
already
come
back.
It
refers
to
an
experience.
And
We
use
have/has
gone
to
express
the
idea
that
someone
went
to
a
place
but
has
not
yet
returned.”We
use
for
when
we
talk
about
a
period
of
time,
and
we
use
since
when
we
talk
about
a
time
point
in
the
pasTo
master
how
to
use
“since
and
for.”
课堂达标
一、用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。1.
Mr.Smith_____________
(be)
a
soldier
since
1978.2.
How
long
_________
you
________
(study)
in
this
school 3.
I
____________（lose）
my
bike,
so
I
have
to
walk
to
school.4.
He
is
not
here.
He
____________
to
the
cinema.
(
go)5.
I
won’t
go
to
the
cinema
tonight
because
I
____________
(see)
the
film.完成下面的练习1.My
parents
got
married
twenty
years
ago.
My
parents
________________________________
for
twenty
years.2.The
rain
stopped
five
minutes
ago.
The
rain
________________________
since
________________________.3.He
become
a
doctor
ten
years
ago.
He
___________________
a
doctor
________________________________.4.The
old
man
died
two
years
ago.
The
old
man
___________________________________________________.5.Ben
joined
the
Party
a
month
ago.
Ben
___________________________________________________________.
Ben____________________________________________________________.6.Tom
left
home
the
day
before
yesterday.
Tom
______________________home
_______________________________.
板书设计
8下
Unit
2
Travelling
GrammarHave/has
been
to
…
since:
1.since(conj.)+过去时态的从句
2.since(prep.)+段时间+agoHave/has
gone
to
open---be
open
buy---
have
die---
be
dead
begin---
be
on
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
about
further
comprehension
of
the
present
perfect
tense.
Ss
are
expected
not
only
to
grasp
the
grammar
items
but
also
to
apply
them
I
practical
passage
by
completing
the
conversation
in
PartA.
Part
B
is
designed
to
tell
the
usage
of
“ago,
for
and
since”.Ss
are
assigned
to
change
some
verbs
into
continuous
states
with
the
present
perfect
tense.Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
understand
the
differences
between
"It's
+
adj.
+to-infinitive",
"It's
+
adj.+
for...+to-infinitive"
and
"It's
+
adj.
+of...+to-infinitive"
.To
use
these
sentence
structures
to
make
sentences.过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
read
Grammar
on
page
84-85
by
themselves.2.to
get
the
Ss
to
say
out
the
patterns
in
Grammar
情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
consciousness
of
autonomous
learning
教学重点难点
How
to
use
these
sentence
structures
to
make
sentences.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
PresentationTeach
the
new
words.donate
vt.
捐献charity
n.
慈善，慈善机构organization
n.
机构，组织blood
n.
血Step
2
Lead
inAnswer
the
questions
about
the
reading
part.Is
it
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer Is
it
important
to
support
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games Yes.
It
is
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer.Yes.
It
is
important
to
support
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.Step
3
Grammar
explanationSection
A1.
Explain:
It
is
adjective
to-infinitiveIt
is
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer.
importantto
support
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.We
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
about
something.该句型中的形容词表示不定式所具备的特征或客观情况。如：cheap,
convenient,
dangerous,
difficult,
easy,
exciting,
expensive,
important,
interesting,
necessary,
normal,
possible,
useful,
wonderful。2.
Present
the
table
on
Page
84.Check
the
answers.It's
right
to
give
seats
to
the
elderly.It's
good
to
help
blind
people
cross
the
road.It's
helpful
to
donate
money
to
charities.It's
proper
to
take
care
of
a
lost
pet.It's
important
to
plant
more
trees.It's
necessary
to
keep
parks
clean.Homework:Do
some
exercises.Preview
next
part.
Learn
the
new
words
and
can
pronounce
them
correctly.Answer
the
questions
about
the
reading
part.Listen
to
the
teacher
carefully
and
master
the
Three
pattern
drills.Pay
attention
to
adjectives
in
these
sentences.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
get
the
Ss
to
say
out
the
three
pattern
drills
in
class
by
previewing.The
Ss
are
able
to
form
sentences
with
some
words
and
expressions
By
previewing.Pay
attention
to
using
different
adjectives
and
prepositions
“of
or
for”
in
different
pattern
drills.
课堂达标
一、词组翻译。1.
从事志愿者工作______________________
2.
给老人让座_______________________
3.
照顾一只被丢的宠物__________________
4.
保持公园洁净_____________________
5.
确保他们是安全的____________________
6.
与人交流有困难___________________7.
献血给有需要的人____________________
8.
在公共场所吸烟___________________9.
为慈善机构工作______________________
10.
没有志愿者的帮忙________________二.
用所给单词的适当形式填空。1.
Is
it
____________
(mean)
to
protect
the
environment 2.
It's
_________
(help)
of
him
to
help
the
old
woman
carry
the
basket.3.
It's
necessary
to
be
__________
(friend)
to
animals.4.
It's
careless
of
him
____________
(make)
so
many
mistakes.三、单项选择。(
)
1.
It
is
important
_______
people
________
learn
team
spirit.
A.
of;
of
B.
of;
to
C.
for;
to
D.
to;
to(
)
2.
_______
is
really
kind
________
him
to
help
the
blind
people
cross
the
road.
A.
This;
of
B.
It;
of
C.
This;
for
D.
It;
for(
)
3.
---What
do
you
think
of
tomorrow’s
football
match
---_________
difficult
for
us
_________
the
match.
A.
We’re;
to
win
B.
We’re;
winning
C.
It’s;
to
win
D.
It’s;
winning(
)
4.
It’s
so
brave
_______
the
soldier
to
save
the
boy’s
life.
A.
to
B.
of
C.
for
D.
at(
)
5.
It’s
dangerous
________
a
close
look
at
the
tiger
in
the
zoo.
A.
for
us
talking
B.
of
us
to
take
C.
of
us
taking
D.
for
us
to
take
A.
for;
for
B.
for;
with
C.
with;
for
D.
with;
with
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Grammar
1It
is
adjective
to-infinitiveIt
is
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer.
importantto
support
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.We
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
about
something.该句型中的形容词表示不定式所具备的特征或客观情况。如：cheap,
convenient,
dangerous,
difficult,
easy,
exciting,
expensive,
important,
interesting,
necessary,
normal,
possible,
useful,
wonderful。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
three
pattern
drills”
It’s
+adj.+to
do
sth.It’s
+adj.+
of
sb.+
to
do
sth
.it’s
+adj.
for
sb.+to
do
sth.”By
previewing
,
the
Ss
can
master
the
three
patterns.
Most
of
them
know
a
lot
about
them.
They
are
able
to
form
correct
sentences
with
some
words
and
expressions.but
they
make
some
mistake
for
“when
to
use
adj.
of
or
for”.
After
class,
they
practice
more
exercises.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、单项选择。(15分)1.
Ann
is
a
that
is
to
say,
she
comes
from
____________
.
A.
German;
Germany
B.
German;
German
C.
Germany;
German
D.
Germany;
Germany2.
All
the
boys
in
our
class
are
interested
in
________
football.
A.
play
B.
to
play
C.
plays
D.
playing3.
We
all
felt
_______
when
we
were
listening
to
the
talk.
A.
boring;
boring
B.
boring;
bored
C.
bored;
boring
D.
bored;
bored4.
Andy
doesn't
like
listening
to
music
and
I
don't
like
it,
__________
.
A.
too
B.
either
C.
also
D.
so5.
Jim
was
so
tired
that
he
_______
when
he
was
doing
his
homework.
A.
fell
sleep
B.
went
to
bed
C.
went
to
sleep
D.
slept6.
They
didn't
know
________
to
do
with
the
problem,
so
they
asked
their
teacher
for
help.
A.
how
B.
what
C.
which
D.
where7.
Daniel
taught
himself
__________
on
the
computer.
A.
how
to
search
for
information
B.
what
to
search
for
information
C.
when
search
for
information
D.
where
search
for
information8.
The
students
always
clean
up
their
classroom
before
__________
home.
A.
go
B.
to
do
C.
goes
D.
going9.
--Jim,
where
is
your
homework
You
must
________
now.
--Wait
for
a
moment,
Sir.
A.
hand
on
it
B.
hand
it
in
C.
hand
in
it
D.
hand
it
on10.
I
like
both
the
dresses,
and
I
don't
know
________
.
A.
where
to
choose
B.
which
to
choose
C.
to
choose
what
D.
what
to
choose11.
It's
raining
outside,
so
you
______
stay
here
until
it
stops.
A.
must
B.
have
to
C.
may
D.
can12.
--Must
I
return
the
book
this
week
--No,
you
__________
.
You
can
return
it
next
week.
A.
must
B.
need
C.
mustn't
D.
needn't13.
--Where
did
you
___________the
magazine
--From
the
school
library.
--How
long
can
you
____________
it
--For
two
weeks.
A.
lend;
borrow
B.
borrow;
lend
C.
borrow;
keep
D.
lend;
keep
14.
Never
refuse
___________
others
if
you
can
do
it.
A.
help
B.
to
help
C.
helping
D.
helps
15.
His
father
often
goes
fishing
inhis
________
time.
A.
no
B.
some
C.
spare
D.
enough二、完形填空。(15分)Dear
Jenny,
How's
it
going
Are
you
busy
with
your
study
these
days
I've
been
back
at
school
1
nearly
four
weeks.
I'm
very
glad
to
tell
you
that
great
___2
havetaken
place
in
our
school
this
term.
First
of
all,
we're
asked
to
"clear
our
plates"
when
having
ourmeals
and
say
_
3_
to
wasting.
Some
of
us
used
to
order
more
than
what
we
could
eat.
That
was
a
big
waste
of
food.
Now
we
need
to
4
the
food
we
order.
We
should
also
stop
wasting
in
some
otherways.
For
example,
we
should
turn
off
the
lights
when
we
5
the
classroom.
And
our
school
hasopened
up
some
fields
for
us
to
learn
how
to
grow
vegetables.
Each
class
has
a
small
garden
and
ourclass
has
decided
to
grow
some
tomatoes
and
beans
in
our
6
time.
I
think
that'll
be
very
interesting.
Maybe
I'll
be
able
to
7
you
some
beans
we've
grown
by
ourselves
next
time!
What'smore,
we
have
only
two
classes
in
the
afternoon
8
we
have
more
time
for
after-school
activities.
I'm
one
of
the
traffic
safety
volunteers
in
our
school.
After
school,
we
take
turns
to
go
to
the
streets
near
our
school
and
ask
people
to
9
the
traffic
rules.
I
think
we
are
having
a
different
school
life
now!
Please
write
back
soon
and
tell
10
more
about
your
school.
Yours,
Wang
Wei
1.
A.
in
B.
for
C.
on
D.
at
2.
A.
changes
B.
things
C.
interests
D.
lessons
3.
A.
yes
B.
hello
C.
no
D.
thanks
4.
A.
clean
B.
pay
C.
cook
D.
finish
5.
A.
leave
B.
reach
C.
open
D.
build
6.
A.
busy
B.
free
C.
happy
D.
sad
7.
A.
plant
B.
buy
C.
post
D.
lend
8.
A.
because
B.
when
C.
before
D.
so
9.
A.
follow
B.
make
C.
break
D.
think
10.
A.
him
B.
her
C.
you
D.
me三、阅读理解。（20分）A
A
good
reader
is
very
much
like
a
driver.
He
must
change
his
reading
speed
to
fit
his
purpose
(
目的
)
and
the
material
he
is
reading,
just
as
a
driver
does
fit
the
road
situation.
A
good
reader
may
beable
to
read
a
thousand
words
per
minute
(WPM),
but
he
won't
use
that
speed
for
everything
he
reads.A
good
reader
who
is
doing
research
(研究)
reading
in
the
library
may
read
at
the
speed
of
1,000
wordsper
minute
as
he
looks
for
materials
for
a
report.
But
once
he
finds
something
that
is
useful
to
him,
hemay
need
to
slow
down
to
100
WPM.
A
good
reader
may
read
newspaper
and
magazine
articles
at
600WPM.
But
it
may
take
him
150
WPM
to
read
his
science
or
Maths
text.
Just
as
a
driver
has
a
Widechange
of
speed,
so
does
a
good
reader.
1.
According
to
the
writer,
good
readers
can
_________
A.
read
at
1,000
WPM
B.
spend
more
time
reading
C.
change
the
speed
as
needed
D.
do
research
reading
2.
The
passage
tells
us
that
the
speed
of
reading
depends
on(取决于)
________
a.
the
number
of
books
b.
the
purpose
of
reading
c.
the
time
when
you're
reading
d.
the
material
that
you're
reading
e.
the
place
where
you're
reading
A.
a
and
b
B.
b
and
d
C.
b,
c
and
d
D.
c
and
e
3.
A
good
reader
may
use
the
highest
speed
of
reading
when
__________
A.
he
is
trying
to
find
materials
for
his
report
B.
he
is
trying
to
work
out
a
Maths
problem
C.
he
reads
the
material
most
useful
to
him
D.
he
is
reading
in
the
library
4.
The
passage
advises
that
a
good
driver
should
________
A.
be
able
to
drive
at
a
high
speed
B.
be
good
at
driving
on
a
country
road
C.
be
good
at
changing
driving
speed
D.
be
able
to
find
good
materials
5.
This
passage
is
mainly
about
________
A.
the
importance
of
having
different
reading
speed
B.
the
relationC~)
between
reading
and
driving
speed
C.
the
differences
between
driving
and
reading
D.
a
good
driver
who
likes
readingB
The
American
book
Who
Moved
My
Cheese
(奶酪)
has
been
a
best
seller
(畅销书)
all
over
theworld.
It
teaches
people
how
to
face
changes
in
their
lives.
It
is
just
for
teens.
The
book
tells
us
thatwhen
facing
change
in
our
life,
like
a
new
school
or
new
friends,
don't
be
afraid.
Use
this
change
tomake
a
better
life.
The
book
gives
an
example
of
a
change
at
school.
A
school
is
changing
from
having
two
terms
tothree
terms
because
there
are
too
many
students.
Several
teens
are
talking
about
this.
Most
of
them
areunhappy
and
worried.
But
Chris
is
not.
He
laughs
and
tells
a
story
about
two
mice,
two
"little
people"and
some
cheese.
In
the
story,
the
four
are
in
a
maze
(迷宫)
looking
for
the
cheese.
Here,
cheese
means
somethingimportant
in
life.
But
they
find
the
cheese
is
gone.
The
mice
realize
that
they
can't
change
what
hashappened
and
have
to
find
more
cheese.
This
means
finding
different
dreams.
The
little
people
can't
dothis.
They
are
afraid
of
changes
so
they
find
no
cheese.
After
Chris
finishes
the
story,
the
friends
understand
one
thing:
to
get
more
cheese,
move
in
a
newdirection
quickly.
His
friends
understand
how
this
can
be
used
in
the
changes
all
teens
face,
such
asdoing
well
at
school
or
feeling
good
about
yourself.
6.
The
book
Who
Moved
My
Cheese
wants
to
teach
us
.
A.
how
to
find
the
cheese
B.
how
to
face
changes
C.
how
to
make
a
better
life
D.
how
to
do
well
in
our
study
7.
From
the
story,
we
can
know
that
finding
more
cheese
means
__________
A.
finding
more
food
B.
finding
more
friends
C.
finding
different
dreams
D.
feeling
good
about
ourselves
8.
Why
does
Chris
tell
the
story
to
his
friends
A.
He
wants
to
help
his
friends
out.
B.
He
likes
telling
stories.
C.
His
friends
like
listening
to
stories.
D.
His
teacher
asks
him
to
do
so.
9.
What
does
cheese
stand
for
in
Chris's
story
A.
A
kind
of
food.
B.
A
job.
C.
Something
important.
D.
An
important
person.
10.
What
should
you
do
when
you
are
facing
a
problem
and
you
can't
change
it
A.
Feel
worried.
B.
Just
do
it
like
before.
C.
Try
to
change
it.
D.
Try
another
way
to
do
with
it.
四、词汇。（30分）A.从方框中选择适当的词完成句子。lift,
renew,
tiny,
against,
touchedI.
Unluckily,
the
ship
crashed
___________
the
iceberg
(冰山)
and
many
people
died.2.
Simon
is
strong
enough
to
____________
the
heavy
bag
easily.3.
You
must
____________
your
library,
books
if
you
can't
return
them
on
time.4.
The
sad
story
___________
us
deeply
and
many
of
us
cried
sadly.5.
--Can
you
see
the
holes
on
the
ground
They
are
the
ants'
homes.
--Yes.
They
are
amazing.B．用所给词的适当形式完成句子。6.
Lucy
is
from
America
but
she
can
speak
___________
(France)
well.7.
The
man
was
badly
hurt
in
the
accident.
He
was
__________
(able)
to
move.8.
The
farmer
is
(tie)
his
horse
to
the
tree.9.
Mo
Yah
is
one
of
the
greatest______________
(write)
in
the
world.10.
--Do
you
know
who
(ask)
for
help
when
you
are
in
trouble
--Yes.
My
mother.C．根掂汉语提示用单词的适当形式完成句子11.
--Could
you
give
me
some
_____________
(建议)
on
how
to
learn
English
well,
Mr
White
--OK.12.
My
uncle
has
driven
the
car
for
twenty
years,
so
he
has
much__________
(经验)
in
driving
safely.13.
Students
should
not
only
learn
____________(知识)
but
also
learn
how
to
be
a
human.14.
The
party
was
a
great
____________(成功).
Everyone
had
a
good
time.15.
Norman
Bethune,
a
________________
(加拿大的)
doctor,
was
an
international
hero.五、根据汉语完成句子。(10分)1.
There
are
________
_________
_________
__________
(一大群)
people
at
the
corner
of
the
street.
There
must
be
an
accident.2.
Your
hat
is
________
_________
_________
__________
(和
......同样大小)
mine.3.
When
hearing
the
thunder,
people
ran
_________
_______
________
they
(尽可能快)
to
find
the
shelter.4.
They
_______
________
_________
_________
(已经设法到达)
the
top
of
the
mountain
already.5.
(迄今为止),
people
________
_______
(已经翻译)
Harry
Potter
into
many
different
languages.
六、任务型阅读。(10分)Do
you
need
useful
and
interesting
books
Here
we
have
got
some
fi~r
you.
Best
Learners
This
book
can
give
you
the
answers
to
the
questions
most
often
asked
by
parents,
teachers
andstudents
themselves.
Read
this
book
and
learn:
What
the
three
difficulties
in
study
are
and
how
to
solve(解决)
them.
What
to
do
if
you
don't
have
an
interest
in
a
subject
you
are
studying.
Twenty-six
simple
exercises
to
help
you
study
easily
and
fast.
You
will
get
more
from
this
book.
For
younger
students,
you
can
buy
Learn
to
Study
for
Beginners.It
is
easier
to
understand.
How
to
Keep
Pets
A
pet
can
be
our
best
friend.
Do
you
have
pets
in
your
house
Are
they
in
good
shape
This
book
not
only
offers
you
many
colorful
pictures
of
lovely
pets,
but
also
provides
you
with
the
knowledge
about:
How
to
choose
right
pets
for
yourself.
How
to
build
houses
or
nests(巢)
for
your
pets.
How
to
feed
the
pets
and
how
to
keep
them
clean.
Buy
this
book
and
you
will
learn
more.
We
have
many
other
books
on
sale.
For
more
information,
please
visit
21世纪教育网
knowbetter,
com.
If
youbuy
two
or
more
books
at
a
time,
you
will
get
10%
off.
Best
LearnersWhat're
the
three
difficuhies
in
study
and
what
to
1
_
with
them.what
to
do
if
you
aren't
_2
in
a
subject
you
are
studying.If
you
finish
the
26
simple
exercises,
)'on
can
study
_3
and
fast.The
book.
Learn
to
Study
for
Beginners
is
better
for
4
students
to
read.How
to
Keep
PetsIt
can
provide
a
lot
of
knoMedge
about
pets
_5
you.How
to
6
right
pets
for
yourself.How
lo
make
a
_
7
_
for
your
pets.How
to
_
8
after
your
pets
well.We
also
_9
many
other
books.
If
you
10
more
information,
you
can
go
to
our
website.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“
Question
words+to
–infinitives
and
must
and
have
to
”skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
master
the
important
new
words
and
phrases;2.
obtain
the
information
of
the
changes
in
Starlight
town3.
complete
the
diary
entry
about
Starlight
Town
教学重点
1.New
words
and
phrases:
environment,
condition2.New
structures:
The
Internet
makes
communication
much
easier
教学难点
1.
To
obtain
the
key
information
from
listening.2.
To
talk
about
past
and
present
about
students’
friends
and
themselves
教学方法
Improve
the
listening
skills
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step
1
Lead-inStep2
Pre-listeningStep3
While-listeningStep4
Post-listeningStep5
PresentationStep6ListeningStep7
Practice
Preview
the
new
words
and
phrases
before
class.Free
talk
before
class.Check
the
preview.Look
at
the
pictures
on
the
screen
and
talk
about
them.After
listening
to
the
teacher’s
explanation,
try
to
retell
these
key
sentences.Finish
Part
A1
&
Part
A2
on
P
15.Do
exercises
of
A3
on
P16.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.After
answering
the
questions,
the
students
discuss
in
groups
and
show
their
performances.
1.
Free
talk1.
Look
and
say2.
Read
and
guess3.
Listening
tips1.
Listen
and
complete
Part
A1
2.Listen
and
complete
Part
A2
Read
Part
A2
and
guess
the
missing
words.Listen
to
the
recording
and
fill
in
the
blanks.
1.
Describe
changes
in
Starlight
Town2.
Complete
the
diary
entry
3.
Complete
the
table
T:
Starlight
Town
has
changed
a
lot.Students
listen
to
Speak
up
and
answer
the
following
questions.1.
Read
the
conversation
in
different
ways2.
Ask
and
answer3.
Make
up
your
own
conversation
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
1.Find
more
changes
around
you.2.
Write
down
your
feeling
about
the
changes.3.
Finish
the
related
exercises
the
teacher
assigns.4.
Preview
Study
skills.
教学反思Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
understand
the
differences
between
"It's
+
adj.
+to-infinitive",
"It's
+
adj.+
for...+to-infinitive"
and
"It's
+
adj.
+of...+to-infinitive"
.To
use
these
sentence
structures
to
make
sentences.过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
read
Grammar
on
page
84-85
by
themselves.2.to
get
the
Ss
to
say
out
the
patterns
in
Grammar
情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
consciousness
of
autonomous
learning
教学重点难点
1.How
to
use
these
sentence
structures
to
make
sentences.2.It's
meaningful
for
us
to
do
something
for
people
who
need
help.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Explanation
We
can
add
for
someone
to
specify
who
we
are
talking
about.It
isadjectiveforsomeoneto-infinitiveIt
isimportantforpeopleto
learn
good
manners.difficultLi
Haito
win
the
competition.possibleherto
work
for
the
charity
on
Saturday.for引出逻辑主语2.
Present
the
table
on
Page
85.
Asking
about
the
volunteer
workSimon
is
a
volunteer
now.
He
works
for
people
with
intellectual
disabilities.
Amy
is
asking
him
about
his
work.
Complete
their
conversation
with
the
phrases
in
the
box.easy
for
people
fantastic
for
me
important
for
us
impossible
for
organizations
necessary
for
volunteers
wonderful
for
youAmy:
Why
do
you
want
to
be
a
volunteer Simon:
Because
any
help
would
mean
a
lot.
Many
organizations
provide
help
for
people
with
intellectual
disabilities,
but
it's
(1)
___________________
to
do
volunteers.Amy:
It’s
(2)
__________________
to
be
a
volunteer.
Do
you
need
experience Simon:
No.
It’s
not
(3)
____________________
to
have
any
experience,
but
it’s
very
(4)
______________
to
be
kind
and
friendly.Amy:
What
are
your
tasks Simon:
I’m
in
the
sports
group.
I
chat
with
them,
help
them
practise
and
make
sure
they’re
safe.
I
think
it’s
(5)
______________
to
work
with
these
special
people.Amy:
Do
you
have
any
trouble
talking
to
people
with
intellectual
disabilities Simon:
Yes,
a
little.
We
need
to
be
more
patient.
However,
it’s
very
(6)
with
them.3.Check
the
answers.Work
out
the
rule!We
can
use
_________________
(subject
pronouns,
object
pronouns)
after
for.Step
2
Presentation
1.
Explain
It's
kind
of
you
to
do
something
for
people
who
need
help.We
can
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
of
someone's
actions.
It
is
adjectiveofsomeoneto-infinitiveIt
iskindofthese
volunteersto
work
in
their
spare
time.bravehimto
take
part
in
the
competition.该句型中的形容词描述的是人的特征、品质等。如：brave,
careless,
clever,
foolish,
generous,
good,
helpful,
honest,
kind,
nice,
polite,
silly,
stupid,
wrong。
Present
the
table
on
Page
86.Good
or
bad Mr
Wu
wants
to
know
what
the
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
think
about
the
actions
below.
Help
them
organize
their
thoughts
by
rearranging
the
words
below
to
form
sentences.1)
carless/
the
tap/
the
boy/
to/it
is/running/leave/of
__________________________________2)
the
girl/it
is/bad/of/pick
flowers/in
the
park/to
___________________________________3)
wrong/it
is/of/drop
litter/to/the
people/
everywhere
____________________________________4)
of/kind/it
is/to/donate
blood/the
young
man/to
people
in
need
____________________________________5)
smoke/to/not
right/it
is/the
man/of
/in
public
places
____________________________________Check
the
answers.Step
3
Language
points1.
donate
...
to
...
捐……给……
donate
money
to
charities
给慈善机构捐钱
donate
blood
to
people
in
need
给有需要的人献血
e.g.
It's
kind
of
you
to
donate
these
clothes
to
Project
Hope.你把这些衣服捐给希望工程真善良。2.
experience
经验，经历
表示经验时是不可数名词，表示经历时是可数名词。e.g.
The
greatest
teacher
is
experience.
经验是最好的老师。Please
tell
us
your
experiences
in
America.请你告诉我们你在美洲的经历。3.
have
trouble
(in)
doing
sth.
做某事有麻烦e.g.
Do
you
have
trouble
in
learning
English
你在英语上有困难吗
相关短语：have
no
trouble
in
doing
sth
做某事没困难
have
some
trouble
in
doing
sth
在做……方面有困难Step
5
Summary1.
We
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
about
something.2.
We
can
add
for
someone
to
specify
who
we
are
talking
about.3.
We
can
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
of
someone's
actions.Step
6
HomeworkDo
some
exercises.Remember
some
useful
expressions.
Read
the
patterns
by
themselves.Present
the
table
on
Page
85.
Asking
about
the
volunteer
workCheck
the
answers.Pay
attention
to
the
rule.Listen
to
the
teacher’s
explanation
carefully.To
learn
to
use
the
pattern.
It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitiveForm
sentences
by
themselves
.Check
the
answers.To
learn
and
master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.Sum
up
the
two
patternsIt
is
+
adjective
+
to-infinitiveIt
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.First
read
the
reading
then
find
out
the
sentences,
including
“It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive”Then
the
teacher
tell
the
Ss
to
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
of
someone's
actions.Next
the
Ss
do
some
exercises
to
practice
the
pattern.
课堂达标
一、词汇运用。1.
It’s
helpful
_______________
money
to
the
poor
children.
(donate)2.
It’s
not
easy
for
_____________
to
finish
the
work
within
2
hours.
(he)3.
It’s
_____________
for
you
to
do
it
well
without
any
hard
work.
(possible)4.
If
you
are
interested
in
hiking
and
_____________
children,
don’t
miss
the
chance.
(help)5.
It’s
natural
for
old
people
______________
about
their
past
with
others
and
this
makes
them
feel
less
lonely.
(talk)二、词汇运用。1.
It
is
wrong
of
people
to
____________
litter
everywhere.
(丢)2.
The
police
are
talking
with
the
boy
in
the
well
and
make
sure
he’s
_____________.
(安全的)3.
Many
volunteers
donated
their
__________
to
help
injured
people
during
the
earthquake.
(血)
4.
You
know
our
help
______________
a
lot
to
the
homeless
people.
(mean)5.
Mary
has
trouble
______________
friends
with
strangers.
(make)6.
These
____________
have
done
a
lot
to
help
people
in
need.
(charity)7.
Do
you
know
WTO
is
an
international
_________________
(organize) 8.
It’s
____________
to
organize
a
charity
event
to
help
people
in
need.
(meaning)9.
---It’s
fun
____________
the
tree-planting
club.
(join)
---We
all
like
it.10.
I
like
listening
to
music
because
it
can
keep
me
__________.
(relax)
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Grammar
21.
We
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
about
something.2.
We
can
add
for
someone
to
specify
who
we
are
talking
about.3.
We
can
use
It
is
+
adjective
+
of...
+
to-infinitive
to
express
what
we
think
of
someone's
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
three
pattern
drills”
It’s
+adj.+to
do
sth.It’s
+adj.+
of
sb.+
to
do
sth
.it’s
+adj.
for
sb.+to
do
sth.”By
previewing
,
the
Ss
can
master
the
three
patterns.
Most
of
them
know
a
lot
about
them.
They
are
able
to
form
correct
sentences
with
some
words
and
expressions.but
they
make
some
mistake
for
“when
to
use
adj.
of
or
for”.
After
class,
they
practice
more
exercises.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
learn
some
information
about
going
green.2.
To
learn
how
to
write
a
script
on
how
to
go
green.过程与方法：1.discuss
how
to
go
green
in
groups.2.Read
Part
A
then
learn
some
simple
steps
to
take
.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
go
green
in
daily
life.
教学重点难点
1.
To
learn
some
information
about
going
green.2.
To
learn
how
to
write
a
script
on
how
to
go
green.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Presentation1.
Show
some
pictures
and
present
the
new
words:
simple,
step,
power.2.
Read
after
the
teacher.3.
Read
together.Step
2
Warming
upDiscuss:
How
can
we
go
green go
green
=
protect
the
environmentStep
3
BrainstormWhat
can
we
do
to
save
water What
can
we
do
to
save
power What
can
we
do
to
reduce
pollution Step
4
ReadingRead
Millie’s
notes
on
page
118
and
find
out:
What
can
we
do
to
save
water What
can
we
do
to
save
power What
can
we
do
to
reduce
pollution Which
else
can
we
do
to
live
a
green
life Step
5
Practice1.
Complete
Millie’s
script
on
page
119.2.
Check
the
answers.3.
Read
together.Step
6
Language
points
Here
are
some
simple
steps
to
take.
take
some
steps
采取一些措施
e.g.
We
should
take
some
simple
steps
to
save
water.
我们应该采取一些简单的措施来节约用水。Step
7
Writing
Show
some
pictures
about
protecting
environment.
Let
the
students
to
give
a
presentation
on
how
to
go
green.
Useful
expressions:1)
It
is
time
for
us
to
….2)
We
can
save
water
by
….3)
We
should
use/take
….4)
…
is
a
good
way
to
….5)
It
is
important
for
us
to
….6)
It
is
good
to
….7)
Moreover,
….
Step
8
ExercisesI.
用所给单词的适当形式填空。1.
The
waste
can
__________(separate)
into
different
groups
to
recycle.2.
Take
your
own
bags
when
__________
(shop).3.
You
should
do
more
exercise
and
watch
______
(little)
TV.4.
We
can
save
water
by
________
(take)
shorter
showers.5.
You
need
to
check
your
homework
after
finishing
_________
(write).II.
汉译英。1.
我们可以通过缩短淋浴时间来节约用水。2.
为了节约电力，当我们离开房间时应该把灯关掉。3.
好习惯能够帮助减少污染。4.
对我们来说养成环保的生活方式很重要。5.
遵循这些小步骤，你可以对地球产生大影响。6.
当电视和电脑不用时，我们应该关掉电源。Step
9
Homework1.
Finish
your
script.2.
Review
all
the
new
words
and
language
points
in
this
unit.
Learn
some
new
words
and
master
them.Answer
some
questions.Read
Millie’s
notes
on
page
118
and
find
out:
Complete
Millie’s
script
on
page
119.Master
some
useful
plete
the
exercises.Translate
the
sentences
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
the
preview.To
train
the
Ss
to
go
green
in
daily
life.To
get
the
Ss
to
go
over
PartA
and
learn
how
to
go
green.To
give
the
Ss
15
minutes
to
give
a
presentation
on
how
to
go
green.To
show
their
writings
in
front
then
the
teacher
give
a
judge.
课堂达标
Ⅱ.
根据中文意思或用所给动词的适当形式填空。1.
It’s
time
for
us
_______________
(go)
green.2.
Follow
these
small
steps,
and
you
can
make
a
big
________________
(different)
to
the
earth.3.
You
must
give
up
your
bad
_________________
(习惯).4.
We
should
do
more
exercise
and
watch
_______________
(little)
TV.5.
We
all
hope
to
live
in
a
________________
(noise)
environment.6.
_________________
(separate)
your
things
into
different
groups.7.
It’s
getting
hot.
Your
hair
needs
________________
(cut).8.
Everyone
_________________
(simple)
can’t
wait
for
the
summer
holiday.9.
A
war
_______________
(break)
out
and
many
people
______________
(kill)
in
1997.Ⅲ.
单项选择。(
)
1.
British
Prince
William(威廉王子)
and
Kate
_________
for
nearly
two
months.A.
married
B.
have
married
C.
have
been
married
D.
have
got
married(
)
2.
Today
is
Simon’s
birthday.
Among
those
_______
are
some
old
friends
of
mine.
A.
inviting
B.
invitations
C.
to
invite
D.
invited(
)
3.
Alice
_______
some
advice
on
how
to
improve
her
listening
skills,
and
she
gladly
accepted
Green’s.
A.
gave
B.
was
given
C.
gives
D.
is
given(
)
4.
You
can
_______
the
lights
to
find
the
small
needle.
A.
turn
up
B.
turn
down
C.
turn
off
D.
turn
on(
)
5.
Some
people
ride
bikes
to
work
to
reduce
_________
pollution.
A.
water
B.
air
C.
soil
D.
white
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Task1.Useful
expressions:1)
It
is
time
for
us
to
….2)
We
can
save
water
by
….3)
We
should
use/take
….4)
…
is
a
good
way
to
….5)
It
is
important
for
us
to
….6)
It
is
good
to
….7)
Moreover,
….
2.
Language
points
Here
are
some
simple
steps
to
take.
take
some
steps
采取一些措施
e.g.
We
should
take
some
simple
steps
to
save
water.
我们应该采取一些简单的措施来节约
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
train
the
Ss
how
to
go
green
and
give
a
presentation
on
how
to
go
green
.first
get
the
Ss
to
read
the
four
steps
to
take
,
then
the
Ss
master
some
useful
expressions
,after
class,
the
Ss
know
how
to
go
green.
Through
the
period,the
Ss’
writing
abilities
can
be
trained.Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
grasp
some
basic
skills
of
Listening.To
talk
with
partners
about
the
topic
in
Speak
up.过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
listening
to
the
material
carefully.2.to
finish
some
proper
contents.情感态度与价值观：
To
train
the
Ss
to
help
people
in
need
in
our
daily
lives.
教学重点难点
1.
How
to
grasp
some
basic
skills
of
Listening.2.How
to
talk
with
partners
about
the
topic
in
Speak
up.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step1.
Lead-in
Ask
and
discuss：
1.
What
can
you
see
in
the
pictures 2.
What
can
we
do
to
help
those
students 3.
Have
you
or
your
family
ever
been
a
volunteer
How
was
it Step2.
ListenⅠ
1.
Listen
to
a
conversation
and
finish
Part
A1.2.
Check
the
answers
and
work
in
pairs.Step3.
Listening
II1.
Ask
students
to
guess:
What’s
school
like
What’ll
Judy
do
at
the
school
2.
Listen
to
the
tape
twice
and
finish
A2.3.
Complete
A3
with
the
information
in
Parts
A1
and
A2.Step4.
Speak
up1.
Work
in
groups.How
can
we
help
people
in
our
daily
life
2.
Listen
and
answer.
T:
How
many
ways
are
mentioned
in
the
dialogue How
can
we
help
homeless
people 3.
Read
the
dialogue
and
act
it
out.Step5.
HomeworkFinish
off
the
exercises.
Discuss
and
answer
some
questions.Listen
to
a
conversation
and
finish
Part
A1.
Check
the
answers
and
work
in
pairs.Listen
to
the
tape
twice
and
finish
A2.Complete
A3
with
the
information
in
Parts
A1
and
A2.Work
in
groups.Read
the
dialogue
and
act
it
out.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Discuss
“how
to
help
people
in
need.”
In
groups
and
answer
some
questions.Listen
to
the
listening
materials
then
finish
some
proper
exercises.
课堂达标
一、短语翻译。(请认真阅读课本P87
&
88，翻译并背诵下列重要短语)1.
在山区工作
2.
中国的西南方______________________3.
为了一个培训计划
4.
用这种方式
5.
在我们的日常生活中
6.
存零用钱
7.
把…捐给…
8.
把食物给无家可归的人
9.
对大学生来说做某事是有意义的
10.
在公交车上让位给年老的人
二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。1.
The
government
should
help
the
people
____________
their
living
conditions.
(改善)2.
It’s
____________
to
work
as
volunteers
at
community
centers.
(有意义的)3.
They
are
talking
about
an
animal
____________.
(课题)4.
There
is
an
apple
tree
in
the____________
of
our
new
school.
(西南)5.
I
don’t
know
you
live
in
the____________
of
the
city.
(西北)6.
____________
helps
us
learn
much
about
different
cultures.
(travel)7.
Listen
____________
when
you
are
in
class.
(care)8.
Helen
and
Lucy
keep
in
touch
by
____________
emails.
(write)9.
I
think
students
should
give
their
seats
on
the
bus
to
the
____________
(elder).10.
The
pollution
is
getting
worse.
We
need
to
take
action
____________
our
earth.
(protect)
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Integrated
skills
Ask
and
discuss：
1.
What
can
you
see
in
the
pictures 2.
What
can
we
do
to
help
those
students 3.
Have
you
or
your
family
ever
been
a
volunteer
How
was
it
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
train
the
Ss’
listening
abilities
by
listening
to
the
mateials.
then
get
the
Ss
to
complete
some
proper
contents.
By
learning
this
period
,the
Ss
are
educated
to
help
people
in
need
in
their
lives.
And
also
it
is
good
way
to
train
and
improve
the
Ss’
listening
ability.Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
get
more
detailed
information
about
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
2.
To
revise
and
expand
vocabulary
in
the
context
article
and
conservation.3.
To
reinforce
students’
ability
to
skim
text
for
overall
meaning
and
scan
for
details4.
To
encourage
the
students
to
try
to
help
the
others.过程与方法：to
get
the
Ss
read
the
article
by
themselves.To
ask
some
able
Ss
to
retell
the
article
with
some
key
words.3.
the
Ss
should
finish
some
tasks
one
by
one.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
know
more
about
and
carry
forward
the
spirits
of
the
Olympics
world
games.
教学重点难点
1.
To
get
more
detailed
information
about
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games..2.
To
analyze
the
sentences
for
the
students
to
get
a
better
understanding.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Revision1.
Ask
the
students
some
questions
to
revise
what
we
learned
yesterday.What
did
Liu
Ming
do
in
October
2007 He
volunteered
for
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
in
Shanghai.What
did
he
think
of
his
experience It
was
the
most
amazing
experience
of
his
life.What
are
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
for The
Special
Olympics
World
Games
give
children
and
adults
with
intellectual
disabilities
a
chance
to
show
their
skills
to
the
world
.What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games The
Games
include
many
events
similar
to
those
in
the
Olympics
,
such
as
basketball,
football
and
swimming.
How
many
people
gave
up
their
spare
time
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games Over
40,000
people.What
did
those
volunteers
do
for
the
Games They
provided
support
for
the
athletes
and
helped
make
the
event
a
great
success.2.
Check
yesterday's
plete
the
conversation
Part
B4
on
Page
83.A:
What
are
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
for S:
They
gave
and
with
intellectual
disabilities
a
to
show
their
skills
to
the
world..A:
Where
were
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Summer
Games
held S:
They
were
held
in
.A:
What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games S:
They
include
many
events
those
in
the
Olympics
Games,
such
as
basketball,
football
and
swimming.A:
Are
there
any
volunteers
for
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
S:
Yes,
They
get
to
help
those
special
realize
their
dreams.A:
Is
it
interesting
to
become
a
volunteer S:
Yes,
of
course.
Being
a
volunteer
for
such
an
is
often
an
amazing
.3.
Read
the
conversation
in
roles.Step
2
Language
pointsLiu
Ming
did
not
know
what
to
expect
when
he
volunteered
for
the….It
is
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer.volunteer
n.
志愿者vi.
自愿常见短语有：volunteer
for
sth/
volunteer
to
do
sth自动贡献，自愿效劳expect
1).
表示“期待”“期望”，通常为及物动词expect
sth。如：2).
后接动词时要用不定式，expect
to
do
sth如：3).
其后还可接不定式的复合结构expect
sb
to
do
sth。如：4).
不要认为
expect
只表示“期待”“期望”，它还可表示“预计”“预料”等
如：5).
其后可接
that
从句，若从句谓语为否定，注意否定的转移。如：similar
adj.相似的Step
3
Production1.
Talk
about
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.Say
“If
you
are
Liu
Ming,
please
talk
about
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games,
we
can
use
the
phrases
we
have
learned”
2.
Get
the
students
to
read
the
whole
report
together
loudly
again.3.
Work
in
pairs.
One
is
Liu
Ming,
the
other
is
a
reporter.Step
5
Homework1.
Finish
the
relative
exercises.2.
Preview
Grammar.
课堂达标
一
根据要求写单词。1.
I
didn’t
expect
him
_____________.
(come)2.
You
have
only
one
chance
left
___________
(try).3.
He
feels
__________________
than
before.
(confident)4.
This
is
_____________________
experience
in
his
life.
(exciting)5.
You
should
give
up
___________.
It’s
bad
for
your
health.
(smoke)6.
He
has
tried
three
times,
but
we
still
decide
to
give
him
a
fourth
c________.7.
Do
you
know
the
famous
film
star
__________
Jackie
Chan
(call)8.
It’s
very
meaningful
to
work
___________
with
the
workers.
(close)9.
Many
_______
__________
to
help
those
people
in
Ya’an
Earthquake.
(volunteer)10.
She
is
sure
________
the
swimming
competition.
(win)二、单项选择。(
)1.
You
are
supposed
to
smoking,
you
will
get
ill.
A.
go
on;
so
B.
give
up;
or
C.
stop;
so
D.
prevent;
and(
)2.
---What
will
they
do
---They
will
help
people
in
need.
A.
get
to
B.
get
up
C.
get
for
D.
get
into(
)3.
To
them,
the
most
important
thing
is
make
much
money
get
together.
A.
not
to;
but
B.
not;
but
C.
not;
but
to
D.
not
to;
but
to(
)4.
Su
Yang
was
very
excited
when
he
won
a
gold,
because
his
dream
at
last.
A.
came
up
B.
came
down
C.
came
true
D.
came
in
(
)5.
Some
people
offer
to
help
without
paid
for
events.
A.
getting
B.
to
get
C.
get
D.
to
getting三、句子翻译。1.
莉莉认为那是她一生中最令人惊奇的经历。
Lily
thinks
that
is
the
experiences
of
her
life.2.
这个活动给那些带有身体缺陷的儿童和成年人向世界展示他们自己的一个机会。
The
gives
children
and
adults
physical
a
chance
to
show
themselves
to
the
world.3.
对他们来说和那些专业人员亲密工作是很好的。
It
is
great
for
them
work
with
those
professional
works.4.
我们将要开始帮助他们实现他们的梦想。
We
to
help
them
their
dreams.
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Reading
2Liu
Ming
did
not
know
what
to
expect
when
he
volunteered
for
the….It
is
fantastic
to
work
as
a
volunteer.volunteer
n.
志愿者vi.
自愿常见短语有：volunteer
for
sth/
volunteer
to
do
sth自动贡献，自愿效劳expect
1).
表示“期待”“期望”，通常为及物动词expect
sth。如：2).
后接动词时要用不定式，expect
to
do
sth如：3).
其后还可接不定式的复合结构expect
sb
to
do
sth。如：4).
不要认为
expect
只表示“期待”“期望”，它还可表示“预计”“预料”等
例如：5).
其后可接
that
从句，若从句谓语为否定，注意否定的转移。如：to
those
in
the
…..
similar
adj.相似的常用短语有be
similar
to与...相似confident
adj.
自信的；确信的[
比较级
more
confident
最高级
most
confident
]
常用短语有:be
confident
of对...事有信心，确信...（指对某具体的事有信心。如：对学习数学有信心be
confident
of
studying
maths）
be
confident
in
在...方面有信心,在...领域有信心（指在某一个范围，方面有信心。如：在学习方面有信心be
confident
in
study）4.
You
get
to
help
them
achieve
their
dreams.achieve
vt.
取得；获得；实现；成功
achievement
n.
成就This
achievement
is
great.
这成就是伟大的。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）In
this
period
,teachers
should
teach
the
Ss
to
use
the
skimming
and
scanning
methods.Help
the
Ss
gain
the
general
in
formation
of
the
Special
Olympics
World
games.Also,
the
Ss
should
learn
and
master
the
usage
of
language
points
freely.Maybe
retelling
is
a
little
difficult
for
the
Ss,
but
it
is
really
a
good
way
to
train
the
Ss’
ability
of
using
English.the
teacher
can
give
them
some
key
words
and
encourage
them
to
do
it
well.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
Ⅰ.
单项选择
（每小题1分，共15分）(
)
1.—
Would
you
please
not
speak
so
loudly
in
public
—
Sorry.
I
will
remember
to
speak
in
lower
voice.
A.
the;
a
B.
/;
a
C.
the;
the
D.
/;
/(
)
2.
Which
of
the
following
signs
can
you
often
see
beside
a
lake
A.
B.
C.
D.
(
)
3.
—
Excuse
me,
sir.
But
you’re
my
way.
—
Sorry.
I
didn’t
know
you
were
passing
by.
A.
on
B.
by
C.
with
D.
in(
)
4.
The
of
new
inventions
should
be
to
make
life
easier,
not
to
make
it
harder.
A.
rules
B.
subjects
C.
secrets
D.
purposes(
)
5.
I
have
spent
on
this
job.
I
think
I
can
finish
it
this
afternoon.
A.
sometime;
sometime
B.
sometimes;
some
time
C.
some
time;
sometime
D.
some
times;
some
time(
)
6.
—
Boy,
didn’t
you
see
people
were
waiting
in
line
Don’t
in!
—
I
am
sorry,
sir.
A.
push
B.
pull
C.
put
D.
carry(
)
7.
Jim
always
keeps
the
tap
running
he
finishes
washing
his
face.
A.
since
B.
while
C.
as
D.
till(
)
8.
—
Sir,
please
put
out
your
cigarette
(香烟).
—
Sorry.
I
the
sign.
A.
don’t
notice
B.
didn’t
notice
C.
haven’t
noticed
D.
won’t
notice(
)
9.
Checking
your
answers
before
handing
in
your
paper
can
help
you
mistakes.
A.
make
B.
provide
C.
avoid
D.
advise(
)10.
You’d
better
fix
the
machine
I
have
told
you.
Otherwise,
you
may
make
more
problems.
A.
like
B.
with
C.
as
D.
follow(
)11.
Jack
is
always
to
wait
for
a
long
time
without
getting
angry.
A.
too
patient
B.
patient
enough
C.
enough
patient
D.
very
patient(
)12.
—
You’ve
spelt
the
word
wrong
again,
Judy.
—
Sorry.
Maybe
I
am
used
to
the
mistake
to
think
of
the
right
one.
A.
so
B.
very
C.
quite
D.
too(
)13.
—
Mum,
can
you
give
me
some
advice
on
how
to
behave
myself
at
the
table
—
Well,
I
do
have
some
advice.
,
please
keep
quiet
while
eating.
A.
In
all
B.
Of
all
C.
At
all
D.
Above
all(
)14.
—
Do
you
think
the
question
too
hard
—
I
don’t
think
so.
He
can
answer
it
easily.
A.
of
Jim
to
answer
B.
of
Jim
to
answer
it
C.
for
Jim
to
answer
D.
for
Jim
to
answer
it(
)15.
—
Mrs
Green.
Do
you
think
I
can
get
an
“A”
in
the
final
exam
if
I
start
working
hard
now
—
Of
course.
.
A.
Better
late
than
never
B.
Many
hands
make
light
work
C.
You
cannot
burn
the
candle
at
both
sides
D.
Actions
speak
louder
than
wordsⅡ.
完形填空
（每小题1分，共10分）Pearl
necklaces
(珍珠项链)
are
very
beautiful.
Can
you
believe
that
these
shining
pearls
16
a
kind
of
little
animal
named
oyster
The
animal
lives
in
a
shell
(壳),
deep
down
at
the
bottom
17
the
sea.
18
do
these
beautiful
pearls
form
(形成)
inside
an
oyster
A
grain
(颗粒)
of
sand
enters
an
oyster’s
shell.
This
makes
the
oyster
19
.
Just
as
20
some
dust
enters
your
eyes,
your
eyes
will
water
and
the
tears
(眼泪)
from
your
eyes
will
try
to
21
out
the
dust!But
when
a
grain
of
sand
enters
an
oyster’s
shell,
it
can’t
wash
it
out.
22
,
the
oyster’s
body
keeps
building
a
white
23
“coat”
around
the
annoying
sand.
The
coat
covers
the
sand
and
24
that
makes
a
pearl.Today
people
raise
pearls
on
a
pearl
farm.
They
25
the
oysters’
shells
softly
and
place
some
sand
inside
them.
When
a
pearl
is
made,
people
get
it
out
again.
(
)16.
A.
turn
into
B.
take
in
C.
get
married
D.
come
from(
)17.
A.
for
B.
of
C.
on
D.
over(
)18.
A.
How
B.
Where
C.
Why
D.
What
(
)19.
A.
happy
B.
shy
C.
upset
D.
silly(
)20.
A.
before
B.
when
C.
unless
D.
though(
)21.
A.
wash
B.
come
C.
pull
D.
throw
(
)22.
A.
Inside
B.
Perhaps
C.
Instead
D.
Besides(
)23.
A.
dirty
B.
serious
C.
shining
D.
dangerous
(
)24.
A.
typically
B.
recently
C.
suddenly
D.
finally(
)25.
A.
break
B.
open
C.
save
D.
protectⅢ.
阅读理解
（每小题2分，共20分）APerhaps
you’ve
seen
the
English
letters
“WC”
in
your
city.
They
show
public
toilets.
But
do
you
know
it
is
far
from
elegant
(优雅的)
English
In
fact,
foreigners
from
English-speaking
countries
rarely
use
the
letters.Workers
in
our
city
are
changing
“WC”
signs
all
over
the
city.
The
government
is
spending
much
money
changing
all
the
bad
English
on
signs
and
restaurant
menus.
Many
other
places
in
China
are
following
our
steps.“WC,
or
water
closet,
is
old-fashioned
English.
It
sounds
dirty
to
me,”
says
Charlie
Shifflet,
a
young
man
from
the
US.
The
old
sign
will
become
“Gents/Men”
and
“Ladies/Women”.“I
see
lots
of
poor
English
in
everyday
life,
and
not
only
on
signs,”
he
says.
“I
know
what
they
mean.
But
they
are
Chinglish,
not
real
English.
For
example,
when
someone
says
to
me
‘My
hometown
is
Henan
Province’,
I
know
he
should
say:
‘My
hometown
is
in
Henan
Province’.
‘Hometown’
is
a
smaller
place
in
a
province.”
The
common
mistakes
he
picked
up
include
“Not
Entry”,
which
should
be
“No
Entry”,
“Direction
of
Airport”
should
be
changed
to
“To
the
Airport”.
And
it
is
“room
rate”,
not
“room
price”.
And
remember
to
“Keep
off
the
grass”,
rather
than
“Care
of
the
green”.(
)26.
What
does
the
writer
think
of
the
use
of
“WC”
A.
He
doesn’t
think
it
means
water
closet.
B.
He
doesn’t
think
it
old-fashioned
English.
C.
He
doesn’t
think
it
proper
for
a
sign.
D.
He
thinks
it
elegant
English.
(
)27.
The
underlined
word
“rarely”
means
.
A.
sometimes
B.
seldom
C.
often
D.
always(
)28.
Charlie
Shifflet
.
A.
is
a
Chinese
living
in
America
B.
thinks
Chinese
people
are
sometimes
using
incorrect
English
C.
likes
to
hear
or
see
Chinglish
D.
sometimes
uses
Chinglish(
)29.
Which
of
the
following
signs
does
NOT
use
Chinglish
A.
B.
C.
D.
(
)30.
The
last
paragraph
is
about
.
A.
why
there
are
so
many
Chinglish
signs
B.
examples
of
Chinglish
C.
where
Chinglish
signs
are
D.
who
uses
Chinglish
signsBPeople
use
their
mouths
for
many
things.
In
the
English
language,
there
are
many
expressions
using
the
word
“mouth”.
But
some
of
them
are
not
so
nice.Sometimes,
people
say
something
to
a
friend
or
a
family
member.
Later
they
regret
because
it
hurts
that
person’s
feelings.
Or
they
tell
the
person
something
they
didn’t
mean
to
tell.
The
speaker
might
say:
“I
really
put
my
foot
in
my
mouth
this
time.”
Sometimes
when
one
person
is
speaking,
he
says
the
same
thing
that
his
friend
is
going
to
say.
When
this
happens,
the
friend
might
say:
“You
took
the
words
right
out
of
my
mouth!”
Sometimes
a
person
has
a
bad
or
sad
experience
with
another
person.
He
might
say
that
experience
“left
a
bad
taste
in
my
mouth.”
Or
the
person
possibly
has
a
very
frightening
(可怕的)
experience,
like
having
an
angry
dog
running
after
him.
He
might
say:
“I
had
my
heart
in
my
mouth.”Some
people
have
lots
of
money
because
they
were
born
into
a
very
rich
family.
You
might
say
the
person
“was
born
with
a
silver
spoon
(银勺)
in
his
mouth”.
He
is
the
opposite
of
a
person
living
from
“hand
to
mouth”.
This
person
is
very
poor
and
only
has
enough
money
for
the
most
important
things
in
life,
like
food.
(
)31.
The
underlined
word
“regret”
may
mean
.
A.
feel
sorry
B.
feel
excited
C.
feel
proud
D.
feel
surprised(
)32.
When
a
man
says
“I
had
my
heart
in
my
mouth”,
usually
he
means
he
was
.
A.
excited
B.
afraid
C.
surprised
D.
happy(
)33.
Your
best
friend
Tony
has
said
what
you
are
going
to
say,
you
might
say:
“ !”
A.
You
were
born
with
a
silver
spoon
in
your
mouth
B.
You
really
put
my
foot
in
my
mouth
C.
You
really
left
a
bad
taste
in
my
mouth
D.
You
took
the
words
right
out
of
my
mouth(
)34.
Tom
says
that
he
is
living
from
hand
to
mouth.
He
means
he
is
living
a(n)
life.
A.
busy
B.
hard
C.
easy
D.
rich(
)35.
Which
of
the
following
might
be
the
best
title
for
this
passage
A.
Different
Uses
of
Mouth
B.
People
and
Their
Mouths
C.
Expressions
about
Mouth
D.
The
Importance
of
MouthⅣ.
填空
（每小题1分，共15分）A.
根据所给汉语意思或者首字母提示，用合适的单词填空。36.
Don’t
(触摸)
anything
on
show
in
the
museum.37.
As
everyone
knows,
(练习)
makes
perfect.38.
If
nobody
drops
l ,
the
park
will
be
a
clean
and
comfortable
place.39.
The
s
we
are
going
to
talk
about
is
“Online
Manners”.40.
If
you
don’t
look
after
your
pet
bird
in
p
ways,
it
will
get
ill
easily.B.
用所给单词的适当形式填空。41.
Tom
didn’t
mean
to
be
(polite)
when
he
shouted.
He
was
just
too
excited.42.
We
Chinese
often
greet
each
other
by
(shake)
hand.43.
After
hours
of
(discuss),
they
let
through
the
report
in
the
end.44.
People
in
our
country
often
queue
(patient)
while
waiting
in
public
places.45.
Mrs
Lin
is
too
busy
(explain)
any
of
the
long
sentences
right
now.
C.
从方框中选择合适的词(组)，并用其适当形式填空,
完成下面的句子。soon
after,
cut
in,
bump
into,
conversation,
success46.
The
party
was
very
.
Everyone
had
a
good
time.47.
Both
of
us
enjoyed
nice
food
and
at
the
dinner.48.
The
teacher
was
angry
because
Tom
several
times
when
she
was
speaking.49.
Jack
was
walking
along
the
street
in
a
hurry
when
he
a
boy.50.
we
sat
down,
the
play
started.Ⅴ.
根据所给汉语意思填空，完成下面的句子。
(每小题2分，共10分)51.
你应该在外面等着轮到你。
You
should
outside.52.
这道题太难了，他们算不出来。
The
problem
is
.53.
我昨天意外地在街上碰到了李老师。
Yesterday
I
met
Mr
Lee
on
the
street
_______________________.54.
你应该把花放在屋子里，这样它们就不会受冷了。
You
should
put
the
flowers
inside
to
___________________________.55.
他还没大到可抽烟的年纪。
He
is
_________________________
smoke.
Ⅵ.
任务型阅读
（每小题1分，共15分）A.
阅读下面的材料，根据其内容填空，完成后面的表格。Playing
with
friends,
going
to
a
party,
having
a
meal
in
a
restaurant
or
receiving
a
birthday
gift—as
a
teenager,
you
go
to
different
places
and
meet
different
kinds
of
people.
Everything
you
do
leaves
an
impression
(印象).
So
manners
are
very
important.Arriving
30
minutes
late
for
a
date
may
say:
“This
isn’t
that
important
to
me.”
Taking
a
cell
phone
call
while
talking
to
your
friend
may
say:
“The
caller
is
more
important
than
the
person
standing
in
front
of
me.”
Failing
to
show
thanks
to
a
gift-giver
may
say:
“I
don’t
like
the
gift.”Is
that
the
message
you
really
want
to
send
Maybe
not.
You
do
not
want
to
be
rude,
but
sometimes
what
you
do
makes
people
think
you’re
impolite.How
can
you
change
that
First,
you
should
know
the
proper
ways
to
behave
around
people.
We
call
this
manners.
Manners
are
about
being
honest,
respectful
(尊重)
and
considerate
(考虑周到的).
Good
manners
show
in
small
things.
Start
to
make
your
manners
better
now!You
could
start
by
adding
“please”
and
“thank
you”
to
your
vocabulary
and
avoiding
bad
language.
You
could
start
by
holding
a
door
open
for
someone
after
you
to
go
through.
You
could
start
by
showing
up
on
time
instead
of
letting
others
wait
for
you.Start
now!
Start
a
new
life
and
start
to
be
a
teenager
with
good
manners!Having
good
mannersThe
importance
of
mannersEverything
you
do
leaves
an
impression.Examples
of
bad
mannersArriving
late
may
mean
the
date
is
not
important.
Taking
a
call
while
talking
to
a
friend
may
mean
your
friend
is
(56)
important
than
the
caller.Not
showing
thanks
to
a
gift-giver
may
mean
you
(57)
the
gift.Start
to
(58) your
manners
Use
“please”
and
“thank
you”
to
(59)
bad
language.Hold
a
door
open
for
someone
(60)
you.Show
up
on
time.
B.
阅读下面的短文，根据所给首字母提示，用合适的单词填空。Are
you
going
to
have
dinner
at
your
Western
friend’s
home
Then
be
(61)
c
with
your
table
manners.
Good
manners
will
make
you
a
nice
(62)
g
.
You
may
find
Western
table
manners
are
(63)
d
from
Chinese
manners.
Here
is
some
good
(64)
a
to
keep
you
cool.When
you
are
(65)
r
to
eat,
sit
up
straight
on
the
chair.
Usually,
don’t
put
your
elbows
(胳膊肘)
on
the
table.
First
(66)
p
your
napkin
(餐巾)
up
and
put
it
on
your
lap.
You
can
use
it
to
clean
your
hands
or
mouth,
but
not
your
face.
When
you
finish
eating,
put
it
(67)
b
on
the
table.Don’t
make
any
noise
when
you
eat
or
drink
the
soup.
It’s
not
good
to
speak
when
your
mouth
is
(68)
f
.
If
you
do
that,
people
will
see
the
food
in
your
mouth.If
you
want
to
get
some
food
but
you
can’t
(69)
r
it,
ask
others
to
pass
the
dish
to
you.
Put
bones
on
the
edge
of
the
plate.
And
remember,
take
bread
with
your
(70)
h
,
not
with
a
fork.Ⅶ.
书面表达
（共15分）学生会将要邀请Mr
Black做一个关于电话礼仪的演讲，请根据下列内容，写一个不少于70词的通知，不包括所给的开头和结尾。Name
of
the
talk:
Good
telephone
mannersTime:
2
p.m.,
13
MayPlace:
The
school
hallContent:
Some
important
rules,
for
example:
answer
a
phone
as
soon
as
possible,
say
sorry
for
delays
(延误),
keep
your
voice
down,
be
yourself
and
speak
naturally,
say
good-bye
before
hanging
upHello,
everyone,
May
I
have
your
attention,
please ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Of
course,
there
is
a
lot
more
to
learn
about.
Please
go
and
attend
the
speech.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“to
be
十adjective十enough
十to-infinitive
and
”
to
be＋too+adj.
＋
to
-infinitive
skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
learn
to
use
“to
be
十adjective十enough
十to-infinitive”
to
describe
a
person’s
personality
and
abilities.
2.
Learn
the
use：
to
be＋too+adj.
＋
to
-infinitive过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
read
the
content
in
Part
A
and
B
on
Page
70-712.to
discuss
the
usage
of”enough
to
,
too…to
…”
in
group.3.to
ask
some
Ss
to
say
out
how
to
use
“enough
to
,
too…to…”情感态度与价值观：
To
develop
the
Ss’
interest
in
learning
Englsih.
教学重点难点
1.
learn
to
use
“to
be
十adjective十enough
十to-infinitive”
to
describe
a
person’s
personality
and
abilities.
2.Learn
the
use：
to
be＋too+adj.
＋
to
-infinitive
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】1、回顾复习：Talk
about
the
good
manners
in
the
past
few
lessons.2、自学教材P703、自学检测：Check
out
the
prepared
work..【自主探究】Step
1
Revision1.Recite
the
Reading
.2.Translate
the
sentences1.你等了好长时间而不生气真有足够的耐心。
2.
你够大的可以学习有关礼貌的知识了。句型结构:
be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
-infinitiveStep
2
lead-inWe
use
this
pattern
to
describe
a
person’s
personality
and
abilityMillie
is
patient
enough
to
listen
carefully
when
others
speak.
Sandy
is
careful
enough
to
notice
small
changes
around
her.Kitty
is
generous
enough
to
share
her
things
with
othersSimon
is
polite
enough
to
queue
in
public.Amy
is
funny
enough
to
make
everyone
laugh
after
class.Step
3
Presentation该句型常用描述人物特征的形容词。如good
kind
nice
clever
right
careful
rude
wise
foolish
stupid
selfish
careless
wrong
cruel
silly
honest
generousPay
attention1.
enough是副词，修饰前面的形容词。enough用作副词时，位置在被修饰词的后面。
He
is
old
enough
to
go
to
school.
Andy
is
strong
enough
to
be
a
player.
2.
在使用本句型的时候，要注意主语和be动词的一致性。形容词前没有任何诸如very，quite等之类的修饰词。
The
room
is
big
enough
to
hold
20
people.
此句型可以和so
…that
…互换。Example:
He
is
outgoing
enough
to
make
friends
easily.
=
He
is
so
outgoing
that
he
can
make
friends
easily.Lead-in
Join
two
sentences
togetherBritish
people
are
very
polite.
They
do
not
shout
loudly
in
public.
British
people
are
polite
shout
loudly
in
public.British
people
are
very
polite.
They
will
not
push
past
you.
British
people
are
polite
push
past
you.Translate
the
sentences1.她年龄太小了不能去上学。
be
+
too+
adj.
+
to
-infinitive2.
这房间太小了我们不能住。
be
+
too+
adj.
+for
sb.+
to
-infinitiveCheck
the
answer.
Suzy
was
too
shy
to
join
the
discussion.
Simon
was
too
excited
to
express
himself
clearly.Peter
was
too
slow
to
write
down
all
the
main
points.
Amy
was
too
careless
to
take
her
hat
with
her
when
she
left.Kitty
was
too
busy
with
her
dancing
lesson
to
listen
to
the
radio.Step
2.PresentationPay
attention1.
too后接形容词，to后接动词不定式。
He
is
too
old
to
climb
the
hill.
Andy
is
too
shy
to
speak
loudly
in
public.
2.
“to
be
+too+
adj.
+to
infinitive”句型可与“so...that...”转换。The
boy
is
too
short
to
touch
the
books
on
the
shelf.The
boy
is
so
short
that
he
can’t
touch
the
books
on
the
shelf.Step
4
Practice同义句转换1.David
is
curious.
He
asks
his
parents
many
questions
every
day.
David
is
______
______
____
___
his
parents
many
questions
every
day.
2.
Kitty
is
clever
enough
to
make
all
kinds
of
kites.Kitty
is
___
______
_____
she____
____
all
kinds
of
kites.3.Andy
is
too
weak
to
carry
the
big
box.Andy
is
___
_____
_______
to
carry
the
big
box.
Andy
is
___
______
____she______
carry
the
big
box.4.
It’s
very
kind
of
you
to
tell
me
this
news.You
are
_____
______
to
tell
me
this
news.5.
This
problem
is
too
difficult
for
her
to
work
out.This
problem
is
______
______
______
_______
_______
______
____
________.Step
5
Play
a
game.
Use
be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
–infinitive
to
to
describe
a
classmate’s
personality
and
abilities.
To
describe
your
partner’s
personality
and
abilities
using
This
sentences
structure.
Who
did
best 【课堂小结】be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
-infinitive【巩固拓展】1.他很有耐心，能等很久却不发火。2.他很细心，能记得所有
细节。。3.对我们来说这个房间足够大到住。4.对我来说这数学难题足够容易解出。Homework1.
Review
the
two
sentence
structures
and
make
at
least
two
more
sentences
with
each
of
them.2.
Prepare
for
the
next
lesson.
Talk
about
the
good
manners
in
the
past
few
lessons.Go
over
the
contents
learned
before
.Discuss
the
pattern
drill:be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
–infinitive
in
groups.Join
two
sentences
together.Discuss
the
use
of
“be
+
too+
adj.
+
to
–infinitive
or
be
+
too+
adj.
+for
sb.+
to
-infinitive
”Complete
the
sentences
then
check
the
answers
together.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Find
some
sentences
in
the
text
,including
“be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
–infinitive
and
”
be
+
too+
adj.
+
to
–infinitive
and
be
+
too+
adj.
+for
sb.+
to
-infinitiveDiscuss
them
in
groupsBe
sure
everyone
in
each
group
understand
them
and
master
the
uses.
课堂达标
根据汉语意思写单词：1.
We
should
be
__________(耐心)
with
those
students.2.
They
don’t
have
_________
(足够)
food
to
spend
the
whole
winter.3.
Do
you
often
have
a
________(讨论)
with
your
teachers.4.
I
can’t
find
a
right
word
to
__________
(表达)
my
real
feelings.5.
The
hat
is
________(太)
big
for
me
to
wear
now.二、单项选择（
）1.
The
young
boy
is
________
to
go
back
to
school.
A.
enough
well
B.
good
enough
C.
well
enough
D.
enough
good(
)
2.
He
is
patient
enough
________
for
me
that
night.
A.
waiting
B.
wait
C.
to
wait
D.
waits(
)
3.
The
elephant
is
too
big
_________
through
the
door.
A.
to
go
B.
goes
C.
can’t
go
D.
not
to
go(
)
4.
He
drives
too
_______
to
stop
in
a
short
time.
A.
fast
B.
faster
C.
fastly
D.
fastest(
)
5.
The
maths
problem
is
______
hard
________
I
can’t
work
it
out.
A.
too,
to
B.
enough,/
C.
so,
that
D.
enough,
to
三、完成句子1.
他有足够的耐心等很长时间而不生气。
He
is
______________________________________________.2.
这个问题对他来说太难了，解决不了。
This
problem
is
_____________________________________3.
那个小男孩很大方，和其他小朋友分享东西。
The
little
boy
is
________________________________________.4.
他们跑的太快了，我追不上。
They
run
______________________________
we
can’t
catch
them.5.
活到老学到老。
____________________________________________________.
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Grammar
1
be
+
adj.
+
enough
+
to
-infinitive该句型常用描述人物特征的形容词。如good
kind
nice
clever
right
careful
rude
wise
foolish
stupid
selfish
careless
wrong
cruel
silly
honest
generousPay
attention1.
enough是副词，修饰前面的形容词。enough用作副词时，位置在被修饰词的后面。
He
is
old
enough
to
go
to
school.
Andy
is
strong
enough
to
be
a
player.
2.
在使用本句型的时候，要注意主语和be动词的一致性。形容词前没有任何诸如very，quite等之类的修饰词。The
room
is
big
enough
to
hold
20
people.
此句型可以和so
…that
…互换。Example:
He
is
outgoing
enough
to
make
friends
easily.
=
He
is
so
outgoing
that
he
can
make
friends
easily.3.
too后接形容词，to后接动词不定式。
He
is
too
old
to
climb
the
hill.
Andy
is
too
shy
to
speak
loudly
in
public.
4.
“to
be
+too+
adj.
+to
infinitive”句型可与“so...that...”转换。The
boy
is
too
short
to
touch
the
books
on
the
shelf.The
boy
is
so
short
that
he
can’t
touch
the
books
on
the
shelf.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
“to
be
十adjective十enough
十to-infinitive
and
to
be＋too+adj.
＋
to
-infinitive”.After
learning
,the
Ss
can
learn
to
use
them
smoothly.
But
some
of
the
Ss
can’t
master
“enough”of
the
part
of
the
speech,
they
often
put
it
in
the
wrong
place.
And
they
don’t
understand
the
meaning
of
“too…to
”.
it
is
a
negative
form.
It
can
be
changed
into
so
+adj.+that
+can’t/couldn’t.so
after
class,
the
Ss
must
practice
more.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
get
some
idea
about
Switzerland2.
To
learn
to
describe
green
Switzerland3.
To
learn
the
words
in
this
text过程与方法：1.get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
reading
then
do
some
comprehensions.2.to
discuss
in
groups
and
understand
the
meaning
of
the
article.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
love
the
earth
and
protect
the
environment.
教学重点难点
1.
To
get
some
idea
about
Switzerland2.
To
learn
to
describe
green
Switzerland3.
To
learn
the
words
in
this
text
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
the
following
phrases.1.打算、计划做某事
2.
植更多的树3.在花园里挖沟
4.种植水果面包树5.对…
有好处
6.
减少空气污染7.严重的，严肃的
8.节约水/能源
9.引起严重的空气污染Step
2
Presentation1.
Show
some
pictures
and
present
the
new
words.2.
Let
some
students
spell
the
words.
3.
Read
after
the
teacher.4.
Read
together.5.
Match
the
words
on
the
left
with
the
meaning
on
the
right.B11
separate
______
a
cause
a
result2
recycle
______
b
make
some
pay
money
because
he/she
has
done
something
wrong3
allow
______
c
be
used
up4
fine
______
d
put
things
into
different
groups5
run
out
______
e
let
some
one
do
something6
produce
______
f
treat
something
used
so
that
it
can
be
used
again
Keys:
d
f
e
b
c
aStep
3
Warming
upShow
video
and
some
pictures
to
present
Switzerland.Switzerland
is
a
beautiful
country
with
high
mountains
and
clean
blue
lakes.Step
4
Fast
readingRead
the
article
quickly
and
answer
the
question.When’s
World
Environment
Day Keys:
World
Environment
Day
is
5
June.Step
5
Careful
readingB2.
Kitty
made
some
notes
of
Martina’s
blog
on
a
piece
of
paper,
but
her
mother
tore
it
up
by
mistake.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
help
her
match
the
two
halves
of
the
sentences.
Write
the
correct
letters
in
the
blanks.1
Switzerland
is
a
beautiful
country
_____2
In
Switzerland,
glass
plastic
and
paper
_______3
An
organization
was
set
up
_____4
The
government
has
laws
_____5
We
should
protect
nature
_____6
People
are
starting
to
use
______a
are
separated
into
different
groups
and
recycled.b
energy
from
the
sun,
wind
and
water.c
to
protect
the
environment.d
with
high
mountains
and
clean
blue
lakes.e
because
we
depend
on
its
rich
resources
to
live.f
to
collect
old
clothes
from
around
the
country.Keys:
d
a
f
c
e
bB3
After
reading
Martina’s
article,
Kitty
has
written
down
the
main
points
of
the
paragraphs.
Write
the
correct
numbers
of
the
paragraphs
in
the
boxes.a
Martina
asks
everyone
to
do
something
for
the
environment.b
People
are
starting
to
use
new
energy.c
People
in
Switzerland
recycle
many
things
to
reduce
pollution.d
The
government
has
laws
to
protect
the
environment.e
Switzerland
is
a
beautiful
country.Keys: e
c
d
b
aStep
6
Listening1.
Listen
carefully
and
answer
the
questions.
(Listen
to
the
paragraph
1)What
is
Switzerland
like What
do
people
there
try
to
do Keys:
Switzerland
is
a
country
with
high
mountains
and
clean
blue
lakes.They
try
to
keep
their
country
beautiful
and
clean.2.
Listen
carefully
and
answer
the
questions.
(Listen
to
the
paragraphs
2-3)What
can
be
recycled
in
Switzerland What
does
Martina’s
family
do
with
their
old
clothes Does
Switzerland
have
laws
to
protect
the
environment What
will
happen
if
you
drop
litter
in
a
public
place
in
Switzerland Keys:
Things
like
glass,
plastic,
paper,
old
clothes
and
shoes
can
be
recycled.They
send
their
old
jeans
and
T-shirts
to
an
organization
for
recycling.Yes,
it
does.
It
has
many
laws
to
protect
the
environment.You
will
be
fined
by
the
police.3.
Listen
carefully
and
answer
the
questions.
(Listen
to
the
paragraphs
4-5)What
are
the
new
ways
to
get
energy What
are
the
advantages
of
these
new
types
of
energy Keys:
To
get
energy
from
the
sun,
wind
and
water.They
cost
very
little
and
will
never
fun
out.
Also,
they
produce
little
pollution.Step
7
After
readingKitty
is
telling
Sandy
about
Martina’s
article.
Complete
their
conversation.Keys:
environment
separated
recycled
collects
charity
show
the
poor
factories
laws
punished
allowed
litter
finedStep
8
Group
work1.
How
do
you
understand
“Green
Switzerland”
What
the
meaning
of
“green” 2.
InterviewYou
are
an
interviewer.
You
want
to
interview
Martina
about
Switzerland.
Work
in
pairs,
try
to
ask
at
least
five
questions
about
the
trip.Step
9
Homework1.
Read
aloud
the
article
and
underline
the
difficult
parts.2.
Remember
the
new
words
in
this
lesson.
Translate
the
following
phrases.Learn
some
new
words
with
some
pictures
and
master
them.Match
the
words
on
the
left
with
the
meaning
on
the
right.Show
video
and
some
pictures
to
present
Switzerland.Read
the
article
quickly
and
answer
the
question.Listen
to
the
tape
and
help
her
match
the
two
halves
of
the
sentencesWrite
the
correct
numbers
of
the
paragraphs
in
the
boxes.Listen
carefully
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
carefully
and
answer
the
questions.
(Listen
to
the
paragraphs
4-5)
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview
.Watch
a
video
about
Switzerland.Read
Green
Switzerland
then
judge
some
sentences
T
or
F.Read
the
article
carefully
then
answer
some
questions.Listen
to
the
tape
carefully.Try
to
retell
the
article
with
their
own
words.
课堂达标
三.根据句意及汉语意思提示完成句子1.
Look,
the
children
are
(挖)
something
on
the
playground.2.
More
and
more
people
own
cars
and
this
(导致)
more
air
pollution.The
government
still
faces
very
(严重的)
difficulty.4.
It’s
(明智的)
of
people
to
choose
to
ride
bicycles.5.
When
you
leave
the
room,
(记得)to
turn
off
the
lights.6.
What
do
you
think
can
be
(回收) 7.
What
(引起)
his
illness 四．单项选择(
)1.
Trees
are
good
us.A.
for
B.
toC.
at
D.
by(
)2.
Dogs
like
in
the
garden.A.
diging
B.
diggingC.
dig
D.
digs(
)3.
Remember
off
the
taps
after
you
brush
your
teeth.A.
turn
B.
to
turnC.
turning
D.
turned(
)4.
Don’t
make
him
all
the
time.
Tell
him
a
rest.A.
to
work;
to
have
B.
work;
haveC.
to
work;
have
D.
work;
to
have(
)5.
There
a
football
match
and
two
basketball
matches
in
our
school
this
month.A.
will
have
B.
is
going
to
beC.
are
going
to
have
D.
are
going
to
beC.
Less
and
lessD.
Many
and
many(
)9.
Doing
eyes
exercises
is
good
eyes.A.
in
B.
at
C.
with
D.
for(
)10.
I
think
I
can
ride
a
bike
air
pollution.
A.
reduce
B.
reducingC.
to
reduce
D.
to
reducing【拓展提高】
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Reading
1What
can
be
recycled
in
Switzerland What
does
Martina’s
family
do
with
their
old
clothes Does
Switzerland
have
laws
to
protect
the
environment What
will
happen
if
you
drop
litter
in
a
public
place
in
Switzerland
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
something
about
Switzerland.
By
learning,
the
Ss
can
know
more
about
Switzerland’s
beautiful
nature
view.
And
they
know
about
when
World
Environment
Day
is.After
learning
“Green
Switzerland
”,
develop
the
students
to
love
and
protect
the
environment
and
save
engery,try
to
keep
our
country
beautiful
and
clearn.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
help
the
students
learn
about
some
famous
places
of
interest
and
popular
tourist
attractions
in
foreign
countries
.
2.
To
offer
the
students
chances
to
talk
about
the
activities
that
people
can
do
in
different
tourist
attractions
in
English.3.
To
help
the
students
know
a
little
about
Western
culture
by
learning
some
popular
tourist
attractions
around
the
world
.过程与方法：to
get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
teacher
and
listening.to
get
the
Ss
to
do
pair
work.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’feelings
of
loving
the
places
of
interest
in
our
country
and
in
the
world.
教学重点难点
1.
Words
and
phrases
:
travelling
;
go
to
…
for
one’s
holiday
;
the
capital
of...2.
Sentences
:
I’ve
been
there
before
.
/
Get
ready
.
/
I’m
getting
all
my
things
.
/
I
don’t
think
it’ll
be
a
holiday
for
me
.
/
What’s
special
about
...
/
Have
you
ever
been
there
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Presentation
(1)
Show
the
students
some
photos
of
travelling
in
China
.
Then
talk
about
the
photos
with
the
students
together
with
some
‘wh--’questions
.
(2)
Show
them
some
other
pictures
about
foreign
sceneries
.
Talk
about
these
pictures
with
the
students
together
.
Let
the
students
try
their
best
to
say
something
in
English
.Step
2
Practice
Part
A
on
Page
21.
Give
the
students
a
few
minutes
to
finish
it
in
pairs
.
They
can
talk
about
these
pictures
and
exchange
their
ideas
in
English
.
Check
the
answers
with
them
together
after
they
finish
it
.
Read
them
loudly
after
the
teacher.
Step
3
Oral
practicePart
B
.
Go
through
the
dialogue
first
,
and
then
let
the
students
work
with
his
/
her
partner
to
make
a
dialogue
.
Ask
several
pairs
to
show
in
the
front
.Step
4
Listening
&
answeringShow
Hobo
&
Eddie’s
pictures
,
let
the
students
guess
what
they
are
going
to
do
.
And
then
play
the
CD
for
them
to
listen
with
the
following
questions
:Where
is
Eddie
going
/
Does
Hobo
want
to
go
too
/
What
does
Hobo
want
to
bring
/
Will
Eddie
have
a
happy
holiday
Why
or
why
not
After
listening
,
answer
the
questions
one
by
one
.
Then
read
after
the
CD
.
Explain
something
important
in
this
comic
strip
,
make
sure
the
students
know
what
the
two
dogs
are
saying
.
Then
read
together.Step
5
Practice
in
pairsOffer
the
students
some
more
minutes
to
practice
in
pairs
in
different
roles.
Invite
some
pairs
to
the
front
to
act
it
out
.
Encourage
them
to
add
something
of
their
own
.Step
6
Extra
exercises
in
class
Time
permitting
,
give
the
students
some
more
exercises
by
ppt.Homework
:1.
Recite
the
comic
strip
.2.
Finish
off
the
exercises
in
their
workbook
,
period
1.3.
Pre-learn
the
read
passage
on
page
22-23
,
underline
something
you
don’t
understand
.
Look
at
the
pictures
then
talk
about
the
photos
with
some
‘wh--’questions
.Finish
Part
A
then
check
the
answers
together.Go
through
the
dialogue
then
work
with
her
or
his
partner.
Look
at
Hobo
&
Eddie’s
picturesAnswer
some
questions
Practice
in
pairs.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Have
a
free
talk
.Talk
about
some
pictures
Make
a
new
dialogue
according
to
the
model.Act
it
out
in
front.
课堂达标
一、用适当的单词或词组填空。
1.The
students
of
Class
4
are
going
____________
(
旅行)
next
Friday.2.We’re
going
to
play
football.
Could
you
___________
(加入)
us 3.What
are
you
doing.
I’m
___________(
收拾)
my
bags.4.When
they
stayed
in
Beijing,
they
___________
(拍了许多照片
).5.It
is
my
____________
(three)
day
in
China.6.He
spends
two
hours
____________
(read)
English
every
day.7.He
is
one
of
_____________
(famous)
singers
in
the
world.8.I
___________
(visit)
Jiaoshan
Park
many
times.9.This
song
sounds
so
____________
(beautiful)
that
I
want
____________
(dance)
to
it.10.Shall
we
go
_______________(ski)
this
afternoon 11.The
____________people
are
waiting
for
the
___________
news
outside
the
gate.(excite)12.Can
I
use
these
words
_______________________(describe)
the
pictures 二、单项填空(
)1.——Where
can
you
go
skiing
——
.
A.
The
Great
Wall
B.
the
Tower
Bridge
C.
The
Little
Mermaid
D.
Mount
Fuji(
)2.We
will
be
out
all
day,
so
enough
food
you.
A.
bring;
to
B.
take;
to
C.
bring;
with
D.
send;
with(
)3.The
party
be
fun.
I
want
to
attend(参加)
it.
A.
might
B.
must
C.
could
D.
may(
)4.The
English
story
is
quite
easy
for
you.
There
are
new
words
.
A.
a
few
B.
few
C.
a
little
D.
little(
)5.Last
weekend,
my
family
had
a
great
time
in
Jinshan
Park..
The
underlined
phrase
means
.
A.
helped
ourselves
B.
enjoyed
ourselves
C.
enjoyed
themselves
D.
helped
themselves
板书设计
8下
Unit
2
Travelling
Comic
and
strip
and
welcome
to
the
unit1.
Words
and
phrases
:
travelling
;
go
to
…
for
one’s
holiday
;
the
capital
of...2.
Sentences
:
I’ve
been
there
before
.
/
Get
ready
.
/
I’m
getting
all
my
things
.
/
I
don’t
think
it’ll
be
a
holiday
for
me
.
/
What’s
special
about
...
/
Have
you
ever
been
there
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
section
deals
with
some
places
of
interest
and
expressions
related
to
travelling.
Comic
strips
are
parts
to
warm
up
in
this
unit.
It
is
designed
to
arouse
Ss’
interest.
Ss
are
expected
not
only
to
know
more
about
the
places
of
interest
but
also
say
something
about
them
according
to
Part
A
and
B.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
help
the
students
talk
about
their
own
experience
.2.
To
teach
and
help
the
students
how
to
sort
and
organize
their
ideas
before
writing
.3.
To
describe
one
of
their
own
trips
in
English,
especially
place
,
experience
,
feeling
and
so
on
.过程与方法：To
describe
and
explain
places,
experiences
and
feelings 情感态度与价值观：To
discuss
ideas
for
an
article
with
a
partner.
教学重点难点
1.to
write
an
article
by
themselves.2.
To
describe
and
explain
places,
experiences
and
feelings
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
PresentationShow
students
some
pictures
and
new
words.Step
2
Warming
upShow
some
pictures
about
Hong
Kong
and
introduceDisneyland
is
a
famous
theme
park
and
it
has
four
different
parks—Main
Street
USA,
Tomorrow
Land,
Fantasyland
and
Adventure
land.In
Ocean
Park
we
can
see
the
dolphin
show
and
the
bird
show.
Every
year
many
tourists
go
there
to
have
a
good
time
especially（特别）the
children.Step
3
Task
11.
How
does
Kitty
write
her
article
Step
1(part
A):
Step
2(part
B):
Step
3(part
C):
2
Look
at
Kitty’s
fact
file
–Part
A
in
page
32carefully
and
try
to
remember
more
information
about
Kitty’s
trip
to
Hong
Kong.
Main
PointsDetailsWhenThe
winter
holiday------whereHong
Kong Who ------Whatvisiting
places
of
interestDisneylandOcean
park---Other
activities Eating How Step
4
PresentationUseful
expressionsIt
took
us
…to
fly
toThe
next
day,
we
went
to…I
loved
watching
the
interesting……was
exciting/beautiful/fantasticOn
the
third
day,
we
visited…We
went
to…on
the
fifth
day…was
the
best
part
of
the
dayWe
enjoyed
this
trip
very
muchStep
5
Task
21.
Analysis
(分析)
kitty’s
article.
We
can
group
this
article
into
3
parts:
part
1:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about
part
2:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about
part
3:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about
2.
During
Kitty’s
article,
Kitty
used
some
adjectives（形容词）and
adverbs（副词）
to
describe
her
article.
Could
you
please
find
them
out
as
many
as
you
can 3.
Complete
Kitty’s
article
in
Part
B,
page
33
as
quickly
as
you
can.
Step
6
Conclusion1.
We
can
divide
Kitty’s
article
into
3
partspart
1:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about
________________________part
2:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about______________________________________part
3:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about________________________
2.
Kitty
used
some
adjectives（形容词）and
adverbs（副词）to
describe
her
article.
Could
you
please
find
them
out
as
many
as
you
can Step
7
Useful
sentences1.
My
parents
and
I
left
for
the
airport
in
the
early
morning.
我和父母一大早就前往机场。
leave
for
动身去
e.g.
The
plane
leaves
for
Hong
Kong
at
10:30.
飞机于10：30
起飞前往香港。2.
It
took
us
about
three
and
a
half
hours
to
fly
to
Hong
Kong.
我们花了3个半小时飞到香港。
“3个半小时”还可以表达成three
hours
and
a
half
“一个半小时”的两种表达方式
one
and
a
half
hours
one
hour
and
a
halfStep
8
WritingWatch
the
video
and
model(模仿)
Kitty’s
fact
file
to
write
about
the
to
The
New
Fourth
Army
Memorial
to
organize
your
ideas.Step
9
Ask
and
think
When
we
are
travelling,
what
should
we
usually
noticeStep
10
Homework1.
If
you
went
to
Beijing
for
a
holiday
last
summer,
try
to
write
an
article
about
this
trip.2.
What
should
we
do
and
what
should
not
we
do
while
we
are
travelling
Please
give
more
details.
You
can
discuss
and
look
for
the
information
on
the
internet
or
from
the
newspapers
and
magazines.
To
learn
some
new
words.Look
at
some
pictures
about
Hong
Kong
and
introduce.To
learn
how
to
write.Master
the
useful
expressions
to
write
an
article.Discuss
in
groups.Master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
some
pictures
and
introduce
them.To
get
the
Ss
to
analyze
Kitty’s
article.To
learn
to
write
an
article
with
useful
expressions.Pay
attention
to
writing
steps.
课堂达标
板书设计
8下
Unit
2
Travelling
Task1.part
1:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about
________________________part
2:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about______________________________________part
3:
para(
)—para(
)
It
is
mainly
about________________________
2.
1.
My
parents
and
I
left
for
the
airport
in
the
early
morning.
我和父母一大早就前往机场。
leave
for
动身去
e.g.
The
plane
leaves
for
Hong
Kong
at
10:30.
飞机于10：30
起飞前往香港。2.
It
took
us
about
three
and
a
half
hours
to
fly
to
Hong
Kong.
我们花了3个半小时飞到香港。
“3个半小时”还可以表达成three
hours
and
a
half
“一个半小时”的两种表达方式
one
and
a
half
hours
one
hour
and
a
half
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
deals
with
the
way
of
writing
about
the
trip.
Students
are
mainly
trained
how
to
write
the
article
about
the
holiday
activities
and
experiences.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
be
able
to
identify
different
ways
to
protect
the
environment2.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
live
a
green
life过程与方法：1.to
discuss
how
to
live
a
green
world
in
groups.2.to
talk
about
ways
to
live
a
green
world
by
some
pictures.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
protect
the
environment
and
save
energy.
教学重点难点
1.
To
be
able
to
identify
different
ways
to
protect
the
environment2.
To
learn
to
talk
about
how
to
live
a
green
life
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Warming
upDid
you
know
that
all
around
the
world,
3
to
6
billion
trees
are
cut
down
each
year
Have
you
ever
planted
a
tree
Watch
a
video.Step
2
Presentation1.
Show
some
pictures
and
present
the
new
words.2.
Read
aloud
the
new
words.
Step
3
Learn
the
conversation1.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
ask:1)
What
is
Hobo
going
to
do 2)
Will
more
trees
be
planted
this
year 3)
What
does
Eddie
like
doing 4)
What
will
Eddie
plant 2.
Act
out
the
conversation.Step
4
Practice1.
Do
Part
A
on
page
117.2.
Check
the
answers.Step
5
Listen
and
answer
1.
Listen
to
part
B
and
answer
the
following
questions.
1)
How
did
Kitty
go
to
school
in
the
past 2)
What
about
now 3)
What
does
Millie
think
she
should
do
to
live
a
green
life 4)
What
about
Daniel 5)
What
about
Sandy 2.
Read
after
the
recorder.Step
6
Free
talkWork
in
groups
and
talk
about
the
ways
to
live
a
green
life.A:
What
should
we
do
to
live
a
green
life B:
I
think
….C:
I
think
….D:
I
think
….Step
7
Language
points1.
What
are
you
going
to
do
你打算做什么？
句中be
going
to
do
sth.
意思是“打算、计划做某事”。
2.
Will
more
trees
be
planted
this
year
今年更多的树将会被种植吗？句中will
be
planted
意思是“将会被种植”，“will
be
+
动词的过去分词”是一般将来时的被动语态。
3.
We
can
reduce
air
pollution
by
riding
bicycle.
我们可以通过骑自行车来减少空气污染。句中reduce
air
pollution
意思是“减少空气污染”，“by
doing
sth.”意思是“通过做某事”。4.
My
dad
used
to
drive
me
to
school.
我爸爸过去常常开车送我去学校。
句中used
to
do
sth.
意思是“过去常常做某事”。used
to表示过去的习惯动作或状态，它可以用于各种人称，其后接动词原形。
5.
It’s
wise
for
people
to
choose
public
transport
or
ride
bicycles.
对人们来说选择公共交通或骑自行车是明智的。
It
is
+
adj.
+
for
sb.
+
to
do
sth.
意思是“对某人来说做什么事情怎么样”。常用于此句型的形容词有important,
difficult,
dangerous,
necessary,
useful,
possible等，用来对
to
do
sth.
进行说明，此句型可以转换成To
do
sth.
is
+
adj.。
[拓展]
It
is
+
adj.
+
of +
sb.
+
to
do
sth.，常用于此句型的形容词有good,
kind,
nice,
clever,
wise
等，用来对sb.的性格、品质等进行说明，将这个句型中的
sb.
和
adj.
提出来可以造句为
sb.
+
be
+
adj.。
e.g.
你这样说真是太好了。
It’s
very
kind
of
you
to
say
so.Step
8
ExercisesStep
9
HomeworkRead
the
text
book
and
learn
the
new
words
and
phrases
by
heart.
Watch
a
video.Learn
some
new
words
with
some
pictures.Listen
to
the
tape
and
ask
and
answer.Act
out
the
conversation.Listen
to
part
B
and
answer
the
following
questions.
Work
in
groups
and
talk
about
the
ways
to
live
a
green
life.To
learn
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.Do
some
exercises.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
how
to
protect
the
environment
and
how
to
live
a
green
world.Watch
a
video
and
answer
some
questions
about
how
to
protect
the
environment.Discuss
how
to
save
energy
in
groups
then
show
their
answers
in
front.
课堂达标
一、根据汉语提示写单词。1.
Is
he
________
(严肃的) 2.
We
can
_________
(减少)
air
pollution
by
riding
bicycles.3.
He
is
________
(挖洞)
in
the
garden.4.
We
can
________
(回收利用)
old
things.
5.
It
is
____
(明智的)
of
you
to
take
a
map.
二、
翻译短语1)
打算、计划做某事2)
植更多的树3)
在花园里挖沟4)
种植水果面包树5)
对…...
有好处6)
减少空气污染7)
严重的，严肃的8)
节约水/能源9)
引起严重的空气污染
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Comic
strip
and
Welcome
to
the
unit1)
What
is
Hobo
going
to
do 2)
Will
more
trees
be
planted
this
year 3)
What
does
Eddie
like
doing 4)
What
will
Eddie
plant 1.
What
are
you
going
to
do
你打算做什么？
句中be
going
to
do
sth.
意思是“打算、计划做某事”。
2.
Will
more
trees
be
planted
this
year
今年更多的树将会被种植吗？句中will
be
planted
意思是“将会被种植”，“will
be
+
动词的过去分词”是一般将来时的被动语态。
3.
We
can
reduce
air
pollution
by
riding
bicycle.
我们可以通过骑自行车来减少空气污染。句中reduce
air
pollution
意思是“减少空气污染”，“by
doing
sth.”意思是“通过做某事”。4.
My
dad
used
to
drive
me
to
school.
我爸爸过去常常开车送我去学校。
句中used
to
do
sth.
意思是“过去常常做某事”。used
to表示过去的习惯动作或状态，它可以用于各种人称，其后接动词原形。
5.
It’s
wise
for
people
to
choose
public
transport
or
ride
bicycles.
对人们来说选择公共交通或骑自行车是明智的。
It
is
+
adj.
+
for
sb.
+
to
do
sth.
意思是“对某人来说做什么事情怎么样”。常用于此句型的形容词有important,
difficult,
dangerous,
necessary,
useful,
possible等，用来对
to
do
sth.
进行说明，此句型可以转换成To
do
sth.
is
+
adj.。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
how
to
protect
the
environment
,first
the
teacher
gave
some
senences
to
let
the
Ss
to
discuss
them
in
groups
like
1)
Turn
off
computers
when
we
are
not
using
them.2)
Use
cold
water
instead
of
warm
or
hot
water
to
wash
our
hands
when
possible.3).Use
both
sides
of
a
piece
of
paper.4).Send
e-mail
instead
of
paper
cards.5).Buy
products
that
you
can
use
again.6).Reduce
water.ect.
then
get
the
Ss
to
show
the
results
of
discussion.by
learning
this
period
is
to
develop
the
Ss’consciousness
to
protect
the
environment.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
understand
and
use
the
expressions
learnt
in
this
lesson
to
talk
about
a
tour
of
a
city.2.
To
retell
the
text
in
your
own
words.过程与方法：To
get
the
Ss
to
read
the
article
carefully
then
pick
out
the
language
points.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
reading
by
some
basic
skills
of
reading.
教学重点难点
1.
Understanding
and
using
the
new
words,
phrases
appeared
in
this
lesson.2.
Retell
the
text.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Retelling
Can
you
tell
me
something
about
these
famous
places
in
New
Yorkaccording
to
the
pictures
and
key
words Wall
Streetthe
world-famous
trade
center
at
the
southern
end
ofinternational
banks
Time
Square
Gather
huge
glass
Central
Park
Relax
after
a
day’s
work
Broadwaybe
famous
for
hear
of
musicalStep
2
Language
pointsWhere
are
the
‘Tour’
and
‘Back’
icons The
‘Tour’
icon
is
at
the
top
of
the
page
andthe
‘Back’
icon
is
at
the
bottom
of
the
page.你喜欢在书的顶部还是底部记笔记？Do
you
like
taking
notes
at
the
top
of
a
book
page
or
at
the
bottom
of
it 2.
Where
is
Wall
Street It
is
at
the
southern
end
of
Manhattan
Island.Where
did
Mr.
Chen
first
live
in
Sunshine
Town He
first
lived
in
the
northern
part
of
town.at
the
southern
end
of
在……的南端in
the
northern
part
of
在……的北部3.
What
has
Broadway
been
famous
for It
has
been
famous
for
its
theatres
since
the
early
twentieth
century.be
famous
for
以……闻名the
early
twentieth
century
二十世纪初What
is
…
famous
for It
is
famous
for….4.
Have
you
hear
of
the
song
‘Memory’
It
comes
from
the
famous
Broadway
musical
cats.hear
of
听说hear
from
=
receive
a
letter
from
收到某人的来信musical
n.
音乐剧
adj.
音乐的，有音乐天赋的music
n.
音乐
musician
n.
音乐家Step
3
Activity
Work
in
groups
of
four
Imagine
one
of
your
friends
has
never
been
to
our
city
and
he
or
she
wants
to
get
some
information
from
the
website
‘Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours’.Please
tell
him
or
her
how
to
use
the
website
to
take
a
tour
of
the
city.Use
the
expressions
we
learnt
in
this
lesson
as
many
as
you
can.Expressions
tour
guide
at
the
top/bottom
of
world-famoustrade
center
be
famous
for
in
the
center
ofat
the
northern/southern…
end
of
internationalRelax
a
hard
day’s
workhear
of
so
much
forStep
4
Homework1.
Recite
the
article.2.
Finish
《学习与评价》U3
Period
3.
Talk
about
four
famous
places
in
New
York
according
to
the
pictures
and
key
words.To
learn
the
language
points
and
make
sentences
with
them.Work
in
groups
of
four
Check
out
homework
and
the
preview.To
get
some
Ss
to
try
to
retell
the
article
according
to
the
pictures
and
key
words.Have
a
test
课堂达标
一、根据中文用所给单词的适当形式填空1.His
sister
is
a
tour
(导游）2.China
is
the
largest
country
in
（亚洲）.3.
Shanghai
is
becoming
an
（国际的）city.4.Taiwan
is
the
biggest
（岛）
in
China.5.Can
you
see
the
（巨大的）
balloon
in
the
sky 6.
Many
children
are
afraid
of
（黑暗）
.二、选择题。
(
)1.
for
this
class,
let’s
have
a
break.A.
So
many
B.
So
much
C.Too
many
D.
Too
much(
)2.---Have
you
ever
the
music
Going
home
---Yes,many
times.
It
is
one
of
my
favourite
pieces
of
music.A.heard
of
B.heard
from
C.hear
of
D.hear
from(
)3.The
weekend
is
coming,and
we
can
have
a
good
rest
after
.A.a
week’s
work
hard
B.a
week’s
hard
workC.a
week
work
hard
D.a
week
hard
work
(
)4.It
is
really
to
see
Chang’e
III
flying
to
the
moon.
A.excite
B.exciting
C.excited
D.excitement
板书设计
8下
Unit
3
Online
tours
Reading
11.at
the
southern
end
of
在……的南端in
the
northern
part
of
在……的北部2.
be
famous
for
以……闻名the
early
twentieth
century
二十世纪初What
is
…
famous
for It
is
famous
for….3.
hear
of
听说hear
from
=
receive
a
letter
from
收到某人的来信musical
n.
音乐剧
adj.
音乐的，有音乐天赋的music
n.
音乐
musician
n.
音乐家
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
main
task
of
this
period
is
to
read
an
article
about
famous
places
in
New
York
city,In
order
to
let
the
Ss
understand
clearly,
the
teacher
let
the
Ss
learn
more
about
famous
places
in
New
York
city
.That
can
arouse
Ss’s
interest.Also,Ss
are
expected
to
grasp
the
usage
of
the
language
points
and
try
to
use
them
freely
without
looking
at
the
notebook.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
learn
to
use
question
words
+
to-infinitives2.
To
learn
to
use
must
and
have
to过程与方法：Read
the
context
in
Part
A
and
B
on
page
54-56.to
get
the
Ss
to
say
out
their
opinion
about
Grammar.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
interest
in
learning
English
well.
教学重点难点
1.
To
learn
to
use
question
words
+
to-infinitives2.
To
learn
to
use
must
and
have
to
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step1
Lead-inReview
readingDid
Gulliver
know
what
to
say Did
Gulliver
know
how
to
get
away 2.
Explain
:
We
can
use.
“wh-”
words
+
“to”
infinitives
to
talk
about
problems.Step2
Presentation1.Present
the
following
sentences:a.Millie
is
decciding
what
to
read.
b.Daniel
does
not
know
who
to
talk
to
about
this
bookc.Simon
forgot
when
to
meet
his
friends.d.Kitty
cannot
decide
which
to
choose
friends.
e.Sandy
is
windering
where
to
ask
for
help.f.Amy
does
not
know
how
to
write
the
reprt.2.Ask
the
students
to
conclude
the
rules,and
understand
the
mengings
of
the
stucture:
“wh-”
words
+
“to”
infinitives.
3.Remind
students
that
when
we
talk
about
“wh-”
words,
we
mean
question
words.
i.e.,
what,
when,
why,
where,
who,
how4.Remind
the
students
that
all
question
words
can
be
used
in
this
way,except
‘why’.Step3
practice
1.Explain
to
students
that
they
need
to
use
the
“wh-“
words
+to
do
structure
to
complete
the
exercise
on
page47.
2.Once
students
have
finished,
choose
one
student
to
play
the
part
of
Amy
and
another
student
to
play
the
part
of
Millie
.
Ask
them
to
read
the
conversation
aloud.
Check
for
incorrect
answers
and
mispronunciation.
For
weaker
classes,
ask
several
pairs
of
students
to
read
one
exchange
each.Step4
PresentationGo
on
reviewing
comic
strip
and
reading
to
lead
out
the
sentences
with
‘must’
and
‘have
to’.‘I
must
run
away
from
them,’
Gulliver
thought.I
have
to
use
them
to
reach
the
box
on
the
fridge.2.
Explain
to
the
students
that
we
use
‘must’
and
‘have
to’
to
say
that
it
is
necessary
to
do
something
.
we
use
‘must’
when
the
speaker
feels
that
someting
is
cecessary.
We
use
‘have
to’
when
the
situation
makes
something
cecessary.3.Present
you
must
not
smoke
in
the
library.
We
do
not
have
to
go
to
at
weekends.Explain
to
the
students
we
use
‘must
not’
to
say
that
it
is
necessary
not
to
do
something
.
we
use
‘do
not
have
to’
to
say
that
you
are
allowed
not
to
do
something.Step3
ExercisesFinish
the
exercises
on
page
48,
then
check
in
pairs.
Encourage
students
to
explain
the
usage
each
other.Step5
Doing
homeworkRevise“wh-”
words
+
“to”
infinitives.Finish
off
the
exercise
in
the
workbook.
Review
readingRead
the
sentences
then
say
out
the
structure
of
the
sentences.to
conclude
the
rules,and
understand
the
mengings
of
the
stucture:
“wh-”
words
+
“to”
infinitives.
to
use
the
“wh-“
words
+to
do
structure
to
complete
the
exercise
on
page47.
Read
the
sentences,
including
‘must’
and
‘have
to’.To
understand
the
usage
of
“must
and
have
to
”Finish
the
exercises
on
page
48,
then
check
in
pairs.
Encourage
students
to
explain
the
usage
each
other.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Get
the
Ss
to
find
out
some
sentences
,including
wh-+
to
infinitive.and
they
can
say
out
the
components
in
the
sentences.Then
learn
to
use
them.They
can
understand
the
differences
between
“must
and
have
to
.”
课堂达标
一、根据句意及中英文提示完成单词或短语。1.—Have
you
ever
read
the
film_____________
(评论)
？
—Yes,
it’s
good.2.
Every
day
students
should
get
to
school
and
get
home
________________
(准时).3.
___________
(交；递)
in
your
homework
as
soon
as
possible，children.4.
Amy
hasn’t
finished
reading
the
book,
so
she
wants
to___________
(续借)it.5.
You
should
_________________
(give
back)
the
book
to
Tom
this
afternoon.6.
Who
has
_____________(推荐)
so
many
interesting
books
to
you 7.
It’s
_____________(惊叹)
to
travel
around
the
world
in
eight
days.二、用括号中所给动词的适当形式填空。1.
Mr
Li
showed
us
what
_________________(do)
first.2.
Sandy
didn’t
know
who
_____________(talk)
to
about
the
film.3.
We
mustn’t
____________(smoke)
in
the
library.4.
The
Whites
are
discussing
which
color
______________(paint)
the
walls.5.
I
had
to
use
the
knife
________________(cut)
the
apple.三、单项选择(
)1.
I
advised
__________
the
library
at
once.A.
him
to
leaving
for
B.
him
to
leave
for
C.
to
leaving
for
D.
to
leave
for(
)2.
Mr
Wu
often
tells
us
__________
in
the
river.
It’s
dangerous.A.don’t
swim
B.
not
to
swim
C.
not
swim
D.
not
swimming(
)3.
Remember
____________
off
the
lights
when
you
leave
the
room.A.
to
turning
B.
turn
C.
turning
D.
to
turn(
)4.
I
haven’t
decided
when
____________
a
holiday
yet.A.took
B.taking
C.
to
take
D.
take(
)5.
Students
in
our
school
________
know
shouting
is
not
allowed
in
the
reading
room.A.can
B.
must
C.
may
D.
need
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Grammar1.
a.Millie
is
decciding
what
to
read.
b.Daniel
does
not
know
who
to
talk
to
about
this
bookc.Simon
forgot
when
to
meet
his
friends.d.Kitty
cannot
decide
which
to
choose
friends.
e.Sandy
is
windering
where
to
ask
for
help.f.Amy
does
not
know
how
to
write
the
reprt.“wh-“
words
+to
do2.
a.‘I
must
run
away
from
them,’
Gulliver
thought.b.I
have
to
use
them
to
reach
the
box
on
the
fridge.‘must’
and
‘have
to’
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）After
studying
the
grammar
,
the
Ss
can
master
wh-+
to
infinitive
and
can
say
out
the
components
in
the
sentences.they
learn
about
using
a
verb
+
object
before
a
question
word
with
a
to-infinitive
like
some
verbs:advise,ask,
decide,
discuss,find
out,
forget,
know,
learn
remember,
say,
show,teach,think,
understand,
wonder
ect.and
they
can
master
the
differences
between
“must
an
d
have
to
”and
they
can
use
them
correctly.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：Be
able
to
make
a
chart
about
a
countryBe
able
to
introduce
a
country过程与方法：情感态度与价值观：
教学重点难点
Making
a
chart
to
introduce
a
country
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Lead-inCan
you
say
something
about
the
UK the
British
MuseumBuckingham
PalaceThe
Lake
DistrictElizabeth
TowerTower
BridgeStep
2
PresentationAmy
wants
to
introduce
the
UK
to
her
friends.
She
collected
some
information
on
the
Internet
and
made
a
chart.If
you
want
to
introduce
a
country,
what
can
you
talk
about We
can
talk
about
its
location,
capital,
history,
places
of
interest,
the
best
time
to
visit,
weather,
money
and
so
on.We
can
also
talk
about
its
culture,
festivals,
people,
famous
universities
and
food.Step3
ReadingAmy
has
written
an
introduction
to
the
UK.
Read
her
article.Read
the
introduction
and
answer
the
following
questions.What
is
the
UK
made
up
of It
is
made
up
of
England,
Scotland,
Wales
and
Northern
Ireland2.
What
is
the
capital
of
the
UK,
and
how
is
it London.
It
is
big
and
modern.
3.
Which
palace
is
the
most
famous
in
the
UK
Why Buckingham
palace.
It
has
been
the
home
of
kings
and
queens
for
a
long
time.4.
When
is
the
best
time
to
visit
the
UK
And
why
From
May
to
September
because
its
winter
is
wet
and
cold.
5.
How
is
the
weather
in
the
UK
What
should
you
do The
weather
changes
often
there.
It
is
sunny
one
minute,
but
rainy
the
next,
so
prepare
for
it
before
you
go
there.
6.
Which
kind
of
money
do
people
use People
use
pounds
there,
not
RMB
or
dollars!Step
4
WritingPick
a
country
that
interests
you
and
make
a
chart
to
organize
your
ideas.
Then
write
an
introduction.
You
can
add
some
pictures
to
make
it
more
interesting.Tip:
You
can
search
for
information
on
the
Internet
or
in
the
library.
Useful
expressionsIt
is
a/an
...
country.the
capital
city,
is
big
and
modern/beautiful.
There
are/is
...
on/in
…It
has
always
been
famous
for
....The
best
time
to
visit...
is
....The
weather
often/seldom
changes
....Step
6
HomeworkFinish
the
introduction.Finish
《课课练》U3
Period
6.
课堂达标
一、用括号中所给单词的适当形式填空1.The
headmaster
is
showing
some
(travel)
around
our
school
.2.I
have
just
bought
a
new
(print
)3.Can
you
(read
)the
menu
on
the
table
for
me
4.How
many
(character)
are
there
in
your
novel
5.My
new
computer
is
much
(fast)
than
the
old
one
.6.Jim
(make
)
many
friends
since
he
(come)to
china
.7.The
q
is
the
king’s
wife.8.Many
people
love
(美元)。They
think
they
can
buy
everything
all
over
the
world.9.He
works
in
a
big
IT
(公司)二、选择题1.---
have
you
known
the
city ---for
five
years.A.how
long
B.how
often
C.how
many
D.how
much2.We
have
to
listen
carefully
to
learn
China
in
class.A.the
history
of
B.history
of
C.the
history
to
D.history
to3.I
bought
some
books
for
my
friends
and
they
me
50
yuan.A.spent
B.paid
C.cost
D.used4.---Can
I
see
the
headmaster
at
the
moment
,please
---I’m
afraid
not
.
He
out
.He
in
10
minutes.A.goes;comes
B.gone
;came
C.will
go
;will
come
D.has
gone
;will
come
back
5.---Do
you
mind
me
smoking
here
---
.look
at
the
sign
.it
says
,No
smoking”
A.It
doesn’t
matter
B.No,I
don’t
C.You’d
better
not
D.Never
mind
板书设计
8下Unit
3
Online
tours
Task1.
Para
1
Introduce
the
country
simply
Para
2
Introduce
the
views
of
the
country
Para
3
Introduce
the
climate
of
the
country2.
Useful
expressions:It
is
a/an
...
country....,
the
capital,
is
big
and
modern
/
beautiful.It
has
always
been
famous
for
...There
are/is
...
on
/
in
...The
best
time
to
visit
...
is
...The
weather
often
/
seldom
changes
...
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
deals
with
the
way
of
writing
about
the
trip.Ss
are
main
ly
trained
how
to
write
the
article
about
the
holiday
activities
and
expressions.Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
make
positive
statements;2.
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
make
negative
statements;3.
use
the
present
perfect
tense
to
ask
and
answer
questions;
教学重点
New
words
and
phrases:
yet,
recently,
past,
over
the
past
century
教学难点
1.
To
use
the
present
perfect
tense
correctly.2.
To
form
the
past
participles
of
regular
and
irregular
verbs
教学方法
Teach
and
exercise.
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
Lead-inStep2
Presentation
Step3
PracticeStep4
Summary
Translate
the
sentences.Try
to
find
out
the
structures
of
the
present
perfect
tense.Try
to
write
down
the
forms
of
these
words.Look
at
the
pictures
on
the
screen
and
discuss
and
learn.After
listening
to
the
teacher’s
explanation,
try
to
retell
these
key
structures.Finish
Part
A
&
Part
B
&
Part
C
on
P
14.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.
Free
talk1.
Structure
of
the
present
perfect
tensesb.
+
have/has
+
done
2.
When
to
use
the
present
perfect
tense3.
Matching
exercise4.
Work
out
the
rule4.
Time
expressions5.
Pair
work
6.
Competition
Finish
Part
C
Pair
work
WritingPresent
a
mind
map
and
help
students
to
review
the
present
perfect
tense.
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
1.
Review
the
present
perfect
tense.
2.
Remember
the
past
participles
of
the
irregular
verbs
on
Page
13.
教学反思Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
understand
the
differences
between
facts
and
opinions;2.
grasp
the
waysto
state
opinions;3.
use
facts
to
support
our
opinions.
教学重点
New
phrases:
be/get
used
to,
on
my
own
教学难点
1.
To
learn
to
how
to
state
opinions.
2.
To
learn
to
use
facts
to
support
opinions.
教学方法
Improve
the
listening
skills
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
Lead-inStep2
PresentationStep3
PresentationStep4
Practice
Free
talk
in
class.Look
at
the
pictures
on
the
screen
and
get
to
understand
their
main
meanings.After
listening
to
the
teacher’s
explanation,
try
to
identify
sentences.Finish
Part
A
&
Part
B
on
P
17.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.
Free
talk1.
Changes
in
Starlight
Town
T:
Look
at
the
picture
about
Starlight
Town
and
answer
the
following
questions.T:
The
answers
to
Question
1
are
all
facts
about
the
changes
in
Starlight
Town.2.
Group
discussion3.
Facts
or
opinions Finish
Part
A.
Read
the
sentences
below.
Write
an
F
for
a
fact
or
an
O
for
an
opinion.Work
out
the
rule
1.
Finish
Part
B2.
Language
points
3.
Reorganize
sentences
into
a
passage4.
Group
work
5.
WritingT:
Suppose
you’ve
moved
to
a
new
school.
Please
write
about
the
changes
in
your
life
and
state
your
opinions.
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
Write
about
other
changes
in
your
life.
Remember
to
use
the
facts
to
support
your
opinions.
教学反思Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、单项选择
(共15小题;
每小题1分，共15分)
(
)
1.
---
Is
there
________
African
elephant
in
_______
zoo
---
Maybe
there
is.
A.
a;
the
B.
an;
the
C./;
the
D.
an;
a(
)
2.
We
can
type
words
with
a
_______.
A.
screen
B.
keyboard
C.
mouse
D.
printer(
)
3.---
What
______
Daniel
______
---
He
is
tall
and
strong.
A.
does:
like
B.
did;
like
C.
does;
look
like
D.
is;
look
like(
)
4.
I
haven’t
been
to
the
temple(寺庙)
_______
the
top
of
the
hill.
But
I
know
you
can
get
to
the
top
_______
fifteen
minutes
by
cable
car(缆车).A.
at;
in
B.
in;
in
C.
at;
for
D.
on;
after(
)
5.
---
I’m
going
to
Dalian
for
my
May
Day
holiday
and
I
have
_____
a
seaside
hotel.
---
Really
Have
a
good
time.A.
booked
B.
bought
C.
had
D.
prepared(
)
6.
Millie
________
her
homework
just
now.
But
I
______
mine.
I
shouldn’t
watch
TV
first.
A.
has
finished;
haven’t
finished
B.
finished;
don’t
finish
C.
finished;
haven’t
finished
D.
has
finished;
didn’t
finish(
)
7.
I
saw
Daniel
________
videos
when
I
walked
past
his
house.
A.
watch
B.
was
watching
C.
has
watched
D.
watching(
)
8.
---
Why
do
so
many
people
search
for
information
on
the
Internet
---
_______.
A.
Because
it
is
easier
and
faster
B.
Because
there
are
no
mistakes
C.
Because
it
is
wonderful
D.
Because
it
is
cheap
and
exciting(
)
9.
---
________
this
today,
everyone.
---
Great.
We
can
go
home
now.
A.
Prepare
for
B.
Talk
about
C.
So
much
for
D.
Think
about(
)
10.
---
Where
is
Mike
---
He
_____to
New
York
on
business.
He
_______
the
airport
at
five
in
the
morning
.A.
has
gone;
has
left
for
B.
has
been;
has
left
for
C.
has
gone;
left
for
D.
has
been;
left
for(
)
11.
The
new
computer
game
________
Travel
in
Space.
A.
called
B.
calls
C.
is
called
D.
is
calling(
)
12.
---
How
many
students
are
there
in
each
group
---
Usually
each
group
_______
six
students
in
our
class.
A.
is
made
from
B.
is
made
up
of
C.
is
made
in
D.
is
made
of(
)
13.
My
family
will
have
a
______
holiday
in
Australia.
I
really
want
to
see
the
Sydney
Opera
House.A.
two
week's
B.
two
weeks
C.
two
weeks'
D.
two-weeks
(
)
14.
---
Thanks
for
showing
me
how
to
start
this
online
tour.
---_______.
A.
Never
mind
B.
It
doesn’t
matter
C.
Of
course
not
D.
It’s
my
pleasure
(
)
15.
---
I
think
everyone
should
protect
our
earth.
---_______.
A.
I
have
no
idea
B.
Yes,
I
agree
C.
That’s
not
true
D.
That’s
all
right
二、完形填空（共15小题;
每小题1分，共15分）阅读下列短文，从文后各题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。
Do
you
have
the
ability
to
live
cheaply
Now
here's
a
true
story
of
an
American
girl,
Sarah.
1
Sarah
left
university,
she
began
to
live
in
New
York
City
on
her
own.
She
2
_
a
job
in
a
publishing
house,
but
the
salary(薪水)was
3
_
$30,
000
a
year.
Her
parents
thought
her
life
would
be
hard,
but
Sarah
4
_
live
on
her
salary
and
still
saved
$5,
000
in
a
year.
How
was
that
5
_
in
one
of
the
most
expensive
cities
in
the
world
Cheap
living
6
_
starts
with
keeping
the
big
cost
small.
For
most
people,
that
7
_
housing.
So
Sarah
chose
to
share
a
flat
with
three
other
friends.
Her
next
biggest
cost
was
8
_.
When
she
ate
out,
she
went
to
cheap
restaurants.
9
_
she
bought
a
$9.99
whole
chicken
at
a
local
restaurant.
She
then
10
_
the
chicken
bones(骨头)home
and
made
soup
out
of
them.
Nowadays
young
people
often
11
_
a
lot
of
money
on
entertainment(娱乐).
But
Sarah
said,
“I
enjoy
walking
12
_
in
New
York
City.
I
love
going
to
museums
and
parks.”
Did
Sarah
feel
poor
13
_
cheap
living
Not
really.
She
even
managed
to
take
two
trips,
one
to
the
Netherlands,
14
_
to
Portland.
“Don't
think
of
saving
money
as
something
15
_.
It's
a
kind
of
game,”
said
Sarah.(
)1．A．Until
B．Because
C．After
D．Unless(
)2．A．found
B．tried
C．asked
for
D．looked
for(
)3．A．more
than
B．less
than
C．shorter
than
D．higher
than(
)4．A．can
B．may
C．could
D．might(
)5．A．difficult
B．possible
C．useful
D．different(
)6．A．already
B．sometimes
C．hardly
D．always(
)7．A．helps
B．becomes
C．makes
D．means(
)8．A．food
B．rest
C．studying
D．playing(
)9．A．Soon
B．Finally
C．Once
D．Again(
)10．A．prepared
B．took
C．caught
D．picked(
)11．A．pay
B．lend
C．spend
D．save(
)12．A．along
B．up
C．down
D．around(
)13．A．by
B．up
C．at
D．between(
)14．A．another
B．the
other
C．others
D．the
others(
)15．A．hard
B．interesting
C．nice
D．great三、阅读理解（共5小题;
每小题2分，共10分）“If
you
want
to
see
a
thing
well,
reach
out
and
touch
it!”
That
may
seem
a
strange
thing
to
say.
But
touching
things
can
help
you
to
see
them
better.
Your
eyes
can
tell
you
that
a
glass
ball
is
round.
But
by
holding
it
in
your
hands,
you
can
feel
how
smooth
and
cool
the
ball
is.
You
can
feel
how
heavy
the
glass
is.
When
you
feel
all
these
about
the
ball,
you
really
see
it.
With
your
skin,
you
can
feel
better.
For
example,
your
fingers
can
tell
the
difference
between
two
coins
in
your
pocket.
You
can
feel
a
little
drop
of
water
on
the
back
of
your
hand,
too.
You
can
even
feel
sounds
against
your
skin.
Have
you
ever
wanted
to
know
why
some
people
like
very
loud
music
They
must
like
to
feel
the
sounds
of
music.All
children
soon
learn
what
“Don’t
touch!”
means.
They
hear
it
often.
Yet
most
of
us
keep
on
touching
things
as
we
grow
up.
In
shops,
we
touch
things
we
might
buy:
food,
clothes.
To
see
something
well,
we
have
to
touch
it.
The
bottoms
of
our
feet
can
feel
things,
too.
You
know
this
when
you
walk
on
warm
sand,
cool
grass
or
a
hard
floor.
All
feel
different
under
your
feet.
There
are
ways
of
learning
to
see
well
by
feeling.
One
way
is
to
close
your
eyes
and
try
to
feel
everything
that
is
touching
your
skin.
Feel
the
shoes
on
your
feet,
the
clothes
on
your
body,
the
air
on
your
skin.
At
first,
it
is
not
easy
to
feel
these
things.
You
are
too
used
to
them!
Most
museums
are
just
for
looking.
But
today
some
museums
have
some
things
to
touch.
Their
signs
say,
“Do
touch!”
There
you
can
feel
everything
on
show.If
you
want
to
see
better,
reach
out
and
touch.
Then
you
will
really
see!(
)
1.
By
touching
things
_______________.
A.
you
will
have
a
strange
feeling
B.
you
will
learn
how
to
reach
out
your
hand
C.
you
can
learn
more
about
them
D.
you
can
tell
what
colors
they
really
are
(
)
2.
Which
of
the
following
can
be
the
best
title
of
the
story
A.
Touching
by
Feeling
B.
To
See
Better—Feel
C.
To
See
or
to
Feel
D.
Ways
of
Feeling
(
)
3.
Which
of
the
following
parts
can
tell
you
the
difference
between
two
coins
in
your
pocket
A.
Your
fingers.
B.
Your
eyes.
C.
Your
skin.
D.
Your
back.
(
)
4.
What
can’t
your
skin
feel
A.
Sounds.
B. Coins.
C.
Water.
D.
Darkness.
(
)
5.
Which
of
the
following
is
NOT
true
A.
Touching
is
helping
us
to
see
better.
B.
Our
skins
may
help
us
enjoy
music.
C.
Visitors
can’t
feel
the
things
on
show
in
any
museums.
D.
People
don’t
have
to
learn
to
feel.四、词汇运用
(共18小题，每小题1分，共18分)A.根据句意或中英文提示写出句中所缺单词。1.
There
will
be
a
special
_____________
(节目)
on
Channel
8
tonight.
2.
I
was
on
vacation
last
week
and
didn't
_____________
(收到)
your
e-mail.3.
There
will
be
an
_____________
(国际的)
meeting
in
Shanghai
next
month.4.
China
does
a
lot
of _____________
(the
activity
of
buying
and
selling)
with
many
countries.
5.
There
are
_____________
(more
than
two)
students
doing
word
processing
in
the
computer
room.6.
I
haven’t
seen
such
a
_____________
(very
large)
ship.
Can
I
take
a
photo
with
it
7.
Black
is
the
_____________
of
white.B.
用方框中所给词的适当形式填空。south
far
it
mouse
twenty
1.
For
_____________
information
about
the
city,
you
can
click
on
the
“Tour”
icon.2.
I
think
the
best
season
to
visit
Qingdao
is
summer
because
_____________
temperature
is
not
too
high.3.
It
has
been
the
world-famous
business
centre
since
the
_____________
century.4.
Sansha
City
(三沙市)
is
at
the
_____________
end
of
China.5.
---
Can
I
help
you
---
I’d
like
two
_____________.
I’ve
bought
a
couple
of
computers.C.
用方框中所给动词的适当形式填空。search
gather
try
write
spend
stop
1.
It
_____________
raining.
Let’s
go
out
to
play
basketball.2.
Mr.
Wu______________
for
information
on
the
Internet
when
he
heard
the
sound.3.
The
farmer
workers_____________
together
outside
the
factory
for
their
pay
last
Monday.4.
---
Where’s
Simon
---
He
_____________an
email
to
his
friend
in
the
bedroom.5.
She
often
_____________
local
food
in
places
where
she
is
visiting,
such
as
the
famous
Tianjin
Baozi.6.
Andy
is
thinking
about
where
he
_____________
the
coming
weekend.五、句型转换（共5小题；每空0.5分，共6分）1.
He’s
back
to
her
office.
(改为一般疑问句)
__________
he
_________
to
her
office 2.
Mr
Wu
visited
Canada
in
2010
and
2011.(用twice替换句中的时间)
Mr
Wu
__________
_________
Canada
___________.3.
I
often
use
the
computer
to
do
word
processing.（对划线部分提问）________
do
you
often
use
the
computer__________
4.
This
bridge
is
strong.
It
has
a
long
history.
(保持句意不变)
This
is
a
_________
bridge
___________
a
long
history.5.
Kitty
came
to
Hong
Kong
two
days
ago.
(保持句意不变)
Kitty
_________
_________
_________
Hong
Kong
for
two
days.六、阅读与回答问题（共5小题；每小题2分，共10分）Wang
Fei，a
Chinese
student，and
Mary，an
American
student
studying
Chinese
in
China，were
in
a
supermarket．They
saw
a
young
man
walking
down
the
stairs．In
his
hurry，he
missed
the
last
two
steps
and
fell
onto
the
ground．He
tried
to
stand
up
while
people
around
him
laughed.
Luckily,
he
seemed
to
be
OK.
Mary
found
Wang
Fei
smiling
a
little
and
was
not
happy
about
it．“Tell
me，Fei，how
could
people
laugh
when
someone
fell
like
that
Why
didn’t
they
go
up
and
ask
him
if
he
was
hurt ’’Wang
Fei
said，“Because
they
knew
he
wasn’t
hurt
too
much．”“But
I
still
don’t
understand．A
fall
is
a
fall．In
my
culture．people
would
never
laugh!”This
is
an
example．The
Chinese
and
the
westerner
will
think
and
act
differently
when
seeing
such
a
thing．Chinese
people
are
used
to
laughing
or
smiling．Very
often
the
person
who
is
in
embarrassing（困窘的）situation
would
also
laugh
or
smile
to
get
out
of
it．However，if
someone
gets
hurt
seriously，it
will
not
be
a
laughing
matter
any
more．People
will
help
him
or
her
instead．But，in
that
case，a
westerner
will
rush
over
and
help
the
person
get
up．If
a
westerner
falls，he
or
she，like
a
Chinese
person，may
try
to
make
a
joke
if
he
or
she
is
not
hurt．If
two
close
friends
are
walking
together，and
one
falls
but
clearly
isn't
hurt，a
common
joke
is
to
say
“Have
a
nice
trip”．So
different
people
have
different
habits
and
different
countries
have
different
cultures．1．Where
is
Mary
from
__________________________________________________________2．Why
didn't
people
go
up
and
ask
the
young
man
if
he
was
hurt
__________________________________________________________3．What
do
Chinese
people
often
do
when
they
find
themselves
in
embarrassing
situation
__________________________________________________________4．What
is
a
westerner
likely
to
do
when
he
or
she
sees
someone
fall
down
__________________________________________________________5．What
might
Mary
say
to
Wang
Fei
if
he
fell
but
clearly
was
not
hurt
__________________________________________________________七、短文填空
根据短文内容及首字母提示补全单词。（共6空；每空1分，共6分）Welcome
to
my
website!
Here
you
can
travel
around
the
world
without
a
(1)
p_________!
All
you
need
to
doo
is
choose
a
place
and
click
on
the
iron.
Then
you
can
visit
and
experience
different
places
and
cultures
through
your
computer
(2)
s__________.
So
you
have
(3)
p__________
the
UK,
right
How
much
do
you
know
about
this
place
The
UK
is
an
(4)
E__________
country.
Its
money
is
the
British
(5)
p__________.
It
is
one
of
the
most
popular
places
in
the
world
among
travelers.
There
are
many
world-famous
sights
in
the
UK,
such
as
Big
Ben
and
the
British
Museum.
The
(6)
Q__________
is
perhaps
the
most
famous
person
in
the
UK.
She
has
ruled
the
UK
for
over
60
years.
八、汉译英（共5小题；每小题2分，共10分）1.中央公园是人们辛苦工作一天后放松的好去处。（a
good
place
to…）
_____________________________________________________________________________2.我们可以通过在线旅行实现环游世界的梦想。(realize
the
dream
of…)_____________________________________________________________________________3.
想了解这个城市，请单击页面底端“相机”图标。（click
on…）
_____________________________________________________________________________4.
英国一直以来因博物馆而出名。（be
famous…）
_____________________________________________________________________________5.
你介意和我一起去那片草坪吗？(Would
you
mind
)_____________________________________________________________________________九、书面表达
(10分）根据下表提示，写一篇有关国内旅游的指南，可以适当发挥。要求语言通顺，条理清晰，词数不少于80.ChinaAboutthe
countrylocationIn
AsiaBeijing,
the
capitalOld
and
bigpopulationthe
largest
number
of
people
in
the
worldPlaces
to
visitBeijingVisit
the
Palace
Museum,
try
Beijing
duckXi’anSee
the
Terracotta
Warriors
and
Horses,
visit
museums,...GuilinEnjoy
the
unique
landscape
and
the
beautiful
Li
RiverOthersWeatherVery
different
around
the
countryLanguageChineseMoneyRMB________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences
.they
can
use
“
the
differences
between
the
simple
past
tense
and
the
present
perfect
tense
”skillfully.
but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,
they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
1
Past
and
present
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
talk
about
the
changes
around
us;2.
talk
about
the
changes
of
transport;
3.
get
to
know
the
present
perfect
tense;
教学重点
1.
To
talk
about
different
transport
at
different
times.2.
To
get
to
know
the
present
perfect
tense.
教学难点
1.
New
words
and
phrases:
past,
present,
just,
used
to2.
talk
about
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
of
change.
教学方法
Use
pictures
to
help
them
learn
different
expressions.
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
Lead-inStep2
PresentationStep3
PracticeStep4
PresentationStep5
PracticeStep6
Practice
Free
talk
in
class.Look
at
the
pictures
on
the
screen
and
name
their
names
and
their
jobs.After
listening
to
the
teacher’s
explanation,
try
to
act
out
the
dialogue
in
groups
by
using
correct
tenses.Check
the
preview.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.After
answering
the
questions,
the
students
discuss
in
groups
and
show
their
thoughts.Learn
more
about
it.Discuss
and
guess
the
meanings
of
these
sentences.Help
the
students
to
learn
the
names.
1.
Work
in
groups
and
talk
about
the
changes
around
us2.
Present
pictures
to
help
students
know
the
changes
around
us1.
Talk
about
changes
in
Eddie
and
Hobo2.
Listen
and
answer
1.
Listen
and
read
2.
Read
and
fill
in
the
blanks
3.
Role-play4.
Read
and
translate6.
New
structure:
used
to
do
sth.1.
Free
talk2.Different
forms
of
transport4.
Listen
and
answer
1.
Free
talk2.
Play
a
guessing
game3.Advantages
and
disadvantages
of
change
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
1.Remember
the
new
words,phrases
and
structures.2.
Preview
Reading.
教学反思Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
name
the
different
parts
of
a
computer.2.
To
grasp
and
talk
about
the
basic
uses
of
computers.3.
To
know
the
main
topic
of
this
unit.过程与方法：To
use
pictures
to
learn
the
names
part
of
the
computer.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
spend
proper
time
on
playing
computer.
教学重点难点
Different
parts
of
a
computerDifferent
uses
of
computers
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Free
talkDo
you
often
watch
TV What’s
your
favorite
TV
programme What
channel
do
you
like
best What
do
you
use
to
change
the
channel Do
you
like
playing
online
computer
games Step
2
PracticeListen
to
the
dialogue
between
Eddie
and
Hobo
and
answer
the
following
questions:(1).
Have
Hobo
and
Eddie
ever
seen
a
computer (2).
What
does
Eddie
think
the
mouse
is (3).
What’re
the
differences
between
the
remote
control
and
the
mouse 2.
Read
and
act
out
the
dialogue.Step
3
Presentation
Do
you
know
the
names
of
different
parts
of
the
computer Keyboard,
main
unit,
menu,
screen,
mouse,
CD
–
ROM
,
hard
disk,
USB
drive/flash
drive,
speaker
Step
4
PracticeAnnie,
Simon's
cousin,
wants
to
learn
about
the
different
parts
of
a
computer.
Look
at
the
picture
in
Part
A
and
help
her
write
the
correct
answers
in
the
boxes.Fill
in
the
blanks.(1).
A
__________
is
used
for
typing
information
into
computer.(2).
A
_______
is
used
for
moving
the
cursor
(光标)
on
the
screen.(3).
A
_________
of
a
computer
looks
like
a
big
heavy
box.
(4).
We
can
see
words
and
pictures
on
the
_______.3.
Complete
the
dialogue
between
Simon
and
AnnieSimon
:
My
new
computer
is
much
faster
than
the
old
one.
I
can
type
very
easily,
and
the
_________
is
very
comfortable.Annie
:
How
do
you
know
what
you
should
do
when
you
look
at
the
_______ Simon:
With
the
______,
you
can
choose
one
icon
in
the
______
and
click
on
it
for
more
details.Annie:
Oh.
I
see.
How
can
your
teacher
read
your
homework
on
the
computer Simon:
I
can
send
him
e-mails
or
print
it
out.Annie:
Do
you
have
a
smart
_________,
too Simon:
Yes,
and
it
is
the
latest
type.Step
5
Presentation1.
What
do
you
use
your
computer
for/
to
do
I
use
it
to
(do)
…/for
(doing)…draw
and
design/play
gamessearch
for
information/do
word
processing
/listen
to
musicsend
and
receive
e-mails/shop
onlinesee
a
film/chat
with
friends
online…2.
Simon
and
Daniel
are
talking
about
the
different
uses
of
computers.
Work
in
pairs
and
ask
each
other
what
you
use
a
computer
for.
The
ideas
in
the
box
may
help
you.
Use
the
conversation
in
Part
B
as
a
model.Step
6
HomeworkRecite
the
dialogues.Preview
Reading.
Discuss
then
answer
the
questions.Listen
to
the
dialogue
between
Eddie
and
Hobo
and
answer
the
questions:Learn
the
names
of
different
parts
of
the
computerComplete
the
dialogue
between
Simon
and
Annie.Answer
the
questions
according
to
truth.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Ask
some
Ss
to
write
the
answers
of
exercises
in
the
preview
paper.The
Ss
explain
the
answers
then
ask
the
Ss
to
correct
mistakes.The
Ss
say
out
the
main
points
in
this
lesson.
课堂达标
一、用所给的单词的适当形式填空1.
You
use
this
set
of
keys
for
_________
(type).2.
You
use
the
screen______________(show)
information
on
it.3.
The
printer
is
used
for_____________(put)
information
onto
paper..二、选择题。
(
)1.---______does
your
son
use
computer
________
---
Drawing
and
designing.A.
How;
on
B.
How;
\
C.
What;
for
D.
What;\(
)2.You’d
better
change
the
channel.
It’s
too
_____.A.
interesting
B.
bored
C.
pleased
D.
boring
(
)3.In
the
exam,
the
_____
you
are,
the
________
mistakes
you’ll
make。
A.
careful;
little
B.
more
careful;
less
C.
more
careful;
few
D.
more
careful;
fewer
(
)4.
---______
do
you
give
the
bird
a
cabbage
leaf
---Every
time
when
I
get
back
from
work.
A.
How
long
B.
How
much
C.
How
often
D.
How
soon
(
)5.
---The
cloud
looks
like
a
horse.
Do
you
think
so
---Yes,
I
_________.
A.understand
B.know
C.
mean
D.
agree三、根据中文用所给单词的适当形式填空。1.We
can
use
computers
for__________________________(查信息).2.We
can
use
computers
to________________________________
(收发电子邮件).3.We
can
use
computers
to_____________________________(文字处理).4.We
can
use
computers
for____________________(看录像).5.
It
(看起来像)
a
televiseon.
板书设计
8下
Unit
3
Online
tours
comic
and
strip﹠welcome
to
the
unit1.
keyboard
main
unit
mouse
screen2.
chat
with
friends
do
word
processingplay
games
search
for
informationsending
and
receive
emails
watch
videos
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）In
this
period
we
mainly
introduce
the
uses
of
computers
and
arouse
Ss’interest
in
learning
this
section.
Teacher
can
work
on
the
real
computers
to
show
the
different
uses
of
a
computer
.Ss
are
expected
to
expand
their
vocabulary
about
computers.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
According
to
the
logical
order2.
Write
a
report
about
an
Indian
girl
过程与方法：1.To
talk
about
UNICEF
in
groups
2.to
discuss
what
we
should
do
for
UNICEF.情感态度与价值观：
To
train
the
Ss
to
devote
their
love
to
UNICEF.
教学重点难点
1.
According
to
the
logical
order2.
Write
a
report
about
an
Indian
girl
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
ReviewFinish
these
sentences.1.
他们通过组织一些募集资金的活动募捐钱款。They
raised
money
___
__________
fund-raising
activities.2. 我决定省一些钱捐给希望工程。I
________
___
______
some
money
__
______
__
Project
Hope.3. 妈妈告诉我污染是世界上最严重的问题之一。My
mother
told
me
pollution
is
____
__
the
world’s
_____
_______
_________.4.
Sandy过去常开车旅行，因为她害怕飞行。Sandy
____
___
_______
by
car
because
she
is_______
___flying.5. 她们为这些穷孩子提供水、食物，以便他们能更加健康They
_______
water
and
food
___
the
poor
children
__
____
they
can
be
healthier.6. 失明影响着全世界大约445万的人们,
主要是贫困国家。________
______
44.5
million
people
around
the
world,
______
in
poor
countries.
7. 不好的消息是很多人没有钱医治。The
bad
news
is
_____
many
people
____
____
______
money
for
the
treatment.8.
雨下得太大了,以致于人们不能继续在外面干活。It
rained
___
_______
_____
people
couldn’t
___
___
_________
outside.Step
2
New
wordssecretary
n.
秘书,
India
n.
印度,
officer
n.
官员Step
3
Leading
inWhat
does
this
logo
stand
for
ORBIS即国际奥比斯组织。国际奥比斯组织
(Project
Orbis
--
ORBIS)
是一个致力于为世界各国盲人和眼疾患者恢复光明的国际性慈善机构，它的宗旨是“使全球失明者重见光明”。Would
you
like
to
do
charity
work What
would
you
like
to
do
for
others Can
you
help
others
solve
their
problems Step
4
Finish
the
Part
AA.
Amy
wants
to
write
about
the
work
of
an
ORBIS
nurse
called
Diana
for
her
class
presentation.
She
found
these
pictures
of
Diana.
Can
you
describe
these
pictures
in
your
own
words 1.
Diana
was
a
secretary
of
a
company.
2.
She
was
afraid
of
flying.3.
She
learnt
about
ORBIS.
4.
She
trained
as
a
nurse.5.
She
works
for
ORBIS.
6.
She
enjoys
her
work.Step
5
Finish
the
Part
B1.
B.
Amy
wrote
a
report
on
Diana
and
her
charity
work.
Read
her
article
and
complete
the
table.
Remember
to
put
one
word
in
each
blank.Changes
in
Diana’s
lifeIn
the
pastworked
as
a
(1)
_______was
afraid
of
(2)
________learnt
about
ORBIS
on
(3)
________trained
as
a
(4)
______
and
attended
(5)
______
after
workAt
presentgets
used
to
(6)
________
by
plane(7)
________
being
able
to
help
people
see
againmakes
her
life
more
(8)
________Keys:
1.
secretary
2.
flying
3.
TV
4.
nurse
5.
courses6.
traveling
7.
enjoys
8.
meaningful2.
Listen
and
read
Amy’s
report.Diana
was
once
a
secretary
of
a
big
company,
she
lived
in
a
comfortable
flat
and
drove
to
work.
She
travelled
to
many
places,
but
she
seldom
took
the
plane.
She
was
afraid
of
flying.One
day,
Diana
saw
a
TV
programme
about
ORBIS.
She
learned
about
the
Flying
Eye
Hospital.
She
wanted
to
help
poor
people
with
eye
problems
see
again,
so
she
made
up
here
mind
to
train
as
a
nurse
and
attended
courses
after
work.Diana
is
working
for
ORBIS
now.
She
has
to
travel
over
300
days
a
year.
She
is
getting
used
to
travelling
by
plane.Diana
enjoys
her
work.
She
is
glad
to
be
able
to
help
people
see
again.
She
does
not
have
as
much
money
as
before,
but
she
thinks
her
life
is
more
meaningful.3.
Try
to
retell
the
report.Diana
was
once
…One
day,
…Now,
…Diana
thinks
that
…Step
6
Language
points1.
She
wanted
to
help
poor
people
with
eye
problems
see
again,
so
she
made
up
her
mind
to
train
as
a
nurse
and
attended
courses
after
work.
短语make
up
one’s
mind
意思是“作出决定，下定决心”。如：2.
She
is
getting
used
to
travelling
by
plane.
短语be/get
used
to
something/doing
something意思是“习惯于，适应”。如：Step
7
WritingDo
you
still
remember
UNICEF C.
You
want
to
write
a
report
on
the
work
of
UNICEF.
Search
for
information
on
the
Internet.
You
can
also
use
the
information
below.
Use
Amy’s
report
as
a
model.
Name:
MandeepCountry:
IndiaFamily:
many
children,
poorIn
the
past:
used
to
work
on
the
farm
all
day,
could
not
read
or
writeOne
day:
a
UNICEF
officer
came
and
learnt
about
the
conditions
of
the
local
people.Now:
entered
a
school,
can
read
and
writeFuture:
hopes
to
become
a
teacherSample
WritingMandeep
is
a
girl
from
India.
She
used
to
work
on
the
farm
all
day.
Her
family
had
many
children
and
was
very
poor,
so
Mandeep
did
not
go
to
school
and
she
could
not
read
and
write.One
day,
a
UNICEF
worker
came
to
Mandeep’s
village
and
learnt
about
the
conditions
of
the
local
people.
He
said
it
was
important
for
children
to
receive
education.
He
wanted
all
the
children
in
the
village
to
learn
to
read.Three
weeks
later,
Mandeep
entered
a
local
school.
Now,
she
goes
to
school
every
day.
She
can
read
and
write.
She
enjoys
school
and
is
grateful
to
UNICEF
for
helping
her.Mandeep
says
that
she
hopes
to
become
a
teacher
in
the
future.Step
8
Homework.Writing:
Denny
是一名非洲的失明女孩，直到有一天ORBIS的志愿者医生坐着飞机来到她的家乡，她才获得了光明。她非常感谢ORBIS，所以想写一篇文章报道一下ORBIS医生是怎样帮助她的。
请根据她拟好的流程图，帮助她完成这篇报道并发表你对ORBIS的看法。请依据上面的流程图完成下面文章。Denny
_______________________________Denny
used
to
________________________One
day,
__________________________________________________________________Now
______________________________________________________________________Denny
wants__________________________
Finish
these
sentences.To
learn
some
new
words.Answer
some
questions.describe
these
pictures
in
your
own
words.Read
her
article
and
complete
the
table.
Remember
to
put
one
word
in
each
blank.Listen
and
read
Amy’s
report.Try
to
retell
the
report.To
learn
to
use
the
language
points.use
the
information
below
and
Amy’s
report
as
a
model
to
write
something
about.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
something
about
UNICEFF.To
get
the
Ss
to
talk
about
some
pictures
in
Part
A
and
read
some
sentences
below
the
pictures.Read
Amy’s
report
and
understand
the
meaning
of
it
.To
try
to
write
a
report
on
the
work
of
UNICEF.Give
the
Ss
ten
minutes
to
write
a
report,
then
show
in
front.
课堂达标
三.根据句意及汉语提示完成单词1.
The
girl
with
long
hair
is
a
(秘书)
of
my
company.2.
I
have
made
up
my
(决心)
to
work
hard.3.
A
UNICEF
(官员)came
and
learnt
about
the
living
conditions
of
the
local
people.4.
Mandeep
comes
from
(印度).5.
Let’s
(检查)
the
machine.6.
Are
you
afraid
of
(坐飞机) 四．单项选择(
)1.
By
children
to
from
good
habits,
we
hope
they
can
become
great
people.
A.
train
B.
training
C.
trains
D.
trained(
)2.
–Would
you
mind
the
music
a
little
Don’t
you
think
it’s
too
loud
–Sorry!
I’ll
do
it
in
a
minute.
A.
turning
on
B.
turning
in
C.
turning
up
D.
turning
down(
)3.
–I’m
very
sorry,Alllen.
I
can’t
find
your
favourite
CD.
–
,Tom.
I’ll
go
and
buy
another
one.
A.
It
doesn’t
matter
B.
Don’t
say
that
C.
Sure
D.
You
are
kidding(
)4.Nothing
can
me
from
doing
this.
Which
of
the
following
words
CANNOT
be
used
A.
keep
B.
prevent
C.
stop
D.
protect(
)5.
the
machine
for
keeping
the
house
warm
A.
Do;
use
B.
Is;
using
C.
Is;
used
D.
Did;
use
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Task1.
She
wanted
to
help
poor
people
with
eye
problems
see
again,
so
she
made
up
her
mind
to
train
as
a
nurse
and
attended
courses
after
work.
短语make
up
one’s
mind
意思是“作出决定，下定决心”。2.
She
is
getting
used
to
travelling
by
plane.
短语be/get
used
to
something/doing
something意思是“习惯于，适应”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）In
this
period,
the
students
will
be
trained
to
improve
their
writing
abilities
based
on
the
writing
reports.
They
can
also
develop
their
ideas
of
working
for
charities.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、单项填空(10分)
(
)
1.
-Many
trees
_______
last
year.
-Yes,
we
must
do
something
to
stop
people
from
doing
that.
A.
are
cut
down
B.
have
cut
down
C.
were
cutting
down
D.
were
cut
down(
)
2.
-May
we
leave
the
classroom
now
-No,
you
_______.
You
_______
to
leave
until
the
bell
rings.
A.
can't;
aren't
allowed
B.
mustn't;
are
allowed
C.
needn't;
are
allowed
D.
needn't;
aren't
allowed(
)
3.
-Which
sport
are
you
in
at
the,
school
sports
meeting
-No
decision
yet.
I
think
it
_______
after
discussing
it
with
Mr
Zhao.
A.
was
decided
B.
will
be
decided
C.
will
decide
D.
is
decided(
)4.
-Would
you
like
_______
the
environment
-Yes,
I'd
love
to.
A.
help
protect
B.
helping
protecting
C.
to
help
protecting
D.
to
help
protect(
)
5.
The
heavy
rain
___so
many
traffic
accidents
on
the
highway
last
Monday.
A.
made
B.
allowed
C.
caused
D.
let(
)6.
If
drivers
are
careful
enough,
most
accidents
_______.
A.
can
prevent
B.
can
be
prevented
C.
need
prevent
D.
will
prevent(
)7.
A
lot
of
new
roads
_______
in
order
to
develop
the
villages
in
the
next
five
years.
A.
are
going
to
build
B.
is
built
C.
will
build
D.
are
going
to
be
built(
)8.
The
visitors
are
very
_______
to
see
so
many
changes
_______.
A.
surprised;
are
taken
place
B.
surprising;
take
place
C.
surprised;
take
place
D.
surprising;
are
taken
place
(
)9.
We
can
ask
people
____
the
environment
by
__
them
the
beauty
of
nature.
A.
protecting;
showing
B.
to
protect;
showing
C.
to
protect;
to
show
D.
protecting;
to
show
(
)10.
-You'd
better
not
eat
too
much
salt.
It's
bad
for
your
health.
-
_______.
A.
Not
at
all
B.
You're
welcome
C.
It
doesn't
matter
D.
Thanks
for
your
advice
(
)1
l.
-Put
_______
waste
bag
into
the
dustbin,
please.
-It's
not
_______
waste
bag.
It's
my
shopping
bag.
A.
the;
a
B.
a;
the
C.
a;
a
D.
/;
the(
)12.
The
factory
______
its
waste
into
the
river,
but
now
it
recycles
the
waste
in
a
new
way.
A.
used
to
put
B.
is
used
to
put
C.
used
to
putting
D.
is
used
to
putting(
)13.
-We
must
act
now
because
time
is
_______.
-Yes.
Let's
start.
A.
coming
out
B.
giving
out
C.
cutting
out
D.
running
out(
)
14.
-You
_______
be
happy
with
the
strong
public
support
you've
received.
-Yes,
you're
right.
I'm
really
excited.
A.
must
B.
may
C.
can
D.
need(
)
15.
-What's
the
name
of
the
song
you
sang
just
now
It
_______
beautiful.
-It
is
When
Christmas
Comes
to
Town
.
A.
was
sounded
B.
sounded
C.
was
heard
D.
heard二、完形填空（10分）The
world
is
divided
into
two
parts.
One
half
of
the
world
is
rich
and
the
16
half
is
poor.
In
the
poor
part,
a
lot
of
people
17
get
enough
to
eat.
When
they
are
ill,
none
of
the
hospitals
can
18
them
because
they
have
not
money.
In
the
rich
part,
a
lot
of
people
eat
too
much.
For
example,
a
dog
19
a
cat
in
North
America
eats
better
than
a
child
in
the
poorer
countries.
The
poor
countries
have
some
20
problems.
Sometimes
the
land
is
too
poor
to
grow
21
on.
People
there
have
neither
rich
land
nor
enough
water.
The
land
can
be
made
better,
22
a
lot
of
things
must
be
done.
The
people
must
be
taught
and
water
must
be
found.But
rich
countries
have
23
,
too.
There
are
not
always
good
places
to
live
in.
Sometimes
the
air
is
not
clean
and
the
rivers
are
too
24
to
swim
in
or
to
drink.
The
roads
and
streets
are
full
of
people
and
buses.
Cars
and
buses
have
to
move
25
.
There
is
too
much
noise.
Something
must
be
done
about
these
problems.
The
air
and
the
rivers
must
be
cleaned
and
be
kept
clean.
More
houses
have
to
be
built.
But
these
can’t
be
done
easily.(
)
16.
A.
other
B.
another
C.
others
D.
rest
(
)17.
A.
usually
B.
always
C.
often
D.
never
(
)
18.
A.
worry
B.
receive
C.
show
D.
protect(
)
19.
A.
like
B.
as
C.
or
D.
and(
)
20.
A.
difficult
B.
interesting
C.
important
D.
different
(
)
21.
A.
everything
B.
something
C.
nothing
D
.
anything
(
)
22.
A.
until
B.
and
C.
but
D.
since
(
)
23.
A.
problems
B.
pollution
C.
population
D.
production
(
)
24.
A.
public
B.
narrow
C.
dirty
D.
waste
(
)
25.
A.
slowly
B.
against
C.
carefully
D.
dangerous
三、阅读理解（2分,共计30分）AOnce
upon
a
time，a
poor
family
had
only
one
small
roll
of
expensive
gold
wrapping
(包装)pa per.
The
father
had
no
money
to
buy
any
more.
On
Christmas
Eve,
his
5-year-old
daughter
decorated
a
shoe
box
with
all
the
gold
paper
and
put
it
under
the
Christmas
tree.
The
father
was
quite
unhappy
about
it.The
next
morning
the
little
girl,
filled
with
excitement,
brought
the
gift
box
to
her
father
and
said,
"This
is
for
you,
Daddy!"As
he
opened
the
box,
the
father
found
it
was
empty.
At
once
he
shouted
at
her,
"Don't
you
know,
young
lady,
when
you
give
someone
a
present,
there
should
be
something
inside
the
package
！"The
little
girl
almost
cried
out.
She
looked
up
at
him
and
said,
"Daddy,
it's
not
empty.
I
blew
kisses
into
it
until
it
was
all
full."The
father
was
moved.
He
fell
on
his
knees
and
put
his
arms
around
his
pretty
little
girl.
He
asked
her
to
forgive
him
for
his
unnecessary
anger.Before
long
an
accident
took
the
life
of
the
child.
The
father
kept
that
little
golden
box
by
his
bed
for
the
following
years
of
his
life.
Whenever
he
was
faced
with
difficult
problems,
he
would
open
the
box,
take
out
an
imaginary(想像的)kiss
and
remember
the
love
of
his
beautiful
child
who
had
put
it
there.In
a
very
real
sense，each
of
us,
as
a
human
being,
has
been
given
an
invisible
(隐形的)gold
box
filled
with
true
love
and
kisses
from
our
children,
parents
and
friends.
There
is
no
more
valuable
(有价值的
)thing
than
this.(
)26.
When
did
the
story
happen
A.
On
December
25.
B.
On
December
24.
C.
On
December
31.
D.
On
January
1.(
)
27.
What
did
the
little
girl
do
on
Christmas
Eve A.
She
blew
her
kisses
into
the
shoe
box
until
she
thought
it
full.B.
She
put
a
beautiful
gift
into
the
shoe
box
for
her
clear
father.C.
She
decorated
a
Christmas
tree
with
the
gold
wrapping
paper.D.
She
wrapped
the
shoe
box
and
put
it
on
the
Christmas
tree.(
)
28.
How
did
the
father
feel
when
he
opened
the
gift
box
for
the
first
time A.
Happy.
B.
Proud.
C.
Sad.
D.
Angry.(
)
29.
What
happened
to
the
little
girl
A.
Her
father
died
in
an
accident.
B.
She
died
in
an
accident.
C.
She
took
her
own
life.
D.
Her
mother
died
in
an
accident.(
)
30
The
father
kept
the
box
for
the
rest
of
his
life
because
____.
.A.
it
was
his
only
Christmas
present
B.
it
was
made
of
expensive
goldC.
it
was
full
of
his
daughter's
love
D.
it
was
a
very
useful
shoe
boxB
Happiness
is
for
everyone.
You
don't
need
to
care
about
those
people
who
have
beautiful
houses
with
large
gardens
and
swimming
pools
or
those
who
have
nice
cars
and
a
lot
of
money
and
so
on.
Why
Because
those
who
have
big
houses
may
often
feel
lonely
and
those
who
have
cars
may
want
to
walk
on
the
country
roads
at
their
free
time.
In
fact,
happiness
is
always
around
you
if
you
put
your
heart
into
it.
When
you
are
in
trouble
at
school,
your
friends
will
help
you,
when
you
study
hard
on
your
lessons,
your
parents
are
always
taking
good
care
of
your
life
and
your
health;
when
you
get
success,
your
friends
will
say
congratulations
to
you;
when
you
do
something
wrong,
people
around
you
will
help
you
to
correct
it.
And
when
you
do
something
good
to
others,
you
will
feel
happy,
too.
All
these
are
your
happiness.
If
you
notice
a
bit
of
them,
you
can
see
that
happiness
is
always
around
you.
Happiness
is
not
the
same
as
money.
It
is
a
feeling
of
your
heart.
When
you
are
poor,
you
can
also
say
you
are
very
happy,
because
you
have
something
else
that
can't
be
bought
with
money.
When
you
meet
with
difficulties,
you
can
say
loudly
you
are
very
happy,
because
you
have
more
chances
to
challenge(挑战)
yourself.
So
you
cannot
always
say
you
are
poor
and
you
have
bad
luck.
As
the
saying
goes,
life
is
like
a
revolving(旋转的)
door.
When
it
closes,
it
also
opens.
If
you
take
every
chance
you
get,
you
can
be
a
happy
and
lucky
person.
(
)31.
Those
who
have
big
houses
may
often
feel
_____.
A.
happy
B.
lonely
C.
free
D.
excited
(
)32.
When
you
fall
down
in
a
PE
class,
both
your
teacher
and
your
classmates
will
_____.
A.
laugh
at
you
B.
play
jokes
on
youC.
quarrel
with
you
D.
help
you
up
(
)
33
What
will
your
friends
say
to
you
when
you
make
great
progress
A.
Oh,
so
do
I.
B.
Congratulations.
C.
Good
luck.
D.
It's
just
so
so.
(
)34.
Which
idea
is
NOT
TRUE
according
to
the
passage
A.
People
who
have
cars
would
never
like
to
walk
in
the
open
air.
B.
You
can
get
help
from
others
when
you
make
mistakes.
C.
You
can
still
be
a
happy
person
even
if
you
have
little
money.
D.
Happiness
is
always
around
you
though
difficulties
come
towards
you.
(
)
35.
Which
of
the
following
is
this
passage
about
A.
Bad
luck.
B.
Good
luck.
C.
Happiness.
D.
Life.
C
Some
people
have
to
use
public
transport,
some
dislike
it
and
some
still
love
it.
If
everyone
has
a
car
and
drives
anywhere
they
want
to
go,
there
will
be
serious
traffic
problems
on
the
road.
Luckily,
trains
are
a
good
form
of
public
transport.
British
people
use
trains
a
lot.
This
is
especially
so
for
people
who
are
travelling
from
London
to
Paris.
Every
day
about
20
trains
leave
London.
They
travel
at
high
speed
and
people
feel
glad
that
the
trains
take
only
2
hours
and
30
minutes
to
reach
Paris.
It's
much
faster
to
travel
by
train
than
by
bus
or
by
car.
This
is
because
people
have
to
drive
cars
or
buses
very
carefully
and
slowly
for
many
reasons.
such
as
speed
limits
and
traffic
jams.
However,
when
you
are
travelling
by
train,
the
speed
is
almost
the
same
and
there
is
no
traffic
jam
for
a
train.
Besides,
Londoners
think
taking
a
train
is
one
of
the
safest
ways
of
travelling
on
the
ground.
Trains
take
quite
a
number
of
quality
tests
while
they
are
made.
More
importantly,
they
have
to
take
many
safety
checks
before
they
are
used
on
the
rail
track
(轨道).
What's
more,
trains
in
Britain
are
comfortable
and
provide
fine
services
for
their
users.
When
you
are
on
a
London
train,
you
will
find
that
the
train
has
comfortable
tables
and
seats
where
people
can
sit.
They
also
provide
food
services
and
powerplugs
(电源插头)
for
personal
computers
or
mobile
phones.(
)
36.
The
main
idea
of
the
passage
is
that
_______.
A.
British
people
enjoy
public
transport
B.
it's
fast
to
travel
from
London
to
Paris
C.
trains
in
Britain
provide
fine
services
for
their
users
D.
trains
are
a
good
form
of
public
transport
for
Londoners(
)
37.
In
a
traffic
jam
on
the
road,
_______.
A.
drivers
can
drive
fast
B.
drivers
can
drive
carelessly
C.
cars
are
not
moving
fast
D.
cars
will
stop
working(
)38.
The
3rd
paragraph
of
the
passage
mainly
talks
about
the
______
of
trains.
A.
speed
B.
safety
C.
services
D.
problems(
)
39.
Londoners
often
travel
by
train
because
trains
are
_______.
A.
old
and
slow
B.
large,
clean
and
powerful
C.
fine
and
important
D.
fast,
safe
and
comfortable(
)40.
What
can
we
know
from
the
passage
A.
We
can
travel
from
London
to
Paris
in
less
than
2
hours.
B.
We
can
do
our
work
with
personal
computers
on
the
train.
C.
We
have
to
wait
till
we
get
off
the
train
in
order
to
have
some
food.
D.
The
trains
are
only
checked
for
quality
reasons
before
they
are
used.四、主观阅读（5分）Saving
water
is
an
important
part
of
going
green.
As
water
becomes
less
and
is
polluted
more,conservation
(保护)
becomes
more
and
more
important.
If
people
keep
wasting
water,
more
water
needs
to
be
treated
and
cleaned.
This
process
needs
quite
a
lot
of
energy.As
it
is
said
above,
cutting
down
on
water
usage
is
one
of
the
most
important
things
you
can
do
for
your
local
environment.
That
is
why
more
green
families
are
going
blue
by
conserving
and
harvesting
water.It
may
seem
like
a
big
concept
(概念),
but
going
blue
starts
with
small
changes.
Something
as
simple
as
turning
off
the
tap
while
you
brush
your
teeth
can
save
a
lot
of
water.
Wash
your
fruits
and
vegetables
in
a
bowl
instead
of
under
a
tap
to
save
even
more.
Make
sure
that
the
taps
are
fully
turned
off
every
time
you
step
away.Another
way
of
reducing
water
usage
is
reducing
your
dependence
on
the
main
water
supply.
Rainwater
harvesting
can
meet
a
lot
of
your
home’s
water
needs.
Collecting
rainwater
is
a
great
way
to
keep
your
garden
green
without
running
the
sprinkler
(洒水器).
Going
BlueThe
importanceof
saving
waterWater
conservation
is
important
becausewater
becomes
(41)
and
is
polluted.
Wasting
water
means
more
water
needs
to
be
treated
andcleaned.
Much
(42)
is
needed
when
water
is
treated
and
cleaned.Going
blue
byconserving
andharvesting
water(43)
down
on
water
usage
is
the
most
important.Start
with
small
changes,(44)
things.
Turn
off
the
tap
while
brush
your
teeth.Wash
your
fruits
and
vegetables
in
bowls.Turn
off
taps
(45)
every
time
you
step
away.Reducing
dependence
on
the
mainwater
supply
by
harvesting
rainwater.
41
42.
43.
44.
45.
五、单词填空（10分）46.
How
do
they
decide
what
to
____________（生产）
in
their
factory 47.Did
you
know
when
the
Earth
was
__________
(形成)？48.The
park
has
take
some
_________(措施)
to
limit
the
numbers
of
visitors.49.Sam
had
to
stay
at
home
because
he
was
________
(严重)
ill.50.Everyone
will
be
__________
(惩罚)
if
he
breaks
the
law.51.
It
is
difficult
for
him
to
tell
the
_________
(different)
of
the
two.52.
Every
________
(live)
thing
on
the
earth
cannot
live
without
others.53.Children
should
be
taught
to
spend
their
free
time
(wise).54.
Tom
was
riding
too
(careless).
As
a
result,
his
bike
rushed
into
the
river.55.
The
government
always
spends
as
much
time
as
they
can____(recycle)the
waste.六、动词填空（6分）56.
How
important
it
is
__________
(limit)
air
pollution
and
water
pollution!57.
Jimmy_______
(dig)
a
hole
in
the
garden
when
I
went
to
see
him.58.
How
often
_______
the
Olympic
Games_______
(take)
place
every
year 59.
If
no
paper
is
used
in
business,
at
least
one
million
tons
of
paper_______
(save).60.
These
new
workers
__________
(separate)
into
a
team
of
six
tomorrow.61.
-When
shall
we
go
to
watch
the
basketball
match
in
the
sports
centre
-Not
until
the
work_______
(finish)
tomorrow.七、翻译句子（9分）62
我们应该通过多植树来减少空气污染。_____________________________________________________________________________64．每个人都应该做些对地球有益的事情。_____________________________________________________________________________64．土地污染对很多动物有害。_____________________________________________________________________________65．你知道旧衣服将会被回收利用吗？_____________________________________________________________________________66．我们将被教导采取一些简单的步骤来保护环境。_____________________________________________________________________________67.
我们应该把废料分类以便能循环利用。_____________________________________________________________________________八、书面表达(10分)从2008年6月1日起，国家禁止商家免费提供塑料袋。假如你是李华，准备以“What
Can
We
Do
for
the
Environment”为题，写一篇保护环境的80词左右的英语演讲稿。1．在购物时使用布袋子(cloth
bag)代替塑料袋；
2．尽可能地再利用使用过的书本；
3．离开教室应关灯；
4．最好走路或骑自行车上学；
5．简述理由：保护环境，减少污染，节约能源等。Our
environment
is
becoming
worse
and
worse.
What
can
we
do
for
the
environment
I
think
each
of
us
can
do
a
little
bit
to
help
with
the
problem.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“passive
voice
in
the
simple
future
tense”skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
help
the
students
get
some
information
about
the
writer’s
trip
to
Hong
Kong
.2.
To
identify
specific
details
by
answering
some
questions
.
3.
To
develop
the
students’
ability
of
guessing
new
words’
meanings
from
the
context
.过程与方法：To
expand
vocabulary
to
talk
about
traveling. 情感态度与价值观：To
identify
specific
details
by
answering
questions.
教学重点难点
1.
Words
&
phrases
:
miss;
fantastic
;
speed
;
ride
;
cartoon
;
such;
magic
;
pie
;
couple
;
feel
;
move
at
high
speed
;
hurry
to
;
such
as
;
a
couple
of
;
cannot
stop
doing
...
;
at
the
end
of
...
;
etc
.2.
Sentences
:
I
heard
you’ve
gone
to
Thailand
.
/
My
parents
and
I
have
been
in
Hong
Kong
for
two
days
.
/
I
know
you’ve
gone
to
Hainan
.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Revision
&
Lead-inShow
the
pictures
of
popular
tourist
attractions
we’ve
learned
in
period
1.
Say
something
about
them
with
the
students
together
.
Then
present
them
some
other
pictures
in
China
,
especially
Hong
Kong
.
Talk
about
the
pictures
with
some
questions
,
such
as
‘Have
you
been
to
Hong
Kong
’
‘How
did
you
go
there
’
‘What
did
you
do
there
’
and
so
on
.Step
2
Skimming
and
guessing1.
Give
the
students
a
few
minutes
to
go
through
the
text
,
offering
them
the
following
two
easy
questions
:
Who
visited
Disneyland
/
How
long
did
they
stay
in
Disneyland
2.
Part
B1
:
Read
the
text
for
the
first
time
to
get
some
simple
information
to
finish
it
.3.
Part
B2
:
Read
the
text
for
the
second
time
to
finish
it
.After
finishing
,
let
the
students
work
in
pairs
to
check
the
answers
.Step
3
Scanning
Give
the
students
some
more
minutes
to
read
the
text
again
,then
answer
the
following
questions
:
What
did
Kitty
think
of
Hong
Kong
Disneyland
How
did
they
get
to
the
park
What
was
the
best
part
of
the
day
What
did
Kitty
buy
..............Then
finish
Part
B3
individually
.
Check
the
answers
together
.Read
it
loudly
together
.Step
4
Listening
&
PracticePlay
the
CD
for
the
students
to
listen
to
,
let
them
read
the
first
three
paragraphs
after
the
CD
.
After
listening
,
let
the
students
finish
Part
B4
by
themselves
.
Offer
help
if
necessary
.
Correct
their
answers
face
to
face
.
Then
check
the
answers
.
Read
the
sentences
together
.Step
5
Practice
againHomework
1.
Review
the
contents
we’ve
learned
in
this
period
.2.
Read
new
words
for
5
minutes
at
least
,
recite
20
new
words
.3.
Finish
off
the
exercises
in
period
2
in
the
workbook
.
Go
over
some
popular
tourist
attractions
.Then
look
at
some
other
pictures
in
China.Go
through
the
text
for
some
minutes.Read
the
text
for
the
first
time
to
get
some
simple
information
to
finish
it
.Have
a
scanning
then
answer
some
questions.Listen
to
the
tape.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Go
over
the
context
last
class.Skim
and
scan
Kitty’s
a
trip
to
Hongkong.Do
some
proper
exercises.
课堂达标
一、翻译句子1.
这是一天中读英语的最好时候。
It
was
the
______
______
of
the
day
for
reading
English.
2.
你到过日本的富士山吗
______
you
______
to
Mount
Fuji
in
Japan
3.
我们昨天在香港迪士尼乐园玩得很开心。
We
____
______
_______
_______
in
Hong
Kong
Disneyland
yesterday.
4.
对我来说,没有希望爬到山顶。
It
_____
_____
_____
me
to
get
to
the
top
of
the
mountain.
5.
我确信你会喜欢那个地方的。I
______
______
you
will
love
that
place.二、单项填空（
）1．I’ll
show
the
CDs
when
I
get
them
back.
A.
for
you
B.
you
to
C.
you
D.
to
you（
）2．Don’t
get
too
after
hearing
the
good
news.
A.
excited
B.
exciting
C.
excitement
D.
excite（
）3．How
long
will
it
take
to
swim
the
river
A.
over
B.
cross
C.
across
D.
through（
）4．Nancy
was
watching
TV
I
arrived
at
her
home
.
A.
but
B.
as
soon
as
C.
while
D.
when（
）5．There
are
a
lot
of
trees
my
school.
A.
in
front
of
B.
in
a
front
C.
in
the
front
D.
in
front
to
板书设计
8下
Unit
2
Travelling
Reading
11.move
at
high
speed
;
hurry
to
;
such
as
;
a
couple
of
;
cannot
stop
doing
...
;
at
the
end
of
...
;
2.I
heard
you’ve
gone
to
Thailand
.
My
parents
and
I
have
been
in
Hong
Kong
for
two
days
.
I
know
you’ve
gone
to
Hainan
.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
deals
with
words
and
expressions,
phrases
related
to
travelling
.
According
to
the
exercises
on
book,Ss
are
guided
to
pay
particular
attention
to
the
reading
strategy
of
skimming
and
scanning
methods.
Get
the
Ss
to
gain
the
information
of
the
passage
and
the
expressions.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
know
how
to
use
English
sayings2.
To
learn
to
use
English
sayings
in
the
real
communications过程与方法：to
get
the
Ss
to
give
some
Chinese
sayings.try
to
understand
the
English
sayings
and
use
them
correctly.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
study
skills
教学重点难点
1.
To
know
how
to
use
English
sayings2.
To
learn
to
use
English
sayings
in
the
real
communications
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】1、回顾复习：Talk
about
integrated
skills2、自学教材P74-753、自学检测：Check
out
the
prepared
work..【自主探究】Step
1
Present
the
learning
targetsStep
2
Revision“不要乱扔垃圾”这个公共标志经常出现在诸如公园这样的公共区域码？公共标志可以帮助我们找到正确的路线，告诉我们周围的重要地点，使我们远离危险，而且可以警告我们不做任何有危险的事情。这个标志标明：我们禁止给博物馆的任何一张毕加索的照片拍照。Step
3
Free
talkWhat
useful
tips
does
Jenny
offer
in
the
school
radio
show
(When
in
Rome，do
as
the
Romans
do)Do
you
know
the
Chinese
meaning
of
this
sentence
（入乡随俗）This
is
an
English
saying.
Today
we’re
going
to
learn
more
English
sayings.Step
4
PresentationGive
the
definition
of
the
English
sayings:
A
saying
is
a
short
wise
statement
that
usually
gives
advice
or
expresses
some
truth
about
life.
Many
traditional
sayings
are
still
in
use
today.
Sometimes
they’re
a
great
help
if
you
need
some
wise
words
to
express
your
ideas.
They
make
what
you
say
or
write
simple
and
vivid.Present
the
descriptions
and
the
pictures
of
Part
A
one
by
one,
and
let
Students
guess
the
English
sayings.Present
the
descriptions
and
the
pictures
of
Part
B
one
by
one,
and
let
Students
guess
the
English
sayings.Step
5
ExercisesPresent
more
descriptions
and
the
pictures
of
the
English
sayings,
and
let
Students
guess
the
Chinese
meanings(1)
A
cold
hand
and
a
warm
heart．刀子嘴．豆腐心。
(2)
Birds
of
a
feather
flock
together．物以类聚，人以群分。
(3)
Don’t
judge
people
by
their
appearance．不可以貌取人。
(4)
It
is
better
to
trust
the
eye
than
the
ear．百闻不如一见。
(5)
It
is
never
too
late
to
mend．亡羊补牢，犹未晚矣。(6)
Love
me，love
my
dog．爱屋及乌。【课堂小结】Language
points:
words:
successful
sometime
riskpain
practice
candle
worm
gain
indeedphrases:
soon
afterSentences:
The
early
bird
catches
the
worm.It
never
rains
but
it
pours.Many
hands
make
light
work.Every
dog
has
its
day.Put
all
your
eggs
in
one
basket.The
grass
is
always
greener
on
the
other
side.Actions
speak
louder
than
words.No
pain,
no
gain.A
friend
in
need
is
a
friend
indeed.Practice
makes
perfect.You
cannot
burn
the
candle
at
both
ends.【巩固拓展】每个人在生活的某个时候都可能幸运或者成功。当你发生了一件坏事之后，
其它的坏事不久也会发生。我再也不能忍受这种痛苦了。这些年来，他取得了丰富的教学经验。她每天都带3个女儿进行篮球训练。Homework:1.Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.Finish
the
paper.
Check
out
the
prepared
work..In
groups.Translate
the
sentences.Have
a
free
talk
about
English
sayings.guess
the
English
sayings.Master
the
language
points
then
make
some
sentences
with
them.Translate
the
sentences
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
the
preview.To
get
the
Ss
to
discuss
in
groups
and
give
some
Chinese
sayings.Try
to
understand
and
master
English
sayings
in
Study
skills.To
learn
to
use
them
correctly.
课堂达标
完成句子1.
捷足先登
____________________________________________.2.
患难的朋友才是真正的朋友。_____________________________________________3.
不劳无获。
____________________________________________4.
无风不起浪。________________________________________
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Study
skills(1)
A
cold
hand
and
a
warm
heart．刀子嘴．豆腐心。
(2)
Birds
of
a
feather
flock
together．物以类聚，人以群分。(3)
Don’t
judge
people
by
their
appearance．不可以貌取人。
(4)
It
is
better
to
trust
the
eye
than
the
ear．百闻不如一见。
(5)
It
is
never
too
late
to
mend．亡羊补牢，犹未晚矣。(6)
Love
me，love
my
dog．爱屋及乌。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
some
English
sayings.
By
learning
,to
get
the
Ss
to
understand
the
meaning
of
them
and
the
Ss
can
use
them
correctly
in
the
articles.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：To
learn
to
use
passive
voice
in
the
simple
future
tense.过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
learn
the
grammar
by
themselves.2.to
discuss
in
groups
and
understand
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense.情感态度与价值观：
To
develop
the
Ss’
interest
of
learning.
教学重点难点
To
learn
to
use
passive
voice
in
the
simple
future
tense.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Presentation1.
Show
some
pictures
and
present
the
new
words:
display,
pollute,
harm,
living.2.
Let
some
students
spell
the
words.
3.
Read
after
the
teacher.
4.
Read
together.Step
2
Explanation1.
被动语态的一般将来时的概念被动语态的一般将来时用来描述将要发生的动作。e.g.
He
will
be/is
going
to
be
taken
to
hospital
in
a
few
minutes.
他几分钟之内就会被送到医院。The
food
will
be
/is
going
to
be
eaten
by
the
dog
soo这些食物马上就会被狗吃掉。2.
被动语态的一般将来时的构成主语will
be/
be
going
to
be过去分词I
will
be
/am
going
to
besupported.You
/We
/They
will
be
/are
going
to
beHe
/She/Itwill
be
/is
going
to
be
注意：主语是第一人称时，被动语态的一般将来时也可以用“shall
be+动词的过去分词”来表达。Step
3
Practice1.
Complete
part
A
on
page
112.2.
Check
the
answers.3.
Complete
part
B
on
page
113.4.
Check
the
answers.Step
4
ExercisesI.
根据句意及括号内所给动词的提示填空。1.
A
cat
__________
(keep)
in
my
grandmother’s
house.2.
The
concert
___________
(hold)
last
Friday
evening.3.
Jane
was
made
__________
(work)
ten
hours
a
day.4.
A
new
hospital
_________________
______
(build)
in
our
city
next
year.5.
More
than
50
trees
________________
(plant)
since
last
month.II.
Complete
part
C
on
page
114.Step
5
Homework1.
Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.
Finish
the
exercises
in
the
workbook.3.
Preview
the
next
lesson.
Learn
some
new
words
and
be
able
to
spell
these
words
by
themselves.To
get
the
Ss
to
explain
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense
in
plete
part
A
on
part
B
on
page
113
andpage
112.
then
Check
the
plete
the
sentences.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
get
the
Ss
to
have
a
Self-study.To
get
the
Ss
to
explain
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense
in
class.
课堂达标
I.
根据句意及括号内所给动词的提示填空。1.
A
cat
__________
(keep)
in
my
grandmother’s
house.2.
The
concert
___________
(hold)
last
Friday
evening.3.
Jane
was
made
__________
(work)
ten
hours
a
day.4.
A
new
hospital
_________________
______
(build)
in
our
city
next
year.5.
More
than
50
trees
________________
(plant)
since
last
month.
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Grammar1.
被动语态的一般将来时的概念被动语态的一般将来时用来描述将要发生的动作。e.g.
He
will
be/is
going
to
be
taken
to
hospital
in
a
few
minutes.
他几分钟之内就会被送到医院。The
food
will
be
/is
going
to
be
eaten
by
the
dog
soo这些食物马上就会被狗吃掉。2.
被动语态的一般将来时的构成主语will
be/
be
going
to
be过去分词I
will
be
/am
going
to
besupported.You
/We
/They
will
be
/are
going
to
beHe
/She/Itwill
be
/is
going
to
be
注意：主语是第一人称时，被动语态的一般将来时也可以用“shall
be+动词的过去分词”来表达。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense.by
learning
,
most
of
the
Ss
are
able
to
master
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense
and
use
it
smoothly.but
some
Ss
forget
the
“be”in
using
the
passive
voice
of
the
simple
future
tense.
After
class,the
students
need
more
practice.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.To
introduce
the
different
kinds
of
books.2.To
discuss
the
favourite
books.过程与方法：1.to
discuss
what
books
are
the
Ss’
favourite
in
group.2.to
talk
about
their
favourite
books
in
class.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss’
interest
in
liking
reading
books.To
develop
a
good
habit
to
read
books
教学重点难点
1.To
introduce
the
different
kinds
of
books.2.To
discuss
the
favourite
books.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1.
Lead-inHaving
a
free
talkT:
Do
you
like
reading
books Why S:……T:
What
kind
of
books
do
you
like
best S:……T：Do
you
like
reading
story
books S:……Step
2.Having
a
presentingShow
some
pictures
of
different
kinds
of
books
and
introduce
each
of
them.Travel
books:Health
books:Food
books:Fiction
books:History
books:Science
books:Make
the
students
know
that
the
main
content
of
each
type
of
bookWrite
the
type
of
book
under
each
picture.Check
the
answers
Step
3.Discussion
Listen
to
the
tape
and
then
answer
the
following
questionsWhat
is
Millie
reading
What
does
Sandy
think
about
the
history
book What
kind
of
book
does
Sandy
like Was
the
story
of
the
ugly
man
Quasimodo
moving Check
the
answersRead
after
the
tapeWork
in
pairs
Step
4.
Comic
stripListen
to
the
tapeQuestionsRead
after
the
tapeWork
in
pairsAct
out
the
dialogueStep
5
Doing
a
taskDivide
the
stuents
into
four
of
a
group
and
the
do
a
survey
about
Which
type
of
book
would
you
like
to
read
Give
some
reasons.What
kind
of
book
do
you
like I
like
…
Why
Because
…
What
about
you
I
like
…
because
…
Make
a
conclusion
and
write
a
reportPresent
the
report
Step
6
Homework
1.
Read
the
text
book
and
learn
the
new
words
and
phrases
by
heart.2.
Finish
the
exercises
in
the
workbook.
try
to
answer
the
questions.Talk
about
the
picture.Guess.ListenLook,
listen
and
learn.Make
a
conclusion
and
write
a
report
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
what
book
are
their
favourite
in
groups.To
learn
many
types
of
books
like
Travel
books:Health
books:Food
books:Fiction
books:History
books:Science
books:To
act
out
the
dialogue
in
pairs
in
front.
课堂达标
一、A
根据句意及汉语提示完成单词。1.Do
you
think
War
and
Peace
is
a
good
（读物）for
most
people 2.
Lily
has
lots
of
(知识)
and
she
can
help
me
to
slove
problems.3.Are
you
good
at
（烹饪）
-
Yes,I
am.4．I
often
read
some
books
in
my
（空闲的）time.5.
The
girl
is
（丑的）,but
she
is
very
polite.二、B
用括号中所给词的适当形式填空。l.
I
can't
decide
how
(
write)the
novel.2.
The
story-book
is
(bore).I
dislike
reading
it.3.
I
used
my
pocket
money
(buy)
a
good
book.4.
There
are
two
foreigners
in
our
company.
They
come
from
(German）5.I
(read)
the
book.
It
is
very
interesting.三、选择(
)1.
The
shelf
is
so
high
that
the
little
boy
can't
the
books
on
it.
A.
arrive
at
B.
reach
C.
get
to
D.arrive
in(
)2.
Mother
likes
to
cook
all
kinds
of
dishes,
so
she
wants
to
buy
a
book
about
A.
health
B.
cooking
C.
travel
D.culture
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Comic
and
strip﹠welcome
to
the
unit1.
Answer
the
following
question.
1)
What
is
Daniel
reading 2)
Why
does
he
like
reading
history
books
3)
Does
Sandy
like
reading
history
books 4)
What
does
Sandy
like
to
read
in
her
spare
time 2.
A:
What
do
you
like
to
read
in
your
spare
time B:
I
like
reading……….A:
Why
do
you
like
reading……..B:
Because……
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
talk
about
different
types
of
books
,
I
think
the
Ss
are
interested
in
this
lesson
,
after
learning
the
Ss
can
make
up
of
the
dialogues
according
to
the
modle.
And
they
are
able
to
master
some
useful
expressions
and
main
sentences.
The
class
is
lovely
and
active.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Learn
some
words
and
phrases.
2.
Practise
listening
skills
by
listening
to
a
text.过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
master
the
information
about
listening.2.to
get
some
information
by
listening
and
complete
some
exercise.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
listening
skills
and
listening
method.
教学重点难点
1.
Learn
some
words
and
phrases.
2.
Practise
listening
skills
by
listening
to
a
text.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
some
sentences.1)
Simon
忘记了什么时候见他的朋友们。2)
Millie给我展示接下来做什么。3)
你可以问你的父母让你带多少钱。4)
Suzy不确定请求谁来帮忙。5)
你今天必须完成家庭作业。6)
他们目前没有必要买电脑。Step
2
PresentationPresent
the
new
words.Read
aloud
these
new
words:Step
3
Make
a
dialogue-
Do
you
like
reading -
…
.-
What
type
of
book
do
you
like -
…
.-
What’s
the
name
of
the
book -
…
.Step
4
ListeningListen
to
the
tape
and
finish
part
A1.The
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
are
talking
about
what
they
have
read
recently.
Listen
to
them
and
match
each
student
with
the
type
and
name
of
the
book
they
have
read.Check
the
answers.Step
5
Presentation1.
Enjoy
a
video
and
some
pictures
and
present
J.K.
Rowling2.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
complete
part
A2.Suzy
plans
to
read
the
Harry
Potter
series.
She
is
telling
her
classmates
about
the
books.
Listen
to
what
she
says
and
complete
her
notes.
3.
Check
the
answers.3.
Listen
again
and
complete
part
A3.Millie
made
some
notes
of
the
Harry
Potter
series.
However,
she
has
made
some
mistakes.
Listen
to
Suzy
again.
Help
Millie
underline
the
mistake
in
each
sentence
and
write
the
correct
words
in
the
blanks.Step
6
Make
an
interviewYou
are
an
interviewer.
You
want
to
interview
J.K.
Rowling.
Work
in
pairs;
try
to
ask
at
least
five
questions
about
her.Step
7
Homework1.
Remember
the
new
words
in
this
lesson.
2.
Preview
the
next
lesson.
Translate
some
sentences.Learn
the
new
words.Make
a
dialogue.Listen
to
the
plete
some
exercises.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Read
Part
A
and
B
first
then
listen
to
the
tape,if
necessary
Listen
more.Check
the
answers
together.
课堂达标
词汇。1.
If
you
want
to
be
___________
(成功),
you
should
work
hard.2.
Please
take
turns
to
_________(翻译)
the
following
sentences.3.
They
invited
me
to
play
football,
but
I
had
to
r____________because
I
was
very
busy.4.
You
should
have
more
c___________
if
you
want
to
be
the
leader
of
the
group.5.
She
said
she
would
never
forget
those
pleasant
__________
(experience)
while
working
here.6.
In
the
beginning,
all
the
___________
(publish)
houses
said
no
to
Harry
Potter
books.7.
The
climbers
___________
(success)
arrived
at
the
top
of
the
mountain
at
5
p.m.
yesterday.8.
Alice
Munro
is
a
famous
___________
(Canada)
writer.9.
Don’t
be
___________
(worry).
You
can
search
for
information
on
the
computer.10.
Ben
is
a
foreign
teacher.
So
far,
he
___________(teach)
in
Yangzhou
for
five
years.二．单项选择。(
)
1.
Last
week,
Mary______
an
amazing
gift,
but
she
_______
it.A.
accepted,
didn’t
receive
B.
received,
accepted
C.
received,
didn’t
accept
D.
accepted,
received(
)
2.
_______
is
easy
and
convenient
for
us
________
books
online.A.
It,
to
renewing
B.
That,
to
renew
C.
It,
to
renew
D.
That,
to
renewing(
)
3.
The
kites
on
the
Internet
are
very
cheap,
but
Millie
doesn’t
know
_______
them.A.
where
to
buy
B.
what
to
buy
C.
how
to
buy
D.
when
to
buy(
)
4.
----_________
can
I
_________
these
books
and
magazines ----At
most
two
weeks.A.
How
far,
keep
B.
How
long,
borrow
C.
How
soon,
lend
D.
How
long,
keep(
)
5.
–
Must
I
come
to
your
desk
to
renew
the
book --
No,
you___________.A.
don’t
have
to
B.
mustn’t
C.
needn’t
D.
A
&C
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Integrated
skills1.Make
a
dialogue-
Do
you
like
reading -
…
.-
What
type
of
book
do
you
like -
…
.-
What’s
the
name
of
the
book 2.some
books:such
as
The
Big
World
,A
Strange
Egg,
Follow
Me
,
Last
Century
,The
Cecrets
of
Space,
My
Way
to
Success
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）After
listening
,
the
Ss
can
get
some
information
about
Part
A
and
B,
they
can
complete
some
proper
exercises.
and
they
can
know
more
about
some
books
such
asThe
Big
World
,A
Strange
Egg,
Follow
Me
,
Last
Century
,The
Cecrets
of
Space,
My
Way
to
Success.then
they
learn
a
lot
about
a
British
writer
J.K.Rowling.so
they
are
interested
in
this
period,and
the
whole
class
is
lively
and
active.Online
tours
教学目标
知识与能力：Be
able
to
use
the
website
to
take
an
online
tour.Be
able
to
ask
for
help
and
make
response
to
others’
request
in
English.3.
To
listen
and
get
useful
information
from
the
tape
recording.4.
To
know
some
basic
information
of
Sydney.过程与方法：1.to
learn
much
information
about
some
pictures.2.to
listen
and
get
some
useful
information
from
the
recording.情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
use
a
computer
correctly
to
get
useful
information.
教学重点难点
1.How
to
take
an
online
tour
on
the
website.2.Asking
for
help
and
make
response
to
others’
request
in
English.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionYou
will
see
some
hints（提示、线索）.Try
to
guess
which
part
of
the
computer
it
is.
1.
It’s
a
name
of
a
kind
of
animal.You
can
click
on
it.2.
You
can
see
words
and
pictures
on
it.You
keep
looking
at
it
when
you
play
a
computer
game.It
looks
like
a
small
TV.A
TV
has
the
same
thing.3.
You
use
it
to
type
in
words
and
other
information.It
has
many
buttons
on
it4.
It
uses
a
lot
of
paper.You
can
use
it
to
print
out
your
composition
and
pictures.Step
2
PresentationIf
you
are
planning
an
online
trip,
what
city
would
you
like
to
visit How
much
do
you
know
about
Sydney Where
did
you
get
the
information Do
you
want
to
visit
Sydney
in
the
future
Step3
Listening1.
Daniel
and
Peter
are
planning
an
online
tour
of
Sydney,
Australia.
Listen
to
their
conversation
and
help
Peter
complete
his
notes.2.
Peter
took
some
notes
of
Sydney.
Listen
to
Daniel
and
Peter's
second
conversation.
Write
a
T
if
a
sentence
is
true
or
an
F
if
it
is
false.3.
Peter
is
writing
about
the
online
tour.
Listen
to
their
second
conversation
again
and
help
him
complete
his
article
in
A3.Step
4
Speak
upDoes
everybody
know
how
to
use
the
website
“Around
the
World
in
Eight
Hours”
to
take
an
online
tour Sandy
is
asking
Millie
how
to
use
the
website.Let’s
listen
to
the
tape
and
find
out
what
Sandy’s
problems
are.1.
How
do
we
start
an
online
tour
of
a
city Just
click
on
the
“Tour”
icon
and
it
will
start.What
should
we
do
if
we
want
to
look
at
the
pictures
of
the
city Click
on
the
“Camera”
icon,
and
you
can
see
many
pictures
of
the
city.How
do
we
print
the
pictures Click
on
the
“Print”
icon.4.
Read
the
dialogue.Step
5
ActivityNow
it’s
your
turn
to
make
a
similar
conversation.
You
can
plan
an
online
trip
to
your
favourite
place.
If
you
need
to
find
more
information
from
the
website,
you
can
design
some
new
icons.Step
6
HomeworkRecite
the
dialogue
in
Part
B.Finish《学习与评价》U
3
Period
5.
Play
a
game
and
guess
what
it
is
.Answer
some
questions.Listen
to
the
recording
then
complete
Petero’s
notes.
listen
to
the
tape
and
find
out
what
Sandy’s
problems
are.Answer
the
questions.Read
the
dialogue.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
the
use
of
the
computer.To
get
the
Ss
to
get
some
useful
information
from
listening
to
the
recording.To
get
the
Ss
to
know
how
to
use
the
website
to
take
an
online
tour.
课堂达标
根据句意、中文提示或英文字母提示完成单词。1.It
takes
one
and
a
half
hours
to
drive
to
Sydney
from
Central
(海岸)
。2.The
Opera
House
is
really
like
a
ship
with
many
s
。3Have
you
been
to
（澳大利亚）。4.A
young
girl
is
sitting
（在......的对面）
to
the
teacher
。5.—Thank
you
for
helping
my
homework
.—My
p
二、用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空1.Would
you
mind
(show
)
me
your
photo
2.How
long
the
wang
(stay)
here
For
two
weeks.3.---
you
ever
(eat
)
chocolate
sundaes
---no
,never
.4My
father
just
(come)
back
from
work
.he
is
tired
now
.5.Where’s
Li
Ming
He
(go
)to
the
teacher
‘s
office
.6.I
(work
)
here
since
(move
)
here
in
2009.
板书设计
8下Unit
3
Online
tours
Integrated
skills1.
a
ship
with
many
sails
一艘有很多帆的船此处with表示“带有或拥有”，例如：白宫是一个带有大花园的美丽建筑。
2.
Australian
seasons
are
the
opposite
of
ours.the
opposite
of
与……相反/相对3.
Would
you
mind
showing
me
how
to
start
this
online
tour 句型
Would
you
mind
...
可用于客气
地请人做某事。e.g.
Would
you
mind
explaining
the
sentence
again
你再解释一下这句话行吗？mind
doing
sth.
介意做某事e.g.
你介意帮我搬这张书桌吗？
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
about
training
Ss’
listening
skills
by
listening
to
the
conversation
between
Daniel
and
Peter.The
Ss
know
more
information
about
places
of
interest
in
Sydney.
This
section
not
only
train
their
listening
but
also
train
their
speaking.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
learn
some
information
about
reading
habits.2.To
learn
how
to
write
a
report
about
reading
habits.过程与方法：get
the
Ss
to
finish
a
survey
then
answer
some
questions
in
Part
A.Read
Millie’s
report
carefully,
then
write
a
report
on
your
own
reading
habits
according
to
Millie’s
report
in
Part
B
as
a
model.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
writing
skills.
1.
To
learn
some
information
about
reading
habits.2.To
learn
how
to
write
a
report
about
reading
habits.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
some
phrases
and
sentences.Step
2
Warming
up
Do
you
like
reading How
much
time
do
you
spend
reading
each
week What
is
your
favourite
type
of
book How
do
you
get
most
of
your
books Step
3
PresentationGive
some
pictures
and
study
some
new
words.Step
4
Doing
a
survey1.
Look
at
the
survey.
1
How
much
time
do
you
spend
reading
each
week a
Less
than
1
hour.
b
1-2
hours.
c
3-4
hours.
d
More
than
4
hours.2
When
do
you
usually
read
books
a
Any
time
I
can.
b
Every
night.c
At
weekends.
d
During
holidays.3
What
is
your
favourite
type
of
book
a
Novel.
b
Science.c
History.
d
Travel.
Other:
_________4
How
do
you
get
most
of
your
books
a
Borrow
from
libraries.
b
Buy
at
bookshops.
c
Borrow
from
friends.
d
Receive
as
gifts.5
Why
do
you
usually
read
a
To
relax.
b
To
improve
my
knowledge.
c
To
collect
information
for
a
report.
d
Because
someone
has
recommended
a
book.6
Who
do
you
usually
ask
for
advice
on
books
a
Teachers.
b
Parents.
c
Friends.
d
Librarians.2.
Ask
and
answer
in
pairs.Step
5
Writing1.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
the
following
question.1)
How
much
time
does
Millie
spend
reading
each
week 2)
When
does
she
read
books 3)
What
is
her
favourite
type
of
book 4)
How
does
she
get
most
of
her
book 5)
Who
does
she
usually
ask
for
advice
on
books 6)
Why
does
she
usually
read 2.
Check
the
answers.3.
Read
after
the
tape.Step
6
Language
points1.I
spend
over
seven
hours
a
week
reading
different
types
of
books.
over意为
“超过、多于”,
相当于more
than。e.g.
There
are
over
five
hundred
students
in
our
school.different
types
of
意思是
“不同种类的”。e.g.
There
are
many
different
kinds
of
books
in
the
library.2.
…
it
is
just
opposite
my
home.
opposite
prep.
在……对面,
与……相反
e.g.
The
post
office
is
opposite
the
bank.
3.
My
friends
give
me
lots
of
advice
on
books.
advice
n.
建议,
忠告,
劝告
e.g.
I
asked
the
teacher
for
her
advice.
give
sb.
some
advice
on
sth.
给某人一些关于…..的建议e.g.
Could
you
give
me
some
advice
on
my
plan 4.
They
also
open
up
a
whole
new
world
to
me.
open
up
打开;
开发;
开辟
e.g.
This
new
job
will
open
up
a
whole
new
world
to
me.Step
7
Writing
taskWrite
a
report
on
your
own
reading
habits.
You
can
use
the
following
useful
expressions
to
help
you.
Useful
expressions:I
spend
…
hours
a
week
reading.On
weekdays,
I
usually
…I
…
at
the
weekend.I
am
interested
in
…
books.
My
favourite
book
is
….I
get
most
of
my
books
from
….My
friend(s)/teacher(s)
often….I
love
reading
because….
Homework.Memorize
the
new
words
and
expressions.Read
the
article
in
partB.
Translate
some
phrases
and
sentences.Answer
some
questions.First
read
the
survey
then
finish
it
according
to
their
own
case.Learn
to
writing
Listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
the
following
question.Master
the
language
points
and
make
some
sentences
with
them.Write
a
report
on
your
own
reading
habits.
Check
out
the
home
work
and
preview.Talk
about
their
favourtie
books
and
their
reading
habits.Have
a
survey
of
reading
habits
then
answer
some
questionms
like
What
is
your
favourite
type
of
book
How
do
you
get
most
of
your
books
Why
do
you
usually
read
Ect.write
a
report
on
your
own
reading
habits
according
to
Millie’s
report
in
Part
B
as
a
model.
课堂达标
一、按要求改写下列下列句子,每空一词。1.
Why
not
hold
a
charity
show
(改为同义句)
__________
__________
you
hold
a
charity
show
__________
__________
holding
a
charity
show 2.
My
mother
didn’t
go
shopping
because
the
snow
was
heavy.
(改为同义句)
My
mother
didn’t
go
shopping
__________
__________
__________
__________
snow.3.
We
hope
we
can
organize
a
trip
to
Green
Hill.
(改为同义句)
We
hope
__________
__________
__________
__________
to
Green
Hill.4.
The
money
will
be
used
for
building
schools.
(对画线部分提问)
__________
__________
the
money
__________
__________
__________
5.
It
was
great
fun
to
be
a
host,
__________
__________
(反意疑问句)二、根据中文提示完成下列句子。1．把那些有关于做饭方面的书给我。
Give
me
the
book
.
2．我们希望在中国开辟一个广阔的大市场。
We
are
hoping
to
a
big
market
in
China.
3.
他们设法找到出森林的路。
They
the
way
to
get
out
of
the
forest.
4.
这部书被翻译成多种不同的语言。
The
book
is
many
different
languages.5.
起初，所有的英国出版社拒绝出版这本书。At
first,
all
the
British
publishing
houses
the
book..
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Task1.Have
a
survey.
1
How
much
time
do
you
spend
reading
each
week a
Less
than
1
hour.
b
1-2
hours.
c
3-4
hours.
d
More
than
4
hours.2
When
do
you
usually
read
books
a
Any
time
I
can.
b
Every
night.c
At
weekends.
d
During
holidays.3
What
is
your
favourite
type
of
book
a
Novel.
b
Science.c
History.
d
Travel.
Other:
_________
4
How
do
you
get
most
of
your
books
a
Borrow
from
libraries.
b
Buy
at
bookshops.
c
Borrow
from
friends.
d
Receive
as
gifts.5
Why
do
you
usually
read
a
To
relax.
b
To
improve
my
knowledge.
c
To
collect
information
for
a
report.
d
Because
someone
has
recommended
a
book.6
Who
do
you
usually
ask
for
advice
on
books
a
Teachers.
b
Parents.
c
Friends.
d
Librarians.2.
Useful
expressions:I
spend
…
hours
a
week
reading.On
weekdays,
I
usually
…I
…
at
the
weekend.I
am
interested
in
…
books.
My
favourite
book
is
….I
get
most
of
my
books
from
….My
friend(s)/teacher(s)
often….I
love
reading
because….
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
train
the
Ss
how
to
write
their
own
reading
habits.
At
first
the
Ss
can
finish
doing
a
survey
successfully
according
to
their
own
cases.
Then
they
are
able
to
learn
and
master
Millie’s
reading
habits
and
master
useful
expressions.the
Ss
can
write
their
own
reading
habits
within
the
fixed
time.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.To
make
an
outline
to
organize
ideas2.To
know
how
to
write
an
article
with
the
outline过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
talk
about
table
manners
in
China
in
groups.2.help
the
Ss
to
know
more
about
good
table
manners.
情感态度与价值观：To
train
the
Ss
to
respect
others
and
have
good
table
manners.
教学重点难点
1.To
make
an
outline
to
organize
ideas2.To
know
how
to
write
an
article
with
the
outline
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】1、回顾复习：bad
manners
of
people
2、自学教材P76-773、自学检测：Check
out
the
prepared
work..【自主探究】Step
1
Present
the
learning
targetsStep
2
Free
talkLook
at
these
people.
They’re
having
dinner.
Do
they
behave
well
or
not
Please
say
something
about
what
they’re
doing·Today
we’ll
learn
about
some
good
table
manners.Step
3
Presentation1.The
Class
1,Grade
8
students
are
going
to
give
a
talk
on
good
table
manners.
They’re
making
a
plan
for
the
talk(1)
What
is
the
name
of
the
talk
(Good
table
manners.)(2)Why
is
it
held
(
The
purpose
of
the
talk
is
to
teach
students
rules
for
eating.)
(3)
When
and
where
will
it
take
place
(
It
will
take
place
at10
a.m.
on
12
May
at
the
school
hall.)(4)
What
will
We
learn
from
the
talk
Can
you
give
some
examples (We
will
learn
what
we
should
do
and
should
not
do
at
the
table…．)write
down
the
difficult
phrases
like
“make
too
much
noise、reach
over
someone’s
plate
for
sth”
on
the
blackboardStep
4
PracticeFinish
Part
B
with
the
information
in
the
outline,and
check
the
answers.2.
Discuss
the
structures
of
the
article
in
Part
B,
and
fill
in
the
table.Main
ideaUseful
expressionsParagraph
1PurposeParagraph
2Time
and
placeParagraph
3ContentParagraph
4ConclusionStep
5
Writing
write
a
passage
about
good
table
manners
on
a
web
page,
and
present
the
good
articles
to
other
students(Sample
writing)We
will
have
a
talk
on
good
manners
in
the
library.
The
purpose
of
the
talk
is
to
teach
students
about
basic
rules
in
the
library.It
will
take
place
at
3
p.m.
next
Friday
at
the
school
hall.There
will
be
a
lot
of
examples
of
what
is
right
and
wrong.
You
should
always
keep
quiet
in
the
library.
You
should
not
eat
or
drinking
anything
in
the
library.
When
you
borrow
a
book
from
the
library,
you
should
wait
in
line
for
your
turn.
When
you
leave
the
library,
remember
to
put
the
chair
under
the
desk.
Also,
do
nor
forget
to
return
your
book
on
time.These
rules
are
important
because
they
will
help
everyone
in
the
library
feel
comfortable.【课堂小结】1.purpose
of
the
talk
2.make
too
much
noise3.reach
over
someone’s
plate
for
sth
4.above
all5.The
purpose
of
the
talk
is
to
teach
students
for
eating.6.It
will
take
place
at
10
a.m.
on
12
May
at
the
school
hall.【巩固拓展】1.如果你运动前不做准备活动，你就有受伤的危险。2.他来这里的目的是探亲。3.他学英语是为了做生意。4.为了成功，我们应该怎样做这件事。
课堂达标
一、根据括号所给的单词填正确形式1.It’s
very
__________
(help)
of
you
to
do
that
typing
for
me.2.It’s
another
way
of
____________
(say)
“bike”.3.Be
careful!
It’s
___________
(safe)
to
cross
the
road
when
the
light
is
red.4.It’s
necessary
for
my
brother
__________
(finish)
his
homework
in
ten
minutes.5.Do
you
think
English
is
easy
___________
(learn) 6.___________(luck),
our
bus
wasn’t
broken.
7.The
_____________
(three)
cake
is
nicer
than
the
first
one.8.When
you
got
_________
(lose)
you
can
use
your
mobile
phone
to
call
the
110
hotline.9.You
have
to
finish
(draw)
a
horse
in
five
minutes.10.You'd
better
start
__________
(train)
a
few
months
before
the
walk.二、单项选择(
)1.
My
father
____________Math
in
a
school.
A.
used
to
teaching
B.
used
to
teach
C.
use
to
teach
D.
is
used
to
teach(
)2.
The
money
is
used___________
people
in
need.
A.
to
helping
B.
to
helped
C.
to
help
D.
be
helped(
)3.
My
uncle
is
used
to____________
for
the
children
in
poor
areas.
A.
raise
money
B.
raised
money
C.
raising
money
D.
raises
money(
)4.
---Is
your
father
a
teacher
---Well,
he
___________.A.
used
to
B.
was
used
to
C.
used
to
be
D.
is
used
to
be(
)5.
In
the
end,
I__________
hard
work.A.
was
used
to
do
B.
used
to
do
C.
got
used
to
doing
D.
used
to
doing(
)6.
Dr.
Lin
was
not
on
so
many
patients
every
day.A.
used
to
working
B.
used
to
works
C.
used
to
work
D.
used
working(
)7.
—Would
you
like_______
the
environment
—I
don’t
know.
What
can
I
do
A.
help
save
B.
helping
save
C.
to
help
saving
D.
to
help
save(
)8.
That
_______
boy
can’t
go
to
school.
His
_______
is
so
serious.
A.
ill;
illness
B.
sick;
sickness
C.
ill;
sickness
D.
sickness;
ill
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Task1.Answer
the
questions:
(1)
What
is
the
name
of
the
talk
(Good
table
manners.)(2)Why
is
it
held
(
The
purpose
of
the
talk
is
to
teach
students
rules
for
eating.)
(3)
When
and
where
will
it
take
place
(
It
will
take
place
at10
a.m.
on
12
May
at
the
school
hall.)(4)
What
will
We
learn
from
the
talk
Can
you
give
some
examples 2.fill
in
the
blanks:
Main
ideaUseful
expressionsParagraph
1PurposeParagraph
2Time
and
placeParagraph
3ContentParagraph
4Conclusion
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）
The
period
is
to
talk
about
table
manners.
By
learning
,
the
Ss
should
have
good
table
manners
and
learn
to
respect
othersand
family
members.
Also,
they
should
plan
a
talk
about
other
aspects
of
good
manners
and
make
a
plan
and
create
their
own
web
pages.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.To
talk
about
manners
in
different
situations.2.Have
a
discussion
in
groups
about
how
to
behavior
well过程与方法：1.to
learn
the
new
words
and
expressions
with
some
pictures.2.to
talk
about
manners
among
the
Ss
in
groups.情感态度与价值观：
To
train
the
Ss
to
obey
the
school
rules.
教学重点难点
1.
The
words
about
manners.2.
How
to
encourage
Ss
to
speak
out
about
manners
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】1、回顾复习：Talk
about
manners2、自学教材Comic
strip
and
welcome(new
words
of
welcome)3、自学检测：Have
a
dictation
of
new
words
of
welcome【自主探究】Step
1.
Lead
inLook
at
the
pictures．Are
the
people
doing
the
right
or
wrong
things
Do
you
want
to
be
good
citizens
How
can
you
be
good
citizens Step2.
PresentationShow
the
6
pictures(1)
What
should
the
boy
do
when
he
cross
the
road
(He
should
obey
the
traffic
rules.)(2)
What
is
the
girl
doing
(She
is
picking
the
flowers
in
the
park.)(3)
What
should
we
do
in
the
library
(We
should
keep
quiet
in
the
library.)(4)
What
are
the
man
and
the
woman
doing
(They
are
dropping
litter
everywhere．)(5)What
is
the
man
doing
(He
is
queuing
for
his
turn.)(6)What
did
the
boy
do
(He
left
the
tap
running.
)
Who’s
doing
right
and
who’s
doing
wrong
Why Step
3.
PracticeThe
Class
1，Grade
8
students
are
discussing
the
right
and
wrong
things
to
do
in
public
places．Look
at
the
pictures
in
Part
A
and
match
them
with
the
phrases．Check
the
answers.Say
something
about
the
pictures.Step
4.
Presentation1
Repeat
after
the
tape
(Dialogue
of
Part
B)2设计几个场景，如：马路、公园、教室、电影院、卫生间等，让学生两人一组，模仿B部分新编对话。【课堂小结】Language
points:1.drop
litter
everywhere
2.
leave
the
tap
running3.
obey
traffic
rules
4.
queue
for
your
turn5.
old
enough
to
do
6.
too…
to…7.
share…with…
8.
I’m
afraid
not【巩固拓展】她太累了，走不动了___________________________________________开车时最好遵守交规。_________________________________________3．别让自来水哗哗的流。_____________________________________________________________在医院，我们应该有礼貌地等候。_____________________________________________________________活到老，学到老。_____________________________________________________________我哥哥到了参军的年龄了。____________________________________________________________恐怕你们不能乱扔垃圾。Homework:1.Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.Write
articles
how
we
should
behavior
in
different
situations.
Talk
about
mannersHave
a
dictation
of
new
words
of
welcomeLook
at
the
pictures．Then
answer
some
questions.Look
at
the
pictures
in
Part
A
and
match
them
with
the
phrases．Check
the
answers.Listen
to
the
recording
then
make
up
of
a
new
dialogue.Master
the
expressions
Translate
these
sentences
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
what
we
should
/shouldn’t
do
in
public.To
learn
how
to
obey
the
rules
in
public
by
some
pictures.
课堂达标
根据汉语意思单词1.
When
people
are
busy,
it’s
impolite
to
__________(打扰)
them.2.
Don’t
________(扔)
small
litter
everywhere
in
the
park.3.
When
we
go
to
attend
a
party,
we
should
dress
______(得体).4.
Everyone
must
_______
(遵守)
laws
in
the
world.5.
We
should_________(放)
the
book
in
its
place.6.
Good
_________(礼貌)
are
important
in
public
places.二、用所给单词适当形式填空1.
After
________
(read),
we
had
better
write
an
article
about
it.2.
___________(not
throw)
stones
at
the
animals
in
the
zoo.3.
You
are
never
too
old
________(learn).4.
He
is
well
enough
________
(run)
around
the
playground.5.
A
good
driver
should
obey
traffic
_______
(rule).
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Welcome
to
the
unit1.drop
litter
everywhere
2.
leave
the
tap
running3.
obey
traffic
rules
4.
queue
for
your
turn5.
old
enough
to
do
6.
too…
to…7.
share…with…
8.
I’m
afraid
not
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
show
some
pictures
to
the
Ss
and
the
Ss
are
warned
to
obey
the
public
manners.After
learning
,they
should
do
the
right
things
not
wrong
things
like
not
drop
litter
everywhere,not
leave
the
tap
running/pick
flowers
in
the
park,keep
quiet
in
the
library/obey
traffic
rules/queue
for
your
turn
in
public
ect.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、根据句意及中文提示完成句子（10分）1.I
like
playing
games,
(尤其)
this
game.2.
I
am
feeling
much
better
after
taking
the
(药)
.3.
He
is
(自豪的)
that
he
has
won
the
gold..4.
It’s
expensive
to
go
to
Australia
by
plane,
I
can’t
a
it.
5.
There
are
so
many
p
in
the
hospital
because
of
the
serious
disease.二、用方框中所给单词的适当形式填空（10分）1.
–Do
you
know
the
on
TV –
Of
course.
He
is
Shui
Junyi
from
CCTV.2.
I
am
so
weak
that
I
can’t
walk
any
.3.
I
think
is
very
important
for
poor
children.4.
The
doctors
didn’t
know
what
caused
the
old
man’s
.5.
ORBIS
uses
a
eye
hospital
to
visit
poor
countries.三、用方框中所给动词的正确时态填空（10分）1.
Jane
often
a
kite
in
the
garden
in
the
past.2.
---Would
you
please
show
me
your
new
radio ---Sorry.
I
to
music.
I
didn’t
catch
you.3.
---Tom
,
you
on
the
phone.---OK,
I’m
coming.4.
---
Where
is
your
father
---
He
the
car.5.
---
the
twins
at
the
party
yet
----Yes,
they
sang
a
new
pop
song
fine
minutes
ago.四、单项选择（20分）(
)
1.
these
pictures,
I
like
this
one
best.
A.
Between
B.
In
C.
Among
D.
About(
)
2.
All
we
need
enough
money
to
carry
on
the
work.??
A.
are,
about
B.
is,
about
C.
are,
with
D.
is,
with(
)
3.
70%
of
the
earth
covered
with
water.
A.
are
B.
is
C.
were
D.
being(
)
4.
of
us
live
on
rice.
We
live
on
rice.A.
Mostly,
most
B.
Most,
almost
C.
Mostly,
almost
D.
Most,
mostly(
)
5.
We
are
China
for
its
long
history
and
colorful
cultures.
A.
proud
of
B.
proud
in
C.
proud
to
D.
proud
that(
)
6.
The
boy
used
a
knife
the
back
door.A.
open
B.
to
open
C.
opens
D.
opening(
)
7.
I
hope
my
father
ask
me
about
my
studies.A.
not
B.
not
to
C.
won’t
D.
don’t(
)
8.
–How
many
do
they
do
during
a
visit
–
Many
patients
during
the
last
visit.A.
operations;
were
operated
on
B.
operation;
were
operated
onC.
operations;
were
operated
D.
operation;
were
operated(
)
9.
I
plan
to
improve
my
spoken
English
listening
to
radio
and
tapes
every
day.
A.
on
B.
with
C.
through
D.
by(
)
10.
Doctors
in
every
part
of
the
world.
A.
need
B.
needed
C.
is
needed
D.
are
needed
五、句型转换（10分）1.
ORBIS
uses
the
plane
as
a
teaching
plane.（改为同义句）
The
plane
is
a
teaching
plane
by
ORBIS.2.
The
doctor
operated
on
the
girl
last
week.
（改为同义句）
The
doctor
operation
the
girl
last
week.3.
She
studies
English
by
watching
movies.(对划线部分提问)
she
study
English
4.
It
provides
basic
education
for
children
in
poor
areas.
(改为同义句)
It
provides
in
poor
areas
。六、翻译句子（20分）1、我太虚弱，走不动了。___________________________________________________________2、我们很多病人没有钱去医院看病，所以我们得去他们那儿。___________________________________________________________3、这架飞机也被也被用作培训中心。___________________________________________________________4、在我上次巡诊期间，有150个病人做了手术。___________________________________________________________5、需要更多的钱继续我们的工作。___________________________________________________________七、短文填空（20分）Mr
King
taught
English
in
a
middle
school.
He
was
very
b
all
the
time
and
couldn’t
do
some
r
.
So
he
left
the
school
and
opened
a
book
shop
in
the
c
of
the
town.
It
wasn’t
big
enough
but
all
the
books
were
nice
and
most
people
liked
to
buy
some
there.
When
the
shop
was
c
,
he
could
read
at
home.
He
knew
a
lot
and
the
learned(有学问的)
person
were
glad
to
make
f
with
him.It
was
Sunday
and
it
was
cold
outside.
Mr
King
was
very
busy.
At
nine
in
the
evening
all
the
buyers
left
e
a
girl.
She
was
dressed
up
and
waited
for
s
there.
Standing
by
the
shelves,
she
looked
over
the
books
one
after
a
.
It
made
them
in
a
fearful
mess(凌乱不堪).
Mr
King
came
up
to
her
and
asked,
“Excuse
me,
madam.
What
can
I
do
for
you ”
“
Your
books
are
all
dull
(乏味的).”
Said
the
girl.
“I
want
a
d
one.”
“That’s
easy”.
Mr
King
smiled.
He
t
out
a
cookbook(烹调书)
and
said,
“Here
you
are,
madam.”1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“using
the
passive
voice
”skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.
sing
clean
fly
listen
want
educate
interview
far
fly
blindUnit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
develop
the
ability
to
infer
the
general
meaning
from
title
and
context.
2.
To
revise
and
expand
vocabulary
in
the
context
article
and
conservation.3.
To
reinforce
students’
ability
to
skim
text
for
overall
meaning
and
scan
for
details4.
To
encourage
the
students
to
try
to
help
the
others.过程与方法：1.Skim
the
article
then
answer
some
questions
and
judge
some
sentences
T
or
F.2.Read
the
article
carefully
again
then
fill
in
the
blanks
with
the
correct
numbers
of
the
paragraphs.情感态度与价值观：
To
train
the
Ss
to
know
more
about
and
carry
forward
the
spirits
of
the
Olympics
world
games.
教学重点难点
To
develop
the
ability
to
infer
the
general
meaning
from
title
and
context.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Lead-inT:
Good
morning,
everyone!
Yesterday
we
learned
a
lot
about
the
people
in
need.
Do
you
still
remember
them
OK,
now
let’s
look
at
some
pictures
and
talk
about
them.A:
What
kind
of
people
are
they
B:
They
are….A:
How
can
we
help
them
B:…A:
Are
there
any
other
ways
to
help
them B:…Step
2
Presentation1.
Show
some
pictures
of
people
with
intellectual
disabilities
.Then
introduce
the
new
words.
e.g.
T:
Those
deaf
people,
blind
people
and
disabled
people
need
our
help.
They
have
physical
disabilities.
Another
group
of
people
need
our
help
too.
They
have
intellectual
disabilities.
How
can
we
help
people
with
intellectual
disabilities
S:…T:
Besides
what
you
have
mentioned,
there
is
another
way
to
help
them.
We
can
volunteer
for
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
The
Special
Olympics
World
Games
are
different
from
other
events.
Have
you
heard
of
this
event
Can
you
tell
me
something
about
it
S:…T:
The
athletes
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
are
children
and
adults
with
intellectual
disabilities.
The
game
gives
them
a
chance
to
show
their
skills
to
the
world.
If
you
are
a
volunteer,
what
will
you
do
for
the
games 2.
Show
a
picture
of
the
12th
Special
Olympics
World
Games,
then
ask
the
students
some
questions.(1) What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
(Basketball,
swimming,
football…) (2)
What
do
you
think
of
the
athletes
(They
are
very
brave/
confident/
great)T:
Yes,
some
events
are
similar
to
those
in
the
Olympics.
Those
athletes
are
confident
and
they
achieve
their
dreams/
make
their
dreams
come
true
by
taking
part
in
the
Games.3.
Finish
the
exercises
on
Page82
B2.
Step
3
Fast
reading1.Today
we
will
read
a
report
on
the
experience
of
a
volunteer
and
find
the
answers
to
the
following
questions:(1)What
is
the
name
of
the
volunteers Liu
Ming.
(2)What
do
volunteers
need
to
do
for
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
They
need
to
provide
support
for
the
athletes
and
help
make
the
event
a
great
success.2.
Read
the
article
by
yourselves
and
try
to
finish
Part
B1.Main
points
Paragraph1
An
introduction
to
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
22
Liu
Ming′s
experience
43
Liu
Ming′s
feelings
about
the
event
1\54
What
volunteers
do
for
the
event
3Step
4
Further
readingRead
then
tell
true
or
falseLiu
Ming
was
a
volunteer
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
(T)Liu
Ming
knew
what
to
expect
before
he
became
a
volunteer.
(F)
There
were
only
a
few
events
in
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games
.
(F)4.
There
are
over
40,000
volunteers
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games
(T)
Liu
Hai
was
born
with
intellectual
disabilities.
(T)Liu
Hai
was
sure
to
win
the
swimming
competition
(F)2.
Read
the
report
paragraph
by
paragraph
then
answer
some
questions.Paragraph1
:
What
did
Liu
Ming
do
in
October
2007 He
volunteered
for
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
in
Shanghai.What
did
he
think
of
his
experience It
was
the
most
amazing
experience
of
his
life.Paragraph2
:
What
are
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
for The
Special
Olympics
World
Games
give
children
and
adults
with
intellectual
disabilities
a
chance
to
show
their
skills
to
the
world
.What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games The
Games
include
many
events
similar
to
those
in
the
Olympics
,
such
as
basketball,
football
and
swimming.
Paragraph3
:
How
many
people
gave
up
their
spare
time
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games Over
40,000
people.What
did
those
volunteers
do
for
the
Games They
provided
support
for
the
athletes
and
helped
make
the
event
a
great
success.Paragraph4
:
Who
is
Li
Hai Li
Hai
is
a
young
boy
from
North
China.
He
was
born
with
intellectual
disabilities.Did
Li
Hai
win
a
gold
in
the
end No.
He
finished
fourth.How
did
Li
Hai
feel
after
the
competition He
felt
more
confident.Paragraph5
:(10)
What
is
the
influence
of
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
They
bring
people
together.Step
5
Loud
reading1.
Repeat
the
article
after
the
tape.2.
Divide
the
whole
class
into
five
groups
then
each
team
read
one
Paragraph.Step
6
Practice
Have
an
interview
about
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
One
will
be
the
reporter
and
the
other
will
be
Li
Ming.Show
the
students
some
questions
like:What
are
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
for What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games What
did
those
volunteers
do
for
the
Games Did
Li
Hai
win
a
gold
in
the
end How
did
Li
Hai
feel
after
the
competition 6.
What
is
the
influence
of
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games Homework:1.
Recite
the
new
words
and
read
the
text.2.
Do
Part
B4
on
Page
83.
Look
at
the
pictures
and
talk
about
them.Show
some
pictures
of
people
with
intellectual
disabilities
.Then
introduce
the
new
words.
Answer
the
questions.Finish
the
exercises
on
Page82
B2.Read
the
article
then
answer
the
questions.Read
the
article
by
yourselves
and
try
to
finish
Part
B1.Read
the
article
again
then
tell
true
or
falseRead
the
report
paragraph
by
paragraph
then
answer
some
questions.Repeat
the
article
after
the
tape.Divide
the
whole
class
into
five
groups
then
each
team
read
one
Paragraph.Answer
some
questions.
Check
out
the
home
work
and
preview.Talk
about
some
pictures
of
children
and
adults
with
intellectual
disabilities.Learn
some
new
words
in
this
article
and
be
sure
everyone
pronounces
them
correctly.Skam
and
scan
the
article
then
complete
some
proper
exercises
in
Part
B1-4Have
a
further
reading
then
answer
many
questions.
课堂达标
一、词组翻译。1.
为……义务做事
2.
最令人惊奇的经历
3.
作为一名志愿者工作
4.
接受训练
5.
与……相似
6.
放弃他们的业余时间
7.
给某人一个做某事的机会
8.
一次成功
9.
游泳教练
10.
获得了金牌
11.
感觉更自信
12.
实现梦想
13.感觉像一个大家庭的一部分
二
根据句意和首字母提示完成句子。1.
---Who
did
he
v
to
do
things
for
yesterday
---
The
elderly.2.
At
last,
he
tried
his
best
to
a
of
his
dream.3.
Special
a
can
take
part
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games.4.
Liu
Ming
did
not
know
what
to
e
when
he
volunteered
for
the
event.5.
Now
he
thinks
that
is
the
most
amazing
e
of
his
life.6.
It’s
fantastic
cards
for
their
teachers.
(work)7.
The
speech
gives
children
with
mental
a
chance
to
learn
more
about
the
world.
(disability)8.
There
are
forty
students
in
our
class,
so
we
need
two
desks.
(many)9.
Although
English
is
very
difficult
to
learn,
some
boys
never
give
up
it.
(learn)10.
Volunteers
must
receive
before
they
take
the
tasks.
(train)三、词汇运用。1.
The
ring
is
made
of
and
looks
very
shiny.
(银)2.
The
price
of
is
much
lower
than
before.
(黄金)3.
The
students
from
Class
5
got
several
in
the
sports
meeting.
(奖品)4.
Those
guests
he
has
invited
come
from
different
___________
(背景).5.
Many
students
don't
know
how
to
___________a
balance
(平衡)
between
study
and
hobbies.
(实现，达到)6.
Liu
xiang's
_________
is
very
strict
(严格的)
with
him.
(教练)7.
I'm
___________that
I
can
work
out
the
hard
maths
problem.
(自信的)8.
Who
do
you
_________
to
help
you
(期待，盼望)9.
I
think
it's
__________
to
do
morning
and
eye
exercises
every
day.
(必要的)10.
Have
you
decided
to
take
the
________
(任务)
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Reading
11.
Read
then
tell
true
or
falseLiu
Ming
was
a
volunteer
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games.
(T)Liu
Ming
knew
what
to
expect
before
he
became
a
volunteer.
(F)
There
were
only
a
few
events
in
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games
.
(F)4.
There
are
over
40,000
volunteers
for
the
2007
Special
Olympics
World
Games
(T)
Liu
Hai
was
born
with
intellectual
disabilities.
(T)Liu
Hai
was
sure
to
win
the
swimming
competition
(F)2.
What
are
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
for What
events
are
included
in
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games What
did
those
volunteers
do
for
the
Games Did
Li
Hai
win
a
gold
in
the
end How
did
Li
Hai
feel
after
the
competition 6.
What
is
the
influence
of
the
Special
Olympics
World
Games
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）In
this
period
,teachers
should
teach
the
Ss
to
use
the
skimming
and
scanning
methods.Help
the
Ss
gain
the
general
in
formation
of
the
Special
Olympics
World
games.Also,
the
Ss
should
learn
and
master
the
usage
of
language
points
freely.Maybe
retelling
is
a
little
difficult
for
the
Ss,
but
it
is
really
a
good
way
to
train
the
Ss’
ability
of
using
English.the
teacher
can
give
them
some
key
words
and
encourage
them
to
do
it
well.Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
教学目标
知识与能力：To
know
how
to
write
a
letter
asking
for
help.To
write
a
letter
asking
for
help.过程与方法：情感态度与价值观：
教学重点难点
How
to
finish
the
article
completely.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionWe’ve
learnt
about
groups
of
people
who
need
our
help
in
this
unit.
Get
the
students
to
tell
us
who
these
people
are
and
how
we
can
help
them Step
2
Warming
upGet
the
students
tell:
other
people
who
need
our
help.Then
present
some
new
words:
survivor,
disease,
operation.Step
3
Writing1.
Get
the
students
to
answer
the
questions:What
are
the
main
parts
of
an
article How
can
we
organize
our
ideas
before
writing 2.
Peter
wants
to
write
a
letter
to
ask
for
help.
Present
Peter’s
ideas
of
his
letter.IntroductionWho
needs
help Main
bodyInformation
about
the
person
or
group
in
needWhat
kind
of
help
do
they
need How
can
we
help ConclusionThanks
for
help3.
Listen
to
Part
B
on
page
90
and
answer
the
questions.
1)
What
is
wrong
with
Xiao
Wei
He
has
a
serious
blood
disease.2)
What
kind
of
help
do
his
family
need
The
need
money
for
Xiao
Wei’s
operation.3)
How
can
we
help
Xiao
Wei
We
can
donate
money.4.
Read
Peter’s
letter
and
answer
the
questions.
1)
How
does
Peter
write
such
a
letter 2)
What
is
the
main
idea
of
each
paragraph
in
Peter’s
letter 5.
Tell
students
the
writing
tips:
Before
writing,
it’s
necessary
for
us
to
organize
our
ideas
first.
When
we
write
a
letter
for
help,
we
need
to
tell
others
two
points:who
needs
helphow
we
can
helpStep
4
Language
points1.
He
has
been
ill
in
hospital
since
last
month.本句用的是现在完成时，表示从过去某一时间开始一直持续到现在的动作或事情。2.
have
a
serious
disease
有严重的血液疾病
表示“生……病”通常用动词have。如：头疼
have
a
headache3.
as
soon
as
possible
尽可能快的4.
lose
one's
life
失去生命，丧生5.
Many
hands
make
light
work.人多力量大。6.
give
a
helping
hand
伸出援助之手7.
get
well
康复
句中well是形容词，表示“健康的”。Step
5
DiscussionDiscuss
in
pairs:
who
you
want
to
help
and
what
you
can
do.
2.
Present
some
questions:
1)
Who
needs
help 2)
How
do
these
people
probably
feel 3)
What
do
these
people
need 4)
How
can
we
help
these
people 5)
What
can
we
give
them 6)
How
can
we
raise
money
for
them 7)
What
can
we
do
with
this
money 8)
What
can
we
ask
others
to
do
for
these
people 9)
Who
should
we
write
to
3.
Useful
expressions:
Give
students
some
useful
expressions.Step
6
ExercisesTranslation.1.
他生病住院是因为一种严重的血液病。
He
was
ill
in
hospital
because
of
a
serious
blood
disease.2.
他们没有足够的钱做这样一个手术。They
don't
have
enough
money
for
such
an
operation.3.
对他来说尽快做手术是很重要的。It's
important
for
him
to
have
the
operation
as
soon
as
possible.）4.
人多力量大。
Many
hands
make
light
work.5.
如果我们都能伸出援助之手，他可能很快就会康复。If
all
of
us
can
give
a
helping
hand,
he
may
get
well
soon.Step
7
Homework
1.
Remember
the
words
and
phrases
in
the
lesson.2.
Write
a
letter
asking
people
to
help.
Use
the
useful
expressions
and
sentences.
Discuss
how
to
help
people
in
need
in
groups
.Then
get
some
groups
to
show
their
results
in
class.To
learn
Peter’s
ideas
of
his
letter.Listen
to
Part
B
on
page
90
and
answer
the
questions.Read
Peter’s
letter
and
answer
the
questions.Pay
attention
to
the
following
the
writing
tips:Before
writing,
it’s
necessary
for
us
to
organize
our
ideas
first.
When
we
write
a
letter
for
help,
we
need
to
tell
others
two
points:who
needs
helphow
we
can
helpDiscuss
in
pairs:
who
you
want
to
help
and
what
you
can
do.
Translate
the
sentences
into
English.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
learn
the
writing
method
“1.introduction.2.Main
body.3.Conclusion.”Before
writing,
it’s
necessary
for
us
to
organize
our
ideas
first.
When
we
write
a
letter
for
help,
we
need
to
tell
others
two
points:1.who
needs
help2.how
we
can
helpWrite
a
letter
asking
people
to
help.
Use
the
useful
expressions
and
sentences.
课堂达标
书面表达假设你是戴维，你想参加学校举办的“我想成为一名志愿者”为题的英语演讲比赛，你用英语写下包含以下要点的演讲稿。要点如下：1. 以前父母不在家时，邻居常帮忙照顾你，你想向他们学习；2.
每年3月5日，你都会去拜访孤独的老人；3.
上周，你在学校里组织了次义演
(charity
show)，……4.
现在你已经帮助两个贫困的孩子重返校园，这些都很有意义;注意：1.
短文须包括所有内容要点，要求语句通顺、意思连贯；2.
第3要点的内容须用1～2句话展开合理想象，作适当发挥；3.
词数70个左右。Hi,
everyone!
My
name
is
David.
I
want
to
be
a
volunteer.___________________________-__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
板书设计
8下
Unit
6
Sunshine
for
all
Task1.IntroductionWho
needs
help Main
bodyInformation
about
the
person
or
group
in
needWhat
kind
of
help
do
they
need How
can
we
help ConclusionThanks
for
help2.
have
a
serious
disease
有严重的血液疾病
表示“生……病”通常用动词have。如：头疼
have
a
headache3.
as
soon
as
possible
尽可能快的4.
lose
one's
life
失去生命，丧生5.
Many
hands
make
light
work.人多力量大。6.
give
a
helping
hand
伸出援助之手7.
get
well
康复
句中well是形容词，表示“健康的”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）After
the
Ss
finish
wrting
,
get
them
to
read
and
correct
each
other’s
articles.It’s
good
for
them
to
remember
the
mistake
they
made.
Sometimes
it
is
better
than
teacher’s
words.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Can
get
useful
information
from
the
listening
material.2.
Able
to
skillfully
use
the
dialogue.
过程与方法：1.to
get
the
Ss
to
talk
about
how
to
use
the
punctuation
in
Chinese.2.to
discuss
how
to
use
the
punctuation
in
English
in
groups.情感态度与价值观：Develop
the
Ss’
interest
of
learning.
教学重点难点
1.
Can
get
useful
information
from
the
listening
material.2.
Able
to
skillfully
use
the
dialogue.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTell
something
about
UNICEF.
Step
2
Speak
up1.
SkimmingWhat’s
the
matter
with
the
boy
He’s
got
toothache.2.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
some
questions.How
long
has
the
boy
felt
bad
Will
the
boy
be
all
right
in
a
few
days 3.
True
or
False.1)
The
boy
does
not
look
very
well.2)
His
face
is
red.
3)
He
has
felt
like
this
for
three
days.4)
He
will
be
all
right
in
a
few
days.5)
He
has
to
take
the
medicine
four
times
a
day.4.
Work
in
pairs
and
make
a
new
conversation.Step
3
Study
skillsPunctuation
英语标点符号的使用逗号（Comma）用于分割并列成分相当于汉语中的顿号作用。用于分割并列句中的分句。用于分割对比或对照成分。用于分割非限定性定语从句、同位语、或附加说明成分。用于分隔附加疑问句或选择疑问句。用于分割直接引语及导语。用于分割句首状语、插入语等。用于分割日期、数字、地点、人名与职衔等、（信件）呼语等。We’re
tired,
thirsty
and
hungry.We
must
hurry
up,
otherwise,
we
will
miss
the
bus.
No
pain,
no
gain.He
wants
us,
you
and
me,
to
go
to
his
place
tomorrow.John
didn’t
take
it,
did
he
Mr.
Green
said,
“Please
call
on
us.”He
left
on
July
20,
2008,
for
a
trip
around
the
world.David
Smith,
Ph.D.句号（Full
Stop
/
Period)用于陈述句、语气温和的祈使句或客气的问句后。用于间接引语之后。
用于某些缩略语、小数点之后。表示序列的字母或数字之后。
Let’s
go
to
the
movies.
May
we
hear
from
you
soon.
Please
tell
me
what
your
father
is.
Prof.
Johnson
1.56%问号（Question
Mark）用于疑问句或语气较委婉的祈使句之后。
用来表示存疑或无把握。用于陈述句之后表示疑问。
用于插入式问句表示强调。
What
can
I
do
for
you
This
vase
dates
back
to
600
BC.
I’m
the
one
to
be
blame
for
the
mess
He
was
so
tired
–
is
that
true
–
that
he
won’t
come.
感叹号（Exclamation
Mark）表示感慨、惊讶、命令、哀怨、赞赏、决心等。
用于感叹词之后。How
time
flies！Be
quiet!
Oh!
Fire!
Please
leave
alone!
God,
you’ve
finished
your
task!引号（Quotation
Marks）引用书面或口头的直接引语。引用事物的名称。引用俚语、反语、定义、词形等。引用对话。表示强调。
Bob
said,
“Let’s
meet
at
my
house
next
time.”
Have
you
read
the
novel
“Flying”
How
do
you
spell
the
word
“charity”
“Did
you
have
a
great
time
last
night ”Step
4
ExercisesMillie
has
written
about
her
experience
as
a
host
of
a
charity
show.
Help
her
add
the
correct
punctuation
marks.
The
big
day
come
very
quickly,
and
suddenly
it
was
the
night
before
the
charity
show.
I
could
not
sleep
at
all
that
night
because
I
was
so
excited,
“Will
it
be
a
success ”
I
kept
asking
myself.Twenty
minutes
before
the
big
event,
the
doors
opened
and
many
people
came
into
the
theatre.
“No
time
to
be
nervous
any
more.
This
is
it!”
I
told
myself.
A
lot
of
people
came
to
watch
the
show.
They
were
making
a
lot
of
noise,
so
I
had
to
speak
loudlyStep
5
HomeworkTo
learn
more
English
punctuation
marks.
Tell
something
about
UNICEF.
Listen
to
the
tape
and
answer
some
questions.Judge
True
or
False.To
learn
to
use
the
Comma,Full
stop,Exclamation
Mark
andQuotation
Marks
correctly.To
use
these
punctuation
marks
in
sentences
and
articles
correctly.Read
the
passage
and
can
use
punctuation
marks
correctly.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
a
health
centre
of
UNICEF.To
learn
the
usage
of
punctuation
marks
.Discuss
the
usage
of
punctuation
mark
in
groups.Do
some
exercise
to
practice
the
usage
of
the
punctuation
marks.
课堂达标
.单项选择(
)1.
We
can
help
these
poor
students
by
.A.
sending
them
clothes
B.
send
them
clothesC.
sending
they
clothes
D.
send
they
clothes(
)2.
I
change
into
my
sports
shoes
I
could
walk
more
comfortably.A.
as
to
B.
so
that
C.
so
to
D.
such
that(
)3.
We
should
our
customers
the
best
products.A.
provides;
B.
provide;
toC.
provide;
for
D.
provide;
with(
)4.
The
organization
is
our
club
and
it
last
year.A.
a
part
of;
set
up
B.
part
of;
set
upC.
parts
of;
was
set
up
D.
part
up;
was
set
up(
)5.
We
can’t
work
out
the
physics
problem.
Can
you
tell
us
A.
how
to
do
B.
what
to
do
itC.
how
to
do
it
D.
what
should
to
do
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Speak
up
and
study
skills1.
True
or
False.1)
The
boy
does
not
look
very
well.2)
His
face
is
red.
3)
He
has
felt
like
this
for
three
days.4)
He
will
be
all
right
in
a
few
days.5)
He
has
to
take
the
medicine
four
times
a
day.2.
逗号（Comma）用于分割并列成分相当于汉语中的顿号作用。用于分割并列句中的分句。用于分割对比或对照成分。用于分割非限定性定语从句、同位语、或附加说明成分。用于分隔附加疑问句或选择疑问句。用于分割直接引语及导语。用于分割句首状语、插入语等。用于分割日期、数字、地点、人名与职衔等、（信件）呼语等。句号（Full
Stop
/
Period)用于陈述句、语气温和的祈使句或客气的问句后。用于间接引语之后。
用于某些缩略语、小数点之后。表示序列的字母或数字之后。Question
Mark用于疑问句或语气较委婉的祈使句之后。
用来表示存疑或无把握。用于陈述句之后表示疑问。
用于插入式问句表示强调。感叹号（Exclamation
Mark）表示感慨、惊讶、命令、哀怨、赞赏、决心等。
用于感叹词之后。How
time
flies！Be
quiet!
Oh!
Fire!
Please
leave
alone!
God,
you’ve
finished
your
task!引号（Quotation
Marks）引用书面或口头的直接引语。引用事物的名称。引用俚语、反语、定义、词形等。引用对话。表示强调。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
Speak
up
and
study
skills.
First
The
Ss
can
also
develop
their
speaking
ability
by
talking
about
what
charities
they’d
like
to
support
and
give
out
the
reason.Then
the
Ss
can
learn
four
kinds
of
punctuation
marks.
By
learning
punctuation
marks,
most
of
the
Ss
can
use
them
correctly.
After
class,
the
Ss
need
more
practice.Unit
5
Good
manners
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Learn
some
new
words
on
talking
about
manners
in
the
UK.2.
Practise
reading
skills
by
learning
the
conversation.过程与方法：To
get
the
Ss
to
scanning
and
skimming
the
conversation
and
learn
more
about
manners
in
UK.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’good
manners
in
different
countries.
1.
To
read
and
learn
the
interview
about
manners.2.
To
learn
different
manners
in
different
countries.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
【前置学习】What
can’t
we
do
in
a
library What
can’t
we
do
in
public What
should
we
do
when
we
see
a
doctor
/when
we
drive… 2、自学教材P66-69，了解相关内容。3、自学检测：Talk
about
manners
in
China【自主探究】Step1.
Pre-readingShow
a
picture.
Can
you
tell
me
what
we
should
and
shouldn’t
do
in
these
public
places 2
Brainstorm：What
customs
in
China
do
you
know 3
Do
you
know
any
different
customs
in
western
countries 4
Show
some
pictures：British
people
shake
hands
when
they
meet
for
the
first
time.
呈现新词组：shake
sb’s
handStep
2.
While
reading1
Skim
the
text
and
answer
the
follow
questions：(1)What
is
the
conversation
about
(Good
manners
in
the
UK．)(2)Who
is
Daniel
talking
to
(Jenny．)2
Listen
and
think:
Part
1
(1ines
1—6)(1)
What
is
the
proper
way
to
greet
people
in
the
UK
(British
people
say
‘hello’
or
“
nice
to
meet
you”
and
shake
the
other
person’s
hand
when
they
meet
for
the
first
time.
)(2)
Who
do
they
greet
With
a
kiss
(They
only
greet
relatives
or
close
friends
with
a
kiss.)Part
2
(1ines
7—17)(1)
How
do
British
people
start
a
conversation
(They
talk
about
the
weather,
holidays,
music,
books,
etc.)(2)
Do
they
talk
about
age
(No,
they
do
not.
)(3)
How
do
they
behave
in
public
(They
behave
politely
in
public.
)Part
3
(1ines
18—26)Are
British
people
polite
at
home
(Yes,
they
are.
)(2)
What
else
should
we
pay
attention
to
in
public
(
We
should
keep
our
voice
down
in
public.)3
Scan
the
text
and
fill
in
the
blanks.Good
manners
in
the
UKHow
to
greet
peopleHow
to
start
a
conversationHow
to
behave
in
publicHow
to
behave
at
home
Step
3.Post
reading1
Finish
the
exercise
of
B1and
check
the
answer.2
Finish
some
exercise
of
B2
and
make
some
students
speak
out
the
British
customsEg：They
say
"hello’”
or
“nice
to
meet
you"
when
greeting
people.
They
don’t
talk
about
age,
weight
or
money.
3
Read
the
text
and
finish
exercise
of
B3,
then
check
the
answer.4
Dialogue
between
Daniel
and
Jenny,
then
make
cards
about
customs【课堂小结】How
do
people
start
a
conversation How
do
people
behave
politely
in
public 【巩固拓展】1
入乡随俗。________________________________________________2
插队是不礼貌的。__________________________________________3
她最够礼貌一直等到你挪开。________________________________Homework:1.
Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.Write
an
article
to
introduce
their
own
homes,
using
the
four
home
pages
as
a
model.
Talk
about
the
manners
in
public.Have
a
preview.Talk
about
manners
in
ChinaTalk
about
some
customs
in
different
countries.To
learn
some
new
expressions.To
skim
the
conversation
then
answer
some
questions.Scan
the
text
and
fill
in
the
blanks.Finish
the
exercise
of
B1and
check
the
answer.Finish
some
exercise
of
B2
and
make
some
students
speak
out
the
British
customsTranslate
the
expressions.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Get
the
Ss
to
talk
about
customs
in
China
then
customs
in
western
countries.Use
some
questions
to
talk
about
customs
in
western
countries.Scan
the
text
then
fill
in
the
blanks.
1.How
to
greet
people
2.
How
to
start
a
conversation
3.
How
to
behave
in
public
4.
How
to
behave
at
home.
课堂达标
根据汉语意思单词1.
What
is
the
_______(适当的)
way
to
greet
people 2.
________(问候)
others
for
the
first
time
is
good
manners.3.
Dogs
are
our
_________(亲密的)
friends.4.
We
should
_______(说)
sorry
to
others
when
we
bump
into
someone.5.
They
always
speak
to
the
elderly
_________(礼貌).6.
What
should
we
do
when
we
hit
someone
by______(偶然) 7.
We
should
________(尊重)
local
people.8.
Do
you
know
any
_______(风俗)
in
the
UK.二、用所给单词适当形式填空1.
When
I
was
young,
my
grandfather
told
me
that
the
sun
___________
(rise)
in
the
east.2.
My
sister
felt
very
happy
because
the
___________
(organize)
chose
her
to
be
the
host.3.
They
are
good
___________
(act),
they
acted
very
well.4.
In
the
___________
(begin),
I
was
very
nervous.5.
I
was
very
___________
(excite)
about
the
coming
show.6.
We
believe
it
will
be
a
great
___________
(successful).7.
You
are
a
new
driver.
It
will
be
___________
(rain)
tomorrow,
please
be
careful.8.
Zhang
Xueyou
will
give
two
___________
(perform)
in
Nanjing
this
year.9.
The
audience
shouted
with
___________
(excite)
at
the
end
of
the
show.10.
We
went
to
the
theatre
and
found
our
seats
___________
(easy).
板书设计
8下
Unit
5
Good
manners
Reading
1Good
manners
in
the
UKHow
to
greet
peopleHow
to
start
a
conversationHow
to
behave
in
publicHow
to
behave
at
home
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
different
kinds
of
manners
,Through
Jenny’s
introduction,
the
Ss
can
know
about
manners
in
UK.By
studying
the
dialogue
,the
Ss
should
use
polite
language
like
“please
,thank
you,
excuse
me
,
sorry
ect.
in
public
and
at
home
.”
Also
,the
Ss
should
understand
the
local
conditions
and
the
customs
of
Britain.the
teacher
encourages
the
Ss
to
respect
each
other
and
use
the
polite
language
as
usual.Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
get
some
idea
about
Gulliver’s
travel
in
Lilliput2.
To
learn
to
describe
Gulliver’s
travel3.
To
master
the
words
and
phrases
in
this
text.过程与方法：To
get
the
Ss
to
scanning
and
skimming
the
passage
then
complete
some
proper
tasks.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
the
Ss’
reading
skills.
教学重点难点
To
skim
the
text
for
overall
meanings
and
scan
for
details
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1.
lead-inT:
What
kind
of
books
do
you
like
S:
T:
Why
S:T:
Do
you
like
fiction
S:T:
Have
you
read
a
book
called
Gulliver’s
Travels,by
Jonathan
Swift
Today
we
will
learn
something
about
it.Step
2.
Presentation
Present
the
new
words
and
expressions
Match
the
words
on
the
left
with
the
meanings
on
the
right.Part
B1,on
page
45Check
he
answers.Step
3.Skimming
Skim
the
text
and
then
answer
the
following
questions:Why
was
Gulliver
so
tired What
started
climbing
over
Gulliver Step
4.
Scanning
Scan
the
text
and
then
answer
the
following
questions:Why
did
Gulliver
swim
in
the
sea Where
did
he
fall
asleep Who
was
on
Gulliver
after
he
wake
up How
big
was
the
small
man How
many
tiny
people
climbed
over
Gulliver’s
body Step
5.
Homework.1.
Read
aloud
the
article
and
underline
the
difficult
parts.
2.
Remember
the
new
words
in
this
lesson.
Try
to
answer
the
questions.Learn
to
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
then
complete
Part
B1,on
page
45Read
the
passage
silently
then
answer
the
two
questions.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.To
talk
about
a
book
called
Gulliver’s
travels.To
read
the
passage
then
answer
some
questions
and
complete
some
exercises.
课堂达标
一、根据句意及中文提示填写单词。1.
It
is
terrible
for
your
car
to
crash
(碰，撞)the
big
tree.2.There
are
five
(手指)on
each
hand.3.
It
was
dark.The
police
(继续)searching
for
the
lost
children.4.
You
can’t
do
it.I
can’t
,
(也).5.The
game
can
test
your
（知识）of
English.6.You
can
wait
for
him
（直到…为止）he
comes
back.二、用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。1.Tom
(fall)
down
on
the
ground
and
hurt
his
leg.2.
My
father
began
(talk)
to
me
after
he
knew
I
failed
my
exams.3.
Look!He
(tie)his
horse
to
the
tree.4.The
man
found
himself
(able)to
walk.5.Mike
was
tired
out
after
(swim)
for
a
long
time.6.She
is
reading
a
book
(call)Gone
with
the
Wind.7.I
stood
up
as
the
sun
(rise)at
the
top
of
the
mountain
last
Sunday.
8.What
(happen)
to
Gulliver
when
he
was
on
the
island
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Reading
1Why
did
Gulliver
swim
in
the
sea Where
did
he
fall
asleep Who
was
on
Gulliver
after
he
wake
up How
big
was
the
small
man How
many
tiny
people
climbed
over
Gulliver’s
body
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
a
travelling
novel
.
the
Ss
like
reading
.
after
scanning
and
skinning,
the
Ss
are
able
to
master
the
main
meaning
of
the
travelling
novel.
And
they
can
do
some
proper
exercises.they
are
interested
in
listening
to
the
teachers.
The
class
is
very
lively
and
active.Unit1
教学目标
By
the
end
of
the
lesson,
students
should
be
able
to:1.
describe
the
details
of
two
different
pictures;2.
organize
ideas
by
using
a
fact
file
before
writing;3.write
a
report
on
the
changes
in
their
hometown;
教学重点
New
words
and
phrases:
open
space,
narrow
and
dirty
roads,
in
their
free
time2.
New
structure:
has
changed
a
lot
over
the
years.
教学难点
1.
To
learn
the
steps
of
writing
a
report.
2.
To
write
a
report
and
improve
the
writing
教学方法
Learn
and
write,PPT
教学过程
教学流程
学生活动
教师活动
教学环节体现
Step1
Before-writing
Step2
While-writingStep3
Post-writing
Step4
Conclusion
Free
talk
in
class.Try
to
get
the
answers.Discuss
in
groups
and
answer
the
questions.Listen
and
try
to
answer
the
questions.
Then
discuss
in
groups.Try
to
get
the
meaning
of
the
whole
passage
and
the
structure
of
the
passage
to
get
ready
for
writing
about
their
own
hometown.After
answering
the
questions,
the
students
discuss
in
groups
and
show
their
thoughts.Help
the
students
to
learn
to
finish
a
passage
about
hometown.
1.
Lead-in2.
Changes
in
Moonlight
TownT:
Look
at
the
pictures
carefully
and
let’s
talk
about
the
changes
in
Moonlight
Town.1.
Make
a
fact
file
to
organize
ideas2.
Complete
Part
C3.
The
structure
of
Amy’s
report4.
Useful
expressions5.
How
to
write
a
good
report 6.
How
to
improve
the
report T:
Here’s
Li
Hua’s
fact
file.
It’s
helpful
to
organize
the
ideas
before
writing.
7.
Writing1.
Group
work2.
Improve
the
writingLet’s
work
together
to
make
our
hometown
a
better
place.
Independent
learningShow
and
checkOffer
helpFeedback
作业布置
1.
Improve
your
writing.
2.
Make
a
poster
on
the
changes
in
your
hometown.
教学反思Unit
4
A
good
read
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
understand
the
structure
of
each
passage.2.
To
recite
the
passage.3.to
master
some
main
sentences.过程与方法：1.
listen
to
the
reading
then
answer
some
questions.2.Read
the
passage
by
themselves.3.try
to
retell
the
story
with
their
own
word.情感态度与价值观：To
develop
a
good
habit
to
read
books
教学重点难点
1.
To
understand
the
structure
of
each
passage.2.
To
recite
the
passage.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step1.Review
something
about
what
we
learnt
last
class1.Why
did
Gulliver
swim
in
the
sea 2.Where
did
he
fall
asleep 3.Who
was
on
Gulliver
after
he
wake
up 4.How
big
was
the
small
man 5.How
many
tiny
people
climbed
over
Gulliver’s
body Step
2.Details
Read
the
story
and
tell
true
or
false.
Part
B3
on
page
46.Ask
the
students
to
correct
the
mistakesCheck
the
answersStep
3.
Doing
a
taskSandy
is
trying
to
explain
what
happened
to
Gulliver.
She
wrote
some
notes
down
on
a
piece
of
paper,
bu
her
mother
tore
it
up
by
mistake.
Help
her
match
the
events
at
the
top
with
their
causes
at
the
bottom.Ask
students
to
read
and
matchCheck
the
answersStep
4.Ask
and
answerComplete
the
conversation
with
the
information
on
page
44,Part
B4
on
page
46
Ask
and
answer
Step5
Finding
out
all
the
useful
expressionsGo
over
the
text
to
find
out
all
the
useful
expressions.
1.crash
against2.as
、、as3.be
tired
out
4.the
same
size
as5.shout
at
sb6.fall
over7.manage
to
doStep
6.Doing
homeworka.
Listen
and
read
after
the
tape
five
times.
b.
Finish
the
exercises
in
the
Evaluation
Handbook.
Review
something
about
what
we
learnt
last
classTry
to
answer
the
questions.Read
the
story
and
tell
true
or
false.
Part
B3
on
page
plete
the
conversation
with
the
information
on
page
44,Part
B4
on
page
46
Go
over
the
text
to
find
out
all
the
useful
expressions.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Let
the
Ss
read
the
article
again,
the
get
some
Ss
try
to
retell
the
story.
课堂达标
一、根据句意及中文提示填写单词。1.
Eating
too
much
cold
food
is
bad
for
your
(胃).2.I
need
your
(肩膀)to
have
a
rest.3.
It’s
difficult
for
a
child
to
(举起)the
heavy
box.4.
The
teacher
and
students
(勉强完成)to
run
out
of
the
fire
house.5.Anna
had
a
fever
yesterday,
so
she
was
（不能的）to
go
to
school.二、用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。1.
I
(wake)
up
at
8
this
morning,
so
I
was
late.2.
A
man
tried
(help)
the
girl
in
the
river.3.
Look!
The
car
is
(come)
straight
towards
the
tree.4.
I
saw
a
very
small
man
(run)into
a
large
house
just
now.5.
It’s
raining
hard
outside.
I
have
to
(stay)
at
home.
板书设计
8
下
Unit
4
A
good
read
Reading
21.
句中as
far
as
I
could
意思是“尽我所能的远”可以转换成as
far
as
possible
使用的是“as…
as…
”结构，其中far为副词。该结构也可以用形容词。
e.g.
It’s
not
as
difficult
as
I
thought.
这没有我想象的那么难。2.
By
the
time
I
finally
felt
the
land
under
my
feet,
I
was
tired
out.be
tried
out
筋疲力尽
3.fall
down
摔倒；倒塌4.
move
up
over
one’s
stomach
在某人的肚子上移动5.
move
up
over
one’s
stomach
在某人的肚子上移动6.
短语the
same
…as…
意思是“与……一样……”。7.
短语的continue
doing
something意思是“继续做……,”也可用continue
to
do
something来表达.8.句中manage
to
do
sth.
的意思是“完成（困难的事），勉力完成某事”
。9.
短语an
army
of
意思是“一群……”e.g.
an
army
of
ants
一群蚂蚁句中的army最常用的意思是“军队（尤指陆军）”。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
a
travelling
novel
.
the
Ss
like
reading
.
after
scanning
and
skinning,
the
Ss
are
able
to
master
the
main
meaning
of
the
travelling
novel.
And
they
can
do
some
proper
exercises.they
are
interested
in
listening
to
the
teachers.
The
class
is
very
lively
and
active.Unit
8
A
green
world
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
Learn
some
words
and
phrases.
2.
Practise
listening
skills
by
listening
to
a
text.过程与方法：1.
to
get
the
Ss
to
listen
to
the
conversation
between
Daniel
and
Sandy
then
write
the
correct
information
in
the
table.2.listen
to
the
materials
then
complete
Part
A2
,
check
the
answers
in
groups.情感态度与价值观：
Develop
the
Ss
to
protect
the
environment
and
live
a
green
life.
教学重点难点
1.
Learn
some
words
and
phrases.
2.
Practise
listening
skills
by
listening
to
a
text.
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
RevisionTranslate
some
sentences.Step
2
PresentationPresent
the
new
words.empty
adj.
空的survey
n.
调查Read
aloud
these
new
wordsStep
3
Warming
upHow
can
we
live
a
green
life What
can
we
do
to
protect
the
environment
in
our
daily
lives Using
some
pictures
to
show
how
to
go
green
in
our
daily
lives.Step
4
ListeningListen
to
the
tape
and
finish
Part
A1.The
Class
1,
Grade
8
students
want
to
do
a
survey
to
get
some
ideas
for
their
presentation
on
how
to
go
green.
Listen
to
the
conversation
between
Daniel
and
Sandy
and
write
the
correct
information
in
the
table
below.A
survey
on
students’
daily
habits.Time:
Survey
(1)
_____________
Daniel
and
Sandy
meet:
(2)
__________________Place:
(3)
__________________Numbers
of
students:
(4)
_________
Boys:
(5)__________
Girls:
(6)
_________Numbers
of
questions:
(7)
__________Keys:
(1)
4
p.m.
this
Wednesday
(2)
3:40
p.m.
this
Wednesday
(3)
Room
201
(4)
50
(5)
25
(6)
25
(7)
6Listen
to
the
tape
and
finish
Part
A2.Daniel
and
Sandy
are
talking
about
the
results
of
the
survey.
Listen
carefully
and
then
complete
the
table
plete
Part
A3.Sandy
is
writing
a
note
to
Mr
Wu
about
the
survey
she
and
Daniel
have
done.
Help
her
complete
the
note.
Use
Parts
A1
and
A2
to
help
you.Dear
Mr
Wu,Daniel
and
I
did
a
survey
this
(1)__________.
Students
were
asked
about
their
(2)____________.Here
are
the
results
of
the
survey.
Only
(3)_____
students
usually
take
showers
for
less
than
10
minutes,
but
(4)_____
students
turn
off
the
tap
when
brushing
their
teeth.
Only
15
students
recycle
(5)____________,
but
(6)____
students
use
both
sides
of
the
paper.
It
is
great
that
most
students
remember
to
(7)_________
the
lights
when
they
leave
a
room,
but
few
students
take
their
own
(8)________
to
the
supermarket.The
survey
shows
that
students
are
doing
a
lot
to
help
protect
the
environment,
but
there
are
still
many
more
things
they
can
do.SandyKeys:
1.
Wednesday
2.
daily
habits
3.
20
4.
35
5.
empty
bottles
6.
40
7.
turn
off
8.
bagsStep
5
Let’s
do
a
survey.Work
in
groups
of
four
and
ask
your
group
members
about
their
daily
habits.
Then
write
a
short
passage
about
the
results
and
report
it
to
the
class.Step
6
Exercises一、根据汉语提示填空。1.
There
is
a
______(调查)
on
learning
English.2.
He
joined
an
English
club
to
improve
his
______
(日常的)
English.3.
Smoking
is
a
kind
of
bad
_______(习惯)
.4.
Some
of
the
waste
material
can
be
reworked
for
_________
(再利用).
Keys:
1
survey
2
daily
3
habit
4
recycling二、汉译英。1.
几乎没有学生带他们自己的袋子去超市。2.
这是调查的结果。Keys:
1.
Few
students
take
their
own
bags
to
the
supermarket.
2.
Here
are
the
results
of
the
survey.
Step
7
Homework1.
Remember
the
new
words
in
this
lesson.
2.
Preview
the
next
lesson.
Translate
some
sentences.Learn
these
new
words.Discuss
the
questions
and
give
better
answers.Listen
to
the
tape
and
finish
Part
A1.Listen
to
the
tape
and
finish
Part
A2.Complete
Part
A3.do
a
survey
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.Talk
about
how
to
live
green
lives.Listen
to
the
materials
then
complete
Part
A1
and
A2.If
necessary,
listen
more
,then
check
the
answers
together.
课堂达标
一、根据汉语提示填空。1.
There
is
a
______(调查)
on
learning
English.2.
He
joined
an
English
club
to
improve
his
______
(日常的)
English.3.
Smoking
is
a
kind
of
bad
_______(习惯)
.4.
Some
of
the
waste
material
can
be
reworked
for
_________
(再利用).
Keys:
1
survey
2
daily
3
habit
4
recycling二、汉译英。1.
几乎没有学生带他们自己的袋子去超市。2.
这是调查的结果。Keys:
1.
Few
students
take
their
own
bags
to
the
supermarket.
2.
Here
are
the
results
of
the
survey.
板书设计
8下
Unit
8
A
green
world
Integrated
skillsHow
can
we
live
a
green
life What
can
we
do
to
protect
the
environment
in
our
daily
lives Time:
Survey
(1)
_____________
Daniel
and
Sandy
meet:
(2)
__________________Place:
(3)
__________________Numbers
of
students:
(4)
_________
Boys:
(5)__________
Girls:
(6)
_________Numbers
of
questions:
(7)
__________
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）It’s
not
easy
for
the
Ss
to
keep
good
daily
habits.After
listening
,the
Ss
can
understand
the
meaning
of
listening
materials,
and
do
some
proper
exercises.
After
class
,
the
Ss
must
be
trained
to
keep
good
daily
habits.Unit
2
Travelling
教学目标
知识与能力：Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.过程与方法：Through
the
test,
understand
the
Ss'
condition
of
mastering
the
content.情感态度与价值观：To
educate
the
Ss
to
finish
the
test
paper
by
themselves.
教学重点难点
Master
the
new
words
and
expressions
,some
main
sentences
in
this
unit.
教
学
活
动
内
容
一、
单项选择
(
)1.
The
Statue
of
Liberty
is
in
__________.
A.
Pisa
of
Italy
B.
London
of
England
C.
Tokyo
of
Japan
D.
New
York
of
the
USA(
)2.
---Why
did
your
parents
buy
a
shiny
golden
silk
dress
yesterday ---They
bought
it
_____
me.
It’s
my
birthday
today!
A.
at
B.
on
C.
in
D.
for(
)3.
---______
to
the
USA
---No,
never
,
but
I
went
to
Canada
a
few
years
ago
.
A
.
Have
you
been
B
.
Have
you
gone
C.
Did
you
go
D
.
Will
you
go
(
)4．Nancy
was
watching
TV
I
arrived
at
her
home
.
A.
but
B.
as
soon
as
C.
while
D.
when
(
)5.
Mr
LI
_____Kunming
.
He
_____
the
city
three
times
.
This
time
he
_____
Kunming
for
three
days
.
A
.
has
been
to,
has
gone
to
,
have
been
in
B
.has
gone
to
,
has
been
to
,
has
been
in
C
.
has
been
in
,
has
been
to
,
have
gone
to
D
.
has
gone
to
,
has
been
in
,
has
been
to
(
)6.
I
became
a
teacher
15
years
____.
I
have
been
a
teacher
____1997
.
I
have
taught
here
___about
15
years
.
A
.
ago
,
since
,
for
B
.
ago
,
for
,
since
C
.
ago
,
before
,
for
D
.
ago
,
in
,
after(
)7.
Can
you
stop
______
a
word
with
me
We
haven’t
seen
each
other
for
a
long
time
.
A
.
to
have
B
.
having
C
.
have
D
.
had
(
)8.
The
place
was
so
beautiful
that
her
husband
could
not
stop____photos.
He
took
200
photos
that
day!
A.
to
show
B.
showing
C.
taking
D.
to
take(
)9.
---Oh
,
Aunt
Li
,
your
necklace
looks
nice
.
Is
it
new
----
No
,
I
______
it
for
two
years
.
A
.
had
B
.
have
bought
C
.
bought
D
.
have
had
(
)10.
Mr
Hua
to
Japan.
He’ll
come
back
in
two
weeks.
A.
goes
B.
went
C.
has
gone
D.
will
go(
)11.
----
How
long
have
Mr
and
Mrs
Green
_______
----
For
more
than
twenty
years
.
A
.
married
B
.
had
married
C
.
got
married
D
.
been
married
(
)12.
Don’t
forget
to
return
the
book
to
the
library
.
You
have
____
it
for
two
weeks
.
A
.
borrowed
B
.
had
C
.
lent
D
.
kept
(
)13.
What
bad
weather
we
have!
It
has
rained
_____
the
day
before
yesterday.
A.
on
B.
in
C.
at
D.
since(
)14
.
More
than
20
people
____
in
Kunming
terrorist
incident
_____
March
1
.
A
.
have
died
,for
B
.
have
died
,since
C
.
have
been
dead
,since
D
.
have
been
dead
,
for(
)15．——I’m
going
on
a
trip
to
Japan
after
the
exam.
——Really
!
A.
Have
a
nice
time
B.
Congratulations
C.
OK
D.
It’s
nice
of
you二、
完形填空
Ashley
Smith
is
a
26-year-old
single
mother
with
a
daughter.
She
was
moving
into
her
house
in
Atlanta,
Georgia
early
on
the
morning
of
March
12,
when
a
man
1
her
to
her
door,
and
put
a
gun(枪)
to
her
side.
“I
started
walking
to
my
door,
and
I
felt
really,
really
2
,”she
said
in
a
TV
interview
last
week.
The
man
was
Brian
Nichols,
33
years
old.
He
3
at
an
Atlanta
courthouse
on
March
11.The
police
were
4
him.
Nichols
tied
Smith
up
with
tape,
but
set
her
free
after
she
begged
him
not
to
take
her
5
again
and
again.
“I
told
him
6
he
hurt
me,
my
little
girl
wouldn’t
have
a
mummy,”
she
said
with
tears.
“I
just
talked
to
him
and
tried
to
7
believe
me,”
Smith
said.
She
asked
Nichols
8
he
chose
her.
“He
said
he
thought
I
was
an
angel
9
from
God,
and
God
asked
him
to
do
so.”
Smith
even
10
for
the
man
before
he
allowed
her
to
leave.
Nichols
was
11
when
she
made
him
breakfast
and
that
the
two
of
them
watched
TV,
seeing
12
looking
for
him.
“I
cannot
13
that’s
me
on
the
TV!”
Nichols
told
the
woman.
Then,
Nichols
asked
Smith
what
she
thought
he
14
do.
She
said,
“I
think
you
should
turn
yourself
in.
If
you
don’t,
lots
more
people
are
going
to
get
15
.”
Finally,
he
let
her
go.
Then
she
called
the
police.
(
)1.A.took
B.followed
C.found
D.noticed
(
)2.A.sad
B.angry
C.frightened
D.amazed
(
)3.A.slept
B.lost
a
car
C.caught
a
thief
D.killed
three
people
(
)4.A.waiting
for
B.thinking
of
C.looking
at
D.searching
for
(
)5.A.money
B.life
C.daughter
D.clothes
(
)6.A.if
B.unless
C.that
D.when
(
)7.A.make
him
B.help
him
C.ask
him
to
D.tell
him
to
(
)8.A.how
B.why
C.when
D.where
(
)9.A.sent
B.taken
C.given
D.come
(
)10.A.cooked
dinner
B.made
tea
C.made
cakes
D.cooked
breakfast
(
)11.A.surprised
B.excited
C.afraid
D.unhappy
(
)12.A.his
family
B.his
friends
C.the
pllice
D.the
little
girl
(
)13.A.understand
B.believe
C.say
D.expect
(
)14.A.might
B.could
C.should
D.was
able
to
n
(
)15.A.tired
B.hurt
C.caught
D.worried
三、
阅读理解
【
A
】Guitar
lessonsAn
excellent
musician.Good-at
teaching
kids
for
5
years.Your
home
or
mine.Call
Larry
at
86087593.Taxi
driver
wantedFull
time.Experience
and
good
knowledge
of
the
city
are
necessary.Under
45
years
old.Call
Mr
White
at
75132633
or
13935728866.Lost
dogMedium
size,
spotted
white
short
hair.Answer
you
when
you
call
it
David.Many
thanks
for
returning
it.Call
Susan
at
87328059.Flat
for
saleTwo
bedrooms,
a
kitchen
and
a
bathroom.Hot
water
8:00—18:00.Beautiful
sights
out
of
the
windows.E-mail:
sigfund@.(
)1.
Who
can
teach
children
to
play
the
guitar
A.
Mr
White.
B.
David.
C.
Larry.
D.
Susan.(
)2.
Which
number
should
you
call
on
if
you
find
the
lost
dog
A.
87328059.
B.
86087593.
C.
75132633.
D.
13935728866.(
)3.
Which
of
the
four
people
may
get
the
job
as
a
taxi
driver
A.
A
50-year-old
person.
B.
A
person
who
can
drive
and
has
free
time
on
weekends.
C.
A
person
who
has
just
got
his
driver's
license.
D.
A
40-year-old
person
who
can
drive
well
in
the
city.(
)4.
When
is
hot
water
provided
in
the
flat
according
to
the
ad
A.
In
the
daytime.
B.
At
night.
C.
At
any
time.
D.
Only
in
the
afternoon.(
)5.
How
can
you
contact(联系)
the
owner
of
the
flat
for
more
information
A.
By
making
a
phone
call.
B.
By
sending
an
e-mail.
C.
By
going
to
visit
it.
D.
By
sending
a
letter.
B“How
are
you ”
is
a
nice
question.
It’s
a
friendly
way
that
people
in
the
United
States
greet
each
other.
But
“How
are
you ”
is
also
a
very
unusual
question.
It’s
a
question
that
often
doesn’t
have
an
answer.
The
person
who
asks
“How
are
you ”
hopes
to
hear
the
answer
“Fine”,
even
if
the
person’s
friend
isn’t
fine.
The
reason
is
that
“How
are
you ”
isn’t
really
a
question
and
“Fine”
isn’t
really
an
answer.
They
are
simply
other
ways
of
saying
“Hello”
or
“Hi”.
Sometimes,
people
don’t
say
what
they
mean
either.
For
example,
when
someone
asks
“Do
you
agree ”,
the
other
person
might
be
thinking,
“No,
I
disagree,
I
think
you
are
wrong
…”
But
it
isn’t
very
polite
to
disagree
so
strongly,
so
the
other
person
might
say
“I’m
not
sure.”
It’s
a
nicer
way
to
say
that
you
don’t
agree
with
someone.
People
also
don’t
say
exactly(准确地)
what
they
are
thinking
when
they
finish
talking
with
other
people.
For
example,
many
talks
over
the
phone
finish
when
one
person
says
“I’ve
to
go
now.”
often,
the
person
who
wants
to
stop
gives
an
excuse:
“
Someone’s
at
the
door.”
“Something
is
burning
on
the
stove.”
The
excuse
might
be
real,
or
it
might
not.
Perhaps
the
person
who
wants
to
hang
up(挂电话)
simply
doesn’t
want
to
talk
any
more,
but
it
isn’t
polite
to
say
that.
The
excuse
is
more
polite,
and
it
doesn’t
hurt
the
other
person.
Whether
they
are
greeting
each
other,
talking
about
an
idea,
or
finishing
a
talk,
people
often
don’t
say
exactly
what
they
are
thinking.
It’s
an
important
way
that
people
try
to
be
nice
to
each
other,
and
it’s
all
part
of
the
game
of
language.
(
)1.
When
a
person
in
the
United
States
asks
“How
are
you ”,
he
or
she
wants
to
hear
“__________”
A.
How
are
you
B.
Hello.
C.
I
don’t
know.
D.
Very
well,
thank
you.
(
)2.
If
you
have
different
opinions
from
someone,
it
is
polite
to
say
“________”.
A.
You’re
wrong
B.
I’m
not
so
sure
if
you
are
right
C.
Of
course,
I
disagree
D.
No,
I
don’t
agree
with
you(
)3.
Which
of
the
following
is
a
polite
way
to
finish
a
talk
A.
I
have
no
time
to
talk
with
you
now.
B.
I
want
to
stop.
C.
I
have
to
go
now.
D.
I
don’t
want
to
talk
any
more
.(
)4.
According
to
the
passage,
when
a
person
says
“Something
is
burning
on
the
stove.”,
it
means
that
_______.
A.
he
is
giving
an
excuse
B.
he
is
hurting
someone’s
feelings
C.
he
is
talking
to
a
person
at
the
door
D.
he
is
going
to
another
place(
)5.
One
of
the
rules(规则)
of
the
game
of
language
is
probably
________.
A.
“Always
say
what
you
mean”
B.
“Don’t
disagree
with
people”
C.
“Usually
say
exactly
what
you
are
thinking”
D.
“Be
polite”四、词汇A）根据句意及提示写单词1.The
students
of
Class
4
are
going
____________
(
旅行)
next
Friday.2.
Most
children
like
_____________(卡通)
characters.3.
6.My
parents
and
I
had
a
really____________(美妙的)
time
in
the
countryside.4.
John
is
going
to
________
(结婚)
Jane
.5.I
see
Andy
playing
on
the
_________
(沙滩)
.B）缺词填空Have
you
e
1
planted
a
few
trees
on
Tree
Planting
Day Each
year,
many
of
people,
both
old
a
2
young,
plant
a
lot
of
trees.But
this
may
not
be
the
best
w
3
to
make
your
home
a
greener
place.Last
week,
we
v
4
a
park
in
Hebei.We
were
s
5
to
find
most
of
the
trees
had
been
burnt(燃烧).The
workers
told
us
that
the
trees
d
6
soon
after
they
were
planted
because
they
were
not
watered
well
enough.So
the
workers
burnt
them
and
changed
the
trees
for
new
trees
to
be
planted
this
year.On
a
card
found
in
one
of
the
trees,
a
student
w
7
.
“I
hope
this
tree
will
g
8
up
with
me
to
become
the
backbone(栋梁)
of
our
conntry.”
The
workers
said
that
the
survial
of
the
trees
was
really
more
important
t
9
how
many
trees
were
planted.Some
people
in
Beijing
now
have
a
new
idea
that
they
can
donate（捐助）
some
m
10
and
let
professionals(专业人士)plant
and
take
care
of
trees.1.__________
2.__________
3.__________
4.__________
5.__________6.__________
7.__________
8.__________
9.__________
10._________五、选词填空get
ready
,
later
in
the
afternoon
,
such
as
,
get
excited
,
enjoy
oneself
,
do
some
shopping
,
run
after
,
at
the
end
of
,
buy
…for
,
at
high
speed
,
1.Children
began
_______
when
they
saw
so
many
funny
monkeys2.
We
____________________
in
the
Cangwu
Park
last
Sunday
.We
had
a
good
time
here
.3.
I
saw
a
cat
________________
a
mouse
just
now
.
It’s
very
interesting
.4.There
is
a
hospital
______________________
the
road
.
Go
straight
on
and
you’ll
find
it
.5.
It’s
very
dangerous
to
drive
____________________
.6.The
radio
says
there
will
be
rain
________________________
somewhere
.7.
I
want
_________
a
coat
_____
my
mother
on
the
Women’s
Day
.8.---Why
are
you
so
busy
----
I
_____________
for
the
coming
exam
now
.9.Stationery
,____________
paper
,
pens
,
sells
well
in
the
shop
.10.
My
mother
likes
_________________________
at
weekends
.六、完成句子1.
西湖在杭州，浙江省的省会。The
West
Lake
is
in
Hangzhou
,
______
______
______
Zhejiang
.2.
我去过南京许多次。
I
______
______
_____
Nanjing
many
times
.3.歌舞表演是一天中最棒的部分。Singing
and
dancing
shows
were
______
_______
_______
_______the
day.4.我看完了整个故事。I
have
finished
reading
__________
__________
___________.5.
在圣诞节，孩子们把袜子放在床尾。At
Christmas
,children
put
their
stocking
____
____
____
_____
the
bed
.6.
这个公园很美，我们情不自禁地拍起照片来。The
park
is
so
beautiful
that
we
______
______
______
photos.7.He
______________________________
(离开)
Beijing
for
a
week
.七、任务型阅读
Travelling
is
a
very
good
activity.
When
you
get
tired
of
your
work
or
study
,and
when
you
have
free
time
,you
can
go
to
a
beautiful
place
to
enjoy
the
beauty
or
nature
or
other
cities
.
You
can
take
in
fresh
air,
meet
different
people
and
make
friends
with
them
.It’s
good
for
your
health
to
do
so
.But
at
times
,travelling
is
not
an
enjoyable
thing
.
For
example
,
the
weather
can
be
changeable
.There
may
be
rain
when
you
travel
.You
may
catch
a
cold
or
be
ill
while
travelling
.The
worst
thing
is
that
the
thieves
may
steal
your
money
.All
these
may
happen
to
a
tourist
.When
you
go
on
a
trip
,
you
must
get
everything
ready
.Firstly
,
you
must
have
clear
information
about
the
weather
.Secondly
,ask
a
friend
to
go
with
you
so
that
you
can
help
each
other
.Thirdly
,
you
must
be
careful
everywhere
and
not
to
cause
accidents
.
If
you
do
this
,
you
will
surely
enjoy
your
travelThe
title
of
this
article
1____________________2_____________of
travelling
When
you
have
3________
time
,you
can
go
to
a
beautiful
place
to
enjoy
the
4___________
beauty
.Disadvantages
of
travellingBut
5____________
,
travelling
is
an
6_________thing
.
You
may
catch
a
cold
or
get
ill
when
you
7________.And
thieves
may
steal
your
8_________.Other
things
about
travellingBefore
the
trip
,
you
should
get
ready
9_______everything
.
Firstly
,
you
must
have
clear
information
about
the
weather
.
Secondly
,ask
a
friend
to
go
with
you
so
that
each
of
you
can
get
help
.
Thirdly
,
you
must
be
careful
everywhere
and
not
to
cause
accidents
.
If
you
do
this
,
you
will
be
10______
enjoy
your
travel.八、书面表达。根据提示，以“A
Trip
to
Beijing
”为题写一篇词数80个左右的短文。时间2011国庆地点北京人物我和父母经历游览了许多名胜；有来自世界各地的游客；景色如此美丽，我们不停地拍照。登了长城，我心里感到很自豪（be
proud
of）。我们品尝了美味的北京烤鸭。…………………………感受玩了几天我们有点累，但非常兴奋；难忘在北京的日子。
A
Trip
to
Beijing
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）Through
testing,the
Ss
can
master
the
content
in
this
unit
,they
can
master
the
new
words
and
expressions
and
some
main
sentences.they
can
use
“have/has
been
and
have/has
gone,verbs
with
for
and
since”skillfully.but
some
of
them
are
good
at
memorizing
the
words
and
expressions
,they
are
not
ready
to
spend
much
time
on
learning
English.
After
class
,they
should
be
educated
more.Unit
7
International
charities
教学目标
知识与能力：1.
To
understand
the
structure
of
the
passive
voice.2.
Master
Passive
voice
in
the
simple
present
and
past
tenses过程与方法：1.first
have
seft-assessment
learning
in
groups.2.discuss
some
problems
the
Ss
have
in
groups
3.
to
get
some
Ss
to
explain
the
usage
of
the
passive
voice.情感态度与价值观：
Develop
the
Ss
to
learn
self-assessment.
教学重点难点
1.
To
understand
the
structure
of
the
passive
voice.2.
Master
Passive
voice
in
the
simple
present
and
past
tenses
教
学
活
动
内
容
活
动
组
织
过
程
改
笔
Step
1
Presentation1.
Give
students
a
picture,
present
new
words
and
phrases.2.
Give
students
some
passive
sentences
in
the
unit,
translate
them
into
Chinese.Step
2
Grammar1.
被动语态和主动语态的基本概念
当主语是谓语的执行者时，用主动语态。当主语是谓语的承受者时，用被动语态。如：We
clean
the
classroom
every
day.
The
classroom
is
cleaned
(by
us)
every
day.2.
被动语态的基本构成主语be动词过去分词一般现在时Iamsupported.You/We/TheyareHe/She/Itis一般过去时Iwassupported.You/We/TheywereHe/She/Itwas3.
Practice:
Underline
the
passive
voice
in
the
following
sentences.1)
The
cake
was
eaten
by
Daniel.2)
Nancy
bought
a
book
yesterday.3)
The
little
dog
is
looked
after
very
well
by
Simon.4)
He
is
reading
English.5)
The
computer
is
bought
by
my
uncle
.6)
I
am
woken
up
by
my
father
every
morning.4.
被动语态的基本用法1)
动作的执行者是泛指或者不言自明时。2)
在不知道动作的执行者是谁时。3)
需要强调动作的承受者时。
4)
出于委婉或礼貌而避谈动作的执行者时。5)
在被动语态的句子中,
如果我们需要指出动作的执行者,
可以由by引出。注意：有些动词常用于被动语态。如：He
was
born
in
Nanjing.
The
mobile
phone
was
made
in
China.5.
Practice
1)Today
English
_______
all
over
China.
A.
teach
B.
teaches
C.
is
taught
D.
are
taught2)
The
meeting
_______
two
weeks
ago.
A.
hold
B.
was
held
C.
were
held
D.
is
held3)
The
thief
________
by
the
police
last
night.
A.
caught
B.
is
caught
C.
was
caught
D.
were
caught4)
The
photos
_______
when
I
was
young.
A.
were
taken
B.
was
taken
C.
are
taken
D.
is
taken
5)
Millie
is
my
best
friend.
I
___
often
____
to
her
party.
A.
is
invited
B.
am
invited
C.
are
invited
D.
was
invited6)
Last
year
Beijing
____
by
a
big
sandstorm.
A.
is
hit
B.
were
hit
C.
will
be
hit
D.
was
hit6.
主动语态和被动语态的句式转换主动语态主语She谓语(主动式)hurt 宾语me.被动语态原宾语(改为主格)
I谓语(被动式)was
hurtby原主语(改为宾格)her.7.
主动+谓语+双宾语的句式转换主动语态主语He谓语(主动式)passed间宾me 直宾a
book.被动语态原直宾A
book谓语(被动式)was
passedtomeby原主语(改为宾格)him.原间宾(改为主格)I谓语(被动式)was
passed 原直宾a
bookby原主语(改为宾格)him.注意：1)有些动词,
其主动语态形式含有被动意义，系动词smell,
taste,
sound,
feel等。
The
dish
smells
good.
The
music
sounds
nice.
还有一些不及物动词,常用主动语态,
和well,
easily等副词连用,
含有被动意义。如:
read,
write,
draw,
sell,
wash,
cook,
clean
等。
The
books
sell
well.
这些书很畅销。The
pen
writes
smoothly.2)
在感官动词和使役动词的主动语态句式中,
动词不定式的to常省去,
但是在被动语态中要加上to。
主动语态主语The
teacher谓语(主动式)made宾语
him 不带to的不定式retell
the
story.被动语态原宾语(改为主格)He谓语(被动式)was
made带to的不定式
to
retell
the
story
by原主语(改为宾格)the
teacher.8.
Finish
Exercises
A-B
on
page
99-100.Step
3
Do
some
exercises把下列主动语态的句子变为被动语态,或把被动语态的句子变为主动语态。1.
Tome
often
helps
Jenny
when
she
is
in
trouble.2.
I
bought
a
computer
last
week.3.
The
whole
cake
was
eaten
by
Eddie
yesterday.4.
Many
trees
are
planted
by
students
and
teachers
every
year.5.
She
takes
good
care
of
the
children.Step
4
Homework1.
Review
the
contents
of
this
lesson.2.
Finish
the
exercises
in
the
workbook.3.
Preview
the
next
lesson.
Learn
some
new
words
with
some
pictures.To
learn
about
th
e
passive
voiceMaster
the
form
and
usage.Underline
the
passive
voice
in
the
following
sentences.Do
some
exercises.Pay
attention
to
the
special
cases.Change
the
sentences
into
the
passive
voice.
Check
out
the
homework
and
preview.First
the
Ss
must
know
about
the
meaning
of
the
passive
voice.Next
they
should
master
the
form
and
usage
of
the
passive
voice.The
Ss
can
learn
to
change
the
active
voice
into
the
passive
voice
.Pay
attention
to
the
special
cases
in
usual
study.
课堂达标
一、用所给单词的适当形式填空1.
The
building
(use)
as
a
training
centre.2.
When
his
eye
problem
(cure)3.
Let
me
(show)
you
around
my
hometown.4.
The
lives
of
the
patients
with
eye
problems
(improve)
by
the
doctors
two
years
ago.5.
He
pick
up
some
(leaflet)
on
the
Great
Wall.二、单项选择
(
)1.
–At
present,
one
of
the
best
ways
to
study
is
working
in
groups.–More
chances
to
students
to
learn
from
each
other.A.
offer
B.
are
offered
C.
have
offered
D.
are
offering(
)2.
–
a
new
library
in
our
school
last
year
–Yes,
it
was.
A.
Is;
built
B.
Was;
built
C.
Does;
build
D.
Did;
build(
)3.
Cotton(棉花)
in
the
south-east
of
China.
A.
is
grown
B.
are
grown
C.
grows
D.
grow(
)4.
–How
many
trees
every
year
–About
256,000.000.
A.
are
planted
B.
will
plant
C.
have
planted
D.
planted(
)5.
The
Great
Wall
all
over
the
world.
A.
knows
B.
knew
C.
is
known
D.
was
known
板书设计
8下
Unit
7
International
charities
Grammar1.被动语态的基本构成主语be动词过去分词一般现在时Iamsupported.You/We/TheyareHe/She/Itis一般过去时Iwassupported.You/We/Theywere被动语态的基本用法1)
动作的执行者是泛指或者不言自明时。2)
在不知道动作的执行者是谁时。3)
需要强调动作的承受者时。
4)
出于委婉或礼貌而避谈动作的执行者时。5)
在被动语态的句子中,
如果我们需要指出动作的执行者,
可以由by引出。
教
后
反
思
（上节课存在问题的解决情况、本课教学经验或问题描述、存在问题的原因分析、提出改进措施）This
period
is
to
learn
the
meaning
,forms
and
usage
of
the
simple
present
tense
of
the
passive
voice.
Though
the
Ss’
self-assessment
learning,
most
of
the
Ss
can
master
the
meaning
,
form
and
usage
of
the
simple
present
tense
of
the
passive
voice.
But
a
few
Ss
often
forget
“the
past
participle.”
After
class,
the
Ss
must
master
the
past
participle
of
verbs.
